CONCISE SYSTEM OF INSTRUCTIONS AND 
REGULATIONS 



THE MILITIA AND VOLUNTEERS 

OF THE UNITED STATES, 
COMPREHENDING 

THE EXERCISES AND MOVEMENTS 

OF 

The Infantry, Light Infantry, and Riflemen; 
Cavalry and Artillery: 

TOGETHER WITH 

The manner of doing duty in Garrison and in Camp, and the 
forms of 

PARADES, REVIEWS, and INSPECTIONS, 

As established by authority for the government of the Regular 
Army. 



PREPARED AND ARRANGED BY 

BREVET CAPTAIN S. COOPER, 

Aid dc Camp and Assistant Adjutant General. 



UNDER THE SUPERVISION OF 

MAJOR GENERAL ALEXANDER MACOMB, 

Commanding the Army of the United Stales. 



$hf lattttyhfa : 

ROBERT P. DESILVER, No. 255 MARKET STREET. 



18 36. 
P 



U/43 
■C7 



Entered according to the act of Congress, in the year 1836, 
by Alexander Macomb & S. Cooper, in the clerk's office of the 
district court of the District of Columbia. 



STEREOTYPED BY JOHN FAGAN, 
PHILADELPHIA. 



PREFACE. 



In this country, the Militia, from the nature of the 
government, must be depended on principally for repel- 
ling sudden invasions, and suppressing domestic insur- 
rections : it ought, therefore, to be properly organized 
and instructed in order to be effectual for those purposes. 
The great difficulty in the way of its becoming properly 
instructed, has thus far been the want of a simple and 
uniform system of instruction — one easily to be com- 
prehended and readily applied. The books published 
for the regular army are too voluminous and diffuse to 
supply this want ; and the various works compiled as a 
substitute, are all more or less objectionable. 

The present volume is intended to remove the diffi- 
culty as far as practicable. It embraces the substance 
of all our systems of tactics, whether for the Infantry 
of the Line, the Light Infantry, the Riflemen, the Artil- 
lery, or the Cavalry, together with such partsk of the 
regulations relative to camp and garrison duties, parades, 
reviews, and inspections, as may be necessary to the 
Militia. 

As the same general principles regulate the tactics 
applicable to the different arms of service, those for 
the Infantry which constitute the main body of an army, 
are alone laid dow r n at large. 

Artillery and Cavalry should be instructed as Infan- 



IV PREFACE. 

try, in order to act, when separated from their guns 
and horses. 

The Artillery instruction in this work, embraces the 
service of the piece, and the manoeuvres in the field 
and in the batteries ; that for the Cavalry, from " the 
mounting horse" to the manoeuvres in squadron. 

The words of command given by the instructor who 
represents the commanding officer, are printed in capi 
tals ; those of the subordinate officers in italics. 



ERRATA.— Part I. 

Page 15 — line 29 from the top — for head, read hand. 

Page 17 — top line — for 3d mo., read 4th mo. 

Page 18 — line 10 from the top — after the word thigh, insert the fol- 
lowing — seize it with the left hand above the right. 

Page 18 — line 30 from the top — after the word out, insert the follow- 
ing — the little Jinger resting against the thigh. 

Page 22 — line 3 from the top — insert the word left immediately be- 
fore the word knee. 

Page 24 — line 16 from the top— for twenty, read ten. 

Page 45 — line 28 from the top — and page 46 — line 4 from the top — 
for as a caution, read on a caution. 

Page 50 — line 32 from the top — for left shoulder, read right shoulder. 

Page 65 — line 17 from the top — after the words directing one, insert 
the following — conducts his subdivision till it halts ; 
and each chief whose subdivision takes post in rear of 
the directing one. 

Page 93— line 5 from the bottom— for No. 5, read No. 6. 

Page 110 — line 25 from the top — for centre-rank, read rear -rank. 

Page 110 — line 30 from the top— after the word themselves, insert 
ten paces, and for files at the right, read files of the 
right. 



ERRATA.— Part II. 

Page 7 — under definition Front, for distance, read direction. 

Page 8 — line 3 from the top — for each, read such. 

Page 22 — in lieu of lines 21, 22, and 23, read as follows — The lieu- 
tenant-colonel in front of the centre of the first, and the 
major in front of the centre of the third squadron; both 
on a line with the colonel. 

Page 23 — lines 24 and 25 — strike out the word two ; and for squa- 
drons, read squadron. 

Page 41 — last line of movement No. 7 — for No. 2, read No. 3. 



ERRATUM.— Part III. 

Page 9 — bottom line — for in halting, read in battery. 



PART I. 



INFANTRY TACTICS. 



A2 



The words of command given by the Instruc- 
tor ■, (who represents the commander,) are printed 
in Capital letters. 



CONTENTS OF PART FIRST. 



OF THE SaUAD. P^ e 

9 

Position of the soldier "'"!!.!!!!..!!!..•• 9 

Facings • '.'.','.'., *? 

rhe direct step 10 

The oblique step t , 10 

Manual of arms '.".'.'..... 21 

Firings "' 21 

The direct tire 21 

The oblique fire 22 

The fire by file ■ ['.'.'... ^ 

Alignments ' 23 

To inarch to the front 24 

The quick step 24 

To march the back step 24 

To march by the flank ' 25 

To halt and. face to the front •••••*••*" 25 

Marching by a flank, to change direction .. • 25 

Marching by the front, to march by a flank ••■• 25 

Wheeli n gs '.'.'. V. '.'.'.'. '. £Z 

Turning " 27 

To stack arms ' * ' * ( 28 

To resume arms 

OF THE COMPANY. 33 

Formation of the company. . . ••■;;••• V.V.'.". ■".'.'.'.'.'.'.''.''.•'••• •• £4 

To pass from two ranks into one rank . 35 

Posts of officers and others in column ■••• 36 

To open ranks • ' * * * 36 

Alignments in open ranks 37 

To close ranks ' & 

To fire by company ' 37 

To fire by file ; " 3° 

To fire by the rear-rank 3& 

To advance in line .39 

To halt and align the company 39 

The oblique inarch in line • • • • ' 39 

To retire in line ••••••;•■; 12 

To halt and face to the front 40 

To march by the flank... ~y 40 

To change direction bynle 40 

To halt and face to the front . . • ; 41 

To break from line into column by platoon i;;"""";.. 43 

To march in column ( 43 

?5 diminlh and increase front of column in marchmg ; | .' .* " .45 

To diminish and increase front of column by files //.V;//// 40 

To march in column of route 47 

KKin^^ 

Manual of arms for sergeants and corporals • • 52 

Manual of the sword for officers \ ".'..'. '.'.'. 53 

Colour-salute • .• • • ' * ' ' 53 

Instructions for the drum-major 

OF THE BATTALION. gg 

Formation of a regimentor battalion in order ^^/r'//.'/. \\\\ Y^"^ 60 

To open ranks t 61 

To close ranks 7 



Vlll CONTENTS OP PART FIRST. 

Bgi 

Manual of arms 61 

Loadings and firings 61 

To stack and resume arms 63 

Manner of determining a line 63 

Movements 64 

Movements from line ■ 65 

No. 1. To break to the right into column 65 

2. To break to the right to march to the left * 66 

3. To break to the rear into column 66 

4. To ploy into close column or mass 67 

5. To ploy into column doubled on the centre 68 

6. Changes of front 69 

7. To march by a flank 70 

8. To advance in line 72 

9. To halt the battalion and to align it 73 

10. To retire in line 73 

11. To halt the battalion and face it to the front 74 

12. Passage of obstacles 74 

13. To pass a defile in retreat 76 

Movements from open column 78 

No. 1. To march in column 78 

2. To change direction in marching 78 

3. To halt the column 78 

4. To form to the left into line 79 

5. To form line to the right, by inversion 79 

6. To form on right into line 80 

7. To form to the front into line 80 

8. To form line faced to the rear 81 

9. 10. To form line by two movements 82 

1 1, 12. To form close column 83 

13. Countermarch 84 

Column in route 84 

Movements from close column 85 

No. 1. To form open column by the head 85 

2. To form open column on the rear 86 

3. To form open column on the head 86 

4. To change direction in marching 87 

5. To change direction from a halt 88 

6. Countermarch 89 

7. To form division from company 89 

8. To deploy on first division 90 

9. To deploy on fourth division 91 

10. To deploy on an intermediate division 92 

Movements from column doubled on centre 93 

No. 1. To form line to the front 93 

2. To form line tojhe right 93 

Dispositions against ca'valry 93 

Rules for manoeuvring by the rear-rank 97- 

LIGHT INFANTRY AND RIFLE. 

OF THE COMPANY. 

Deployments 109 

1. To deploy forward .. 109 

2. To deploy by the flank Ill 

3. To extend intervals 112 

4. To close intervals 113 

5. To relieve skirmishers 114 

To march in advance 114 

To march in retreat 115 

To march by a flank 115 

The firings 116 

Rallying and assembling 117 

OF THE BATTALION. 

To deploy a battalion as skirmishers 119 

To rallv the battalion deployed as skirmishers 121 

8 



PART I. 



OF THE SQUAD. 



Position of the Soldier, 

Heels on the same line and as close together as the con- 
formation of the man will permit ; toes turned out equally, 
so as to form nearly a right angle ; knees straight but not 
stiff; body inclined a little forward ; shoulders square ; arms 
hanging naturally; elbows near the body; palms of the 
hands turned a little to the front ; the little finger behind the 
seam of the pantaloons ; face direct to the front ; chin a little 
drawn in without constraint ; eyes looking to the front so as 
to meet the ground at a distance of fifteen paces. 

EYES-RIGHT.— At the word right, turn the lead 
gently to the right, so as to bring the corner of the left eye 
nearest the nose, in a line with the junction of the heels, 
the eyes directed in a line with the eyes of the men in the 
same rank. 

FRONT. — Resume the position to the front. 

EYES-LEFT — Will be executed by inverse means. 

REST. — Stand at ease, without moving the left foot from 
its position. 

ATTENTION-SQUAD.— At the word squad, resume 
the prescribed position and steadiness. 

Facings, 

SQUAD, BY THE RIGHT (or LEFT) FLANK. 
RIGHT (or LEFT) FACE.— At the word face, turn on 
the left heel, by raising a little the left toe, at the same time 
bring the right heel to the side of the left, and on the same 
line, so that the line of the heels shall be exactly at right 
angles with the former line. 

SQUAD-ABOUT.— At the word about, turn on the 
left heel, bring the left toe to the front, carry the right foot 
to the rear, the hollow opposite to, and three inches from the 
left heel, the feet square to each other ; seize at the same 
time the inner corner of the cartridge-box with the right hand, 

9 



10 PART I. OP THE SQUAD. 

FACE. — Turn on both heels, by raising the toes a Jittle, 
extend the thighs and face to the rear ; bring the right heel 
by the side of the left, and quit the hold of the cartridge-box. 

If under arms, turn the left hand at the word about, as 
in the first motion of presext— arms, and replace the hand 
and piece at the instant of bringing the right heel to the side 
of the left. 

The Direct Step. 

The direct step, in common time, is twenty-eight inches, 
reckoning from heel to heel, and at the rate of ninety in a 
minute. 

SQUAD-FORWARD.— Throw the weight of the body 
on the right leg, without bending the left knee. 

MARCH. — Step off with the left foot, the knees straight, 
the toes pointed a little downwards and turned slightly out ; 
the body inclined a little forward, and the foot planted flat at 
the prescribed distance ; the right foot next passed to the front 
in the same manner. 

SQUAD-HALT. — At the word halt, stop short on the 
foot advanced, and bring up the other without stamping. 

The Oblique Step. 
Marching in the direct step in common time. 

RIGHT OBLIQUE-MARCH.— At the word march, 
given at the instant the left foot comes to the ground, carry 
the right foot obliquely to the right and front, twenty-six 
inches from the left, and eighteen inches on that side, turn- 
ing the toes a little inward ; next advance the left foot, by 
the shortest line, eighteen inches in front of the right heel : 
continue to march in this way, keeping the head and shoul- 
ders square to the front. 

To resume the Direct March. 

FORWARD -MARCH.— At the word march, given at 
the instant either foot comes to the ground, resume the direct 
march. 

Manual of Arms. 

This is taught to two men, placed at first side by side in 
one rank, elbow to elbow, and next in a single file, that is, 
one behind the other. 

10 



PAKT I. OF THE SQUAD. 11 

Each command is executed in one time (or pause) and is 
divided into motions. 

The celerity of each motion, with the exception of the 
motions relative to the cartridge, "to the rammer, and to the 
fixing and unfixing of the bayonet, is fixed at the ninetieth 
part of a minute. As the motions here excepted cannot be 
executed at the rate prescribed, they are notwithstanding to 
be executed with promptness and regularity. 

The last syllable of the command decides the brisk exe- 
cution of the first motion of each time. The commands two, 
three, and four, decide the brisk execution of the other 
motions. The men are taught to execute the time without 
resting in its different motions, as soon as they comprehend 
the positions of the several motions of a time. 

Before proceeding to the manual of arms, the men, at 
shouldered arms, repeat the movements of eyes-right, 
left, and front, and the facings. 

Position of shoulder-wms. 

(Fig. 1.) The musket in the left hand, the arm very little 
bent, the elbow back, near the body, the palm of the hand 
pressing on the outer flat of the butt, the outer edge of the 
latter on the upper joints of the fingers, the heel of the butt 
between the fore and middle fingers, the thumb on the front 
screw of the butt-plate, the remaining fingers under the butt, 
the butt more or less kept back, according to the conforma- 
tion of the soldier, so that the piece seen from the front may 
appear to be perpendicular, and also that the movement of 
the thigh, in marching, may not raise it, or cause it to waver, 
the stock below the tail-band, resting against the hollow of 
the shoulder, just within the joint, the right arm hanging 
naturallv, as prescribed for the soldier without arms. 

SUPPORT-ARMS.— (Fig. 2.) 1st mo. With the right 
hand seize briskly the handle, or small, of the stock, four 
incites below the lock, raising a little, but not turning the 
piece. 

28 mo. Take the left hand from the butt, extend the left 
fore-arm upwards across the body, under the cock, the hand 
flat on the right breast. 

3d mo. Drop the right arm smartly into its position. 

REST. — Bring up smartly the right hand to the small of 
the stock and stand at ease. 

11 



12 PART I. OF THE SQUAD. 

ATTENTION-SQUAD.— Resume the position of the 
third motion of support-arxs, at the word squad. 

CARRY-ARMS.— 1st mo. Carry quickly the right 
hand to the small. 

2d mo. Place quickly the left hand upon the butt. 

3d mo. Let fall smartly the right hand into its position, 
and drop with the left, at the same time, the piece into the 
position of shoulder-arms. 

ARMS-PORT.— (Fig. 3.) Throw the piece diagonally 
across the body, the lock to the front, seize it smartly at the 
same instant, with both hands, the right at the handle, the 
left at the tail-band, the two thumbs pointing towards the 
muzzle, the barrel sloping upwards and crossing opposite to 
the point of the left shoulder, the butt proportionally lowered. 
The palm of the right hand above, that of the left, under the 
piece, and the nails of both next to the body, to which the 
elbows are closed. 

SHOULDER-ARMS.— 1st mo. Bring the piece smartly 
to the left shoulder, placing the left hand under the butt. 

2d mo. Drop the risrht hand smartly by the side. 

PRESENT-ARMS.— (Fig. 4.) 1st mo. Turn the piece 
with the left hand, the lock out, and seize the small at the 
same time with the right hand, the piece perpendicular, and 
detached from the shoulder, the left hand remaining under 
the butt. 

2d mo. Complete the turning inward of the piece, so as 
to bring it erect before the centre of the body, the rammer 
to the front, the right hand under and against the guard ; 
seize it smartly at the same time with the left hand above 
the lock, the little finger against the feather-spring, the 
thumb extended along the barrel and on the stock, the fore- 
arm resting on the body without constraint, and the hand at 
the height of the elbow. 

SHOULDER-ARMS.— 1st mo. Turn the piece with 
the right hand, the barrel out ; raise and support it against 
the left shoulder with the right hand, drop the left under the 
butt, the right hand resting on, without grasping, the handle. 

2d mo. Drop quickly the right hand into its position. 

ORDER-ARMS.— 1st mo. Drop the piece smartly, by 
extending the left arm ; seize it at the same time with the 
right hand above and near the tail-band: quit the hold of the 
left hand, and carry the piece opposite the right shoulder, . 

12 



TART I. OF THE SQUAD. 13 

the rammer in front, the little finger behind the barrel, the 
right hand supported against the hip, the butt three inches 
from the ground, the piece erect, the left hand hanging by 
the side. 

2d mo. Let the piece slip through the right hand to the 
ground without shock, and take the position about to be de- 
scribed. 

Position of order-arms. 

(Fig. 5.) The hand low, the barrel between the thumb 
and fore-finger extended along the stock ; the other fingers 
extended and joined ; the muzzle about two inches from the 
right shoulder; the rammer in front; the toe, or beak, of the 
butt, against, and in a line with the toe of the right foot, the 
barrel perpendicular. 

REST.— Stand at ease. 

ATTENTION-SQUAD.— At the word squad, resume 
the position of order-arms. 

SHOULDER-ARMS.— 1st mo. Raise smartly the piece 
with the right hand, carry it against the left shoulder, turn- 
ing it, so as to bring the barrel to the front ; place at the same 
time the left hand under the butt, and slip the right hand 
down to the lock. 

2d mo. Let fall smartly the right hand into its posi- 
tion. 

CHARGE-BAYONET. — (Fig. 6.) 1st mo. Make a 
half face to the right on the left heel, place at the same 
time the right foot behind, and at right angles with the left, 
the hollow of the, right foot opposite to, and about three 
inches from the left heel : turn the piece with the left hand, 
the lock outwards, and seize the handle at the same time 
with the right hand, the musket perpendicular and detached 
from the shoulder ; leave the left hand under the butt. 

2d mo. Bring down the piece with the right hand into 
the left, the latter seizing it a little in advance of the tail- 
band, the barrel up, the left elbow near the body, the right 
hand supported against the hip, the point of the bayonet at 
the height of the eye. 

SHOULDER-ARMS.— 1st mo. Face to the front by 
turning on the left heel, bring up the right by the side of the 
left heel ; at the same time, spring up the piece with the right 

B 13 



14 PART I. OF THE SQUAD. 

hand to the left shoulder, and place the left hand under the 
butt. 

2d mo. Let fall smartly the right hand into its position. 

LOAD IN TWELVE TIMES.— LOAD.— (Fig. 7.) 1st 
mo. As the first motion of charge-bayonet, except that 
the hollow of the right loot is brought up against the left heel. 

2d mo. Biing down the piece with the right hand into 
the left, which, at the instant, seizes it at the tail-band, the 
thumb extended on the stock, the butt under the right fore- 
arm, the handle against the body and about two inches under 
the right breast, the muzzle at the height of the eye, the 
guard turned a little out, the left elbow supported against the 
side. At the instant the piece falls into the left hand, the 
right thumb is placed on the steel above the flint, the fore- 
fingers closed, the right fore-arm along the butt. 

2. OPEN-PAN. — Open the pan, by pushing forward the 
steel with the right thumb, the left hand resisting and hold- 
ing the piece firm ; draw back immediately the right elbow, 
carry the hand to the cartridge-box, passing it between the 
butt and the body, and open the box. 

3. HANDLE-CARTRIDGE.— Seize a cartridge with a 
thumb and the two next fingers, and place it between the 
teeth, the right hand passing between the butt and the 
body. 

4. TEAR-CARTRIDGE.— Tear the paper down to the 
powder, holding the cartridge upright between the thumb 
and next two fingers ; in this position place it against the 
pan, the palm of the right hand turned towards the body, the 
right elbow supported on the butt. 

5. PRIME. — Drop the head a little, fix the eves on the 
pan, fill it with powder, press together the top of the car- 
tridge with the thumb and fore-finger, raise the head, and 
place the two last fingers of the right hand firmly behind 
and against the steel. 

6. SHUT-PAN. — Resisting the motion with the left 
hand, shut the pan smartly with the fingers behind the steel, 
holding carefully the cartridge with the two next fingers and 
the thumb; seize immediately the handle with the two 
remaining fingers and the palm of the right hand, the right 
wrist touching the body, the elbow back, and a little detached 
from the bod v. 

T. CAST-ABOUT.— (Fig. 8.) 1st mo. Pass the piece 



PART I. OP THE SQUAD. 15 

along the left thigh, after bringing it upright near the body ; 
to effect this, press the butt strongly, extending smartly the 
right arm, without lowering the shoulder ; turn at the same 
time the rammer towards the body, open the left hand to let 
the piece slide through it towards and near the middle band, 
the elbow remaining near the body, the cock bearing on the 
right thumb ; at the same time face to the front, turning on 
the left heel, and carry the right foot forward, the heel 
against the hollow of the left foot. 

2d mo. Quit the hold of the right hand ; through the 
left, let the piece descend to the ground, without shock, 
along and near the body ; raise at the same time the right 
hand to the height of, and near the muzzle, holding the top 
of the cartridge up, the left hand against the body, the piece 
touching the left thigh, the muzzle opposite to the centre of 
the body. 

8. CHARGE-CARTRIDGE.— (Fig. 8.) Fix the eye 
on the muzzle, turn quickly the back of the right hand 
towards the body, in order to discharge the powder into the 
barrel ; raise the elbow to the height of the wrist, shake the 
cartridge, force it into the muzzle, and leave the hand 
reversed, the fingers closed but not clenched. 

9. DRAW-RAMMER.— 1st mo. Drop smartly.the right 
elbow and seize the rammer between the thumb and fore- 
finger bent, the other fingers shut ; draw it smartly extend- 
ing the arm ; seize the rammer again at the middle, between 
the thumb and fore-finger, the hand reversed, the palm to 
the front, the nails up, the eyes following the movement of 
the head ; clear the rammer from the pipes by again extend- 
ing the arm. 

2d mo. Turn rapidly the rammer between the bayonet 
and the face, closing the fingers, the rammer of the rear- 
rank man grazing the right shoulder of the man in front, 
the rammer parallel to the bayonet, the arm ''extended, the 
butt of the rammer opposite to the muzzle, but not yet in- 
serted, the eyes fixed on the muzzle. 

3d mo. Insert the butt of the rammer and force it down 
as low as the hand. 

10. RAM-CARTRIDGE— (Fig. 9.) Extend the arm 
to its full length to seize the rammer between the right 
thumb extended and the fore-finger bent, the other fingers 
closed ; with force ram down twice, seize the rammer at the 

15 



18 PART I. OF THE SQUAD. 

little end, between the thumb and fore-finger bent, the other 
fingers closed, the right elbow touching the body. 

11. RETURN-RAMMER.— 1st mo. Draw briskly the 
rammer, seize it at the middle between the thumb and fore- 
finger, the hand reversed, the palm to the front, the nails up, 
the eyes following the movement of the hand ; clear the 
rammer from the barrel by extending the arm. 

2d mo. Turn rapidly the rammer between the bayonet 
and the face, closing the fingers, the rammer of the rear- 
rank man grazing the right shoulder of the man in front, 
the rammer parallel to the bayonet, the arm extended, the 
little end of the rammer opposite the first pipe, but not yet 
inserted ; the eyes fixed on that pipe. 

3d mo. Insert the little end, and with the thumb force it 
as low as the middle band ; raise quickly the hand a little 
bent, place the little finger on the butt of the rammer, and 
force it down ; lower the left hand on the barrel to the extent 
of the arm, without depressing the shoulder. 

12. SHOULDER-ARMS.— 1st mo. Raise the piece 
with the left hand along the left side, the hand at the height 
of the chin, the fore-arm touching the piece, the barrel to 
the front ; drop at the same time, the right hand to seize the 
piece a little above the handle, the fore-fingers touching the 
cock, and the thumb on the counter-plate. 

2d mo. Raise the piece with the right hand, drop the left, 
and place it under the butt, bring back the right heel to the 
side of the left, and on the same line ; support the piece with 
the right hand against the shoulder, in the position prescribed 
for shoulder-arms, the right hand resting on without grasp- 
ing the piece. 

3d mo. Let fall smartly the right hand into its position, 
by the side of the thigh. 

READY.— (Fig. 10.) 1st mo. As the first motion of the 
first time of load. 

2d mo. Bring the piece with the right hand to the middle 
of the body, place the left hand, the little finger touching 
the feather-spring, the thumb extended on the stock at the 
height of the chin, the counter-plate almost turned towards 
the body, the rammer obliquely to the left and front. 

3d mo. Place the thumb on the head of the cock, the 
fore-finger under and on the guard, the other three fingers 
joined to the first, the elbow at the height of the hand. 

16 



PART I. OF THE SQUAD. 17 

3d mo. Close the right elbow smartly to the body in 
cocking ; seize the piece at the handle, let it descend along 
the body in the left hand to the tail-band, which remains at 
the height of the shoulder. 

AIM. — (Fig. 11, 12.) Drop smartly the muzzle, the left 
hand remaining at the tail -band ; support the butt against 
the right shoulder, the left elbow a little down ; shut the 
left eye, direct the right along the barrel, drop the head upon 
the butt to catch the object, and place the fore-finger on the 
trigger. The rear-rank at the same time places the right 
foot about eight inches towards the left heel of the man next 
on the right. 

FIRE. — Apply the fore-finger with force to the trigger, 
without lowering or turning the head, and remain in that 
position. 

LOAD. — 1st mo. Bring back the piece quickly and take 
the position of the second motion of the first time of load, 
except that the right thumb, instead of being placed against 
the steel, seizes the head of the cock, with the fore-finger bent, 
and the other fingers closed. 

2d mo. Half-cock, carry the right hand immediately to 
the cartridge-box, passing it between the butt and the body, 
and open the box. 

If, after firing, it be intended to bring the squad to the 
shoulder, instead of loading, the command is given : 

SHOULDER-ARMS.— At the word shoulder, take the 
position of the second motion of the-first time of load, half- 
cock, shut pan, and seize the handle of the piece. At the 
word arms, come to the shoulder and face to the front. 

The squad being in the position of aim, to habituate the 
men to wait for the word fire, the command is sometimes 
given : 

RECOVER-ARMS.— Withdraw the finger from the trig- 
ger, throw up smartly the muzzle, and retake the position 
of the fourth motion of ready. 

If from this position the squad is to be brought to a shoul- 
der, the command is given : 

SHOULDER-ARMS — At the word shoulder, face to 
the front, bring the piece to the middle of the body, the 
left thumb at the height of the chin, the little finger touching 
the feather-spring ; next place the right thumb on the head 
of the cock, support the fore-finger on the trigger, sustain at 
B2 17 



18 PART I. OF THE SQUAD. 

the same time the cock in its descent till the flint nearly 
touches the steel, raise the cock to the half-cock notch, and 
seize the handle of the piece with the right hand. At the 
word arms, carry the piece smartly to the shoulder, and 
take the position of shoulder-arms. 

UNFIX-BAYONET.— 1st mo. Drop the piece by a 
smart extension of the left arm, seize it with the right hand 
above, and near the tail-band. 

2d mo. Drop the piece with the right hand along the 
left thigh, lengthen out the left arm, rest the butt on the 
ground, without shock, and carry, at the same time, the right 
hand to the bayonet, seize it at the socket and shank, so that 
the lower end of the socket may be about an inch below the 
heel of the palm, and that in wresting off the bayonet, the 
thumb may be extended on the blade. 

3d mo. Wrest off the bayonet, return it to the scabbard, 
place immediately the right little finger on the butt of the 
rammer, lower the left hand along the barrel, in extending 
the arm, without depressing the shoulder. 

SHOULDER-ARMS.— As the twelfth time of load. 

SECURE-ARMS.— (Fig. 13.) 1st mo. Seize quickly 
the piece with the right hand, the thumb on the counter- 
plate, and the fore-finger against the cock ; detach the piece 
from the shoulder at the same time, the barrel to the front, 
seize it at the tail-band with the left hand, the thumb extend- 
ed on the rammer, the piece erect, opposite to the shoulder, 
the left elbow on the piece. 

2d mo. Reverse the piece, pass it under the left arm, the 
left hand remaining at the tail-band, the thumb on the ram- 
mer, to prevent it from sliding out, the point of the bayonet 
six or eight inches from the ground, the right hand falling at 
the same time into its position. 

SHOULDER-ARMS.— 1st mo. Raise the piece with 
the left hand, but not too suddenly ; seize the handle with the 
right hand to support it against the shoulder ; quit the hold 
of the left hand, and place it quickly under the butt. 

2d mo. Let fall smartly the right hand to its position ; 
drop at the same time the piece into the position of shoul- 
der-arms. 

FIX-BAYONET.— 1st and 2d mos. As the first and 
second motions of uxfix-bayoxet, except at the end of the 
second motion, the right hand goes to seize the bayonet by • 

' IS 



TART I. OP THE SQUAD. 19 

the socket and shank, so that the lower (now upper) end of the 
socket shall extend about an inch above the heel of the palm. 

3d mo. Draw the bayonet from the scabbard, carry and 
fix it on the muzzle ; place the right little finger on the butt 
of the rammer. 

SHOULDER-ARMS.— As the twelfth time of load. 

TRAIL-ARMS.— (Fig. 14.) 1st mo. As the first motion 

of ORDER-ARMS. 

2d mo. Incline a little the muzzle to the front, the butt 
to the rear, and about three inches from the ground ; the 
right hand supported at the hip, sustains the piece so that the 
man in the rear-rank may not touch with the bayonet, the 
man in his front. 

SHOULDER-ARMS. — At the word shoulder, raise the 
piece perpendicularly in the right hand: at the word arms, 
execute what is prescribed for the shoulder, from order-arms. 

TO RIGHT SHOULDER, SHIFT-ARMS.— (Fig. 15.) 
Turn the piece with the left hand, lock to the front, seize it 
at the same time at the handle with the right hand, place it 
on the right shoulder, the left hand not quitting the butt, the 
cock above and resting on the shoulder, the muzzle up ; sus- 
tain the piece in this position by placing the right hand on 
the flat of the butt, so that the toe of the butt may be between 
the first two fingers, the other two on the butt-plate ; let fall 
the left hand by the side. 

SHOULDER-ARMS.— Raise the piece by extending the 
right arm, seize it with the left hand above the lock, carry 
it against the left shoulder, turning the barrel to the front, 
the right hand being at the handle ; place the left hand under 
the butt, and let the right fall into its position. 

ARMS-AT WILL. — Carry the piece at pleasure on 
either shoulder with one or both hands, the muzzle always up. 

SHOULDER-ARMS.— Retake smartly the position of 

SHOULDER-ARMS. 

The squad being at order-arms with bayonets in the scab- 
bards, to cause an inspection of arms, the command is given : 

INSPECTION OF-ARMS.— 1st mo. Face to the right 
once and a half on the left heel, carrying the right foot per- 
pendicularly to the rear of the alignment, about six inches 
from and at right angles with the left foot ; seize promptly 
the piece with the left hand a little above the middle band, 
incline the muzzle to the rear without displacing the heel of 

19 



20 PART I. OF THE SQUAD. 

the butt, the rammer turned towards the body ; carry at the 
same time the right hand to the bayonet and seize it as pre- 
scribed in the second motion of fix-bayonet. 

2d mo. Draw the bayonet from the scabbard, carry and 
fix it on the muzzle ; seize next the rammer, draw it as 
explained in loading, in twelve times, and let it glide to the 
bottom of the bore. 

3d mo. Face promptly to the front, seize the piece with 
the right hand, and retake the position of order- arms. 

The inspector inspects, in succession, the piece of each 
man, in passing along the front of the rank. Each, as the 
inspector reaches him, raises smartly his piece with his right 
hand, seizes it with the left between the tail-band, and the 
feather-spring, the lock to the front, the left hand at the 
height of the chin, the piece opposite to the left eye : the 
inspector takes it with the right hand at the handle, and after 
inspecting it, returns it to the man, who receives it back with 
the right hand and replaces it in the position of order-arms. 

When the inspector has passed him, each man retakes the 
position prescribed in the command inspection of arms, 
and returns the rammer; after which he faces to the front. 

If, instead of inspection of arms, bayonets only are to be 
fixed, the command is given: 

FIX-BAYONET.— Take the position prescribed in the 
first motion of inspection of arms ; fix the bayonet and 
face to the front. 

If, after fixing bayonets, rammers are to be sprung, the 
following command is given : 

SPRING-RAMMERS.— Put the rammer in the barrel as 
explained above and face to the front. 

To load in four times. 

The squad beincr at a shoulder. 

LOAD IN FOUR TIMES.— LOAD.— Execute the first 
time of load, open pan, handle cartridge, tear cartridge, and 
prime. 

TWO. — Shut pan, cast about, and charge cartridge. 

THREE. — Draw rammer, and ram cartridge. 

FOUR. — Return rammer, and shoulder arms. 

To load at will. 
LOAD AT WILL-LOAD.— Execute the loading as in 
four times, but without resting on the times. 

20 



PART I. OP THE SQUAD. 21 

FIRINGS. 

The firings are direct or oblique. 

The Direct Fire. 

This is executed as prescribed in the manual of arms, and 
by the following commands. Fire by squad — Squad— < 
Ready — Aim — Fire — Load. 

The Oblique Fire. 

This is executed to the right and left, by the same com. 
mand as the fire direct, the command aim, being always pre- 
ceded by the caution right (or left) oblique, after the 
word READY. 

Position of the ranks in the oblique fire to the right. 

At the word ready, both ranks execute what is prescribed 
for the fire direct. 

At the words right-oblique, both ranks throw back the 
right shoulder and look at the object at whiclg|hey are to fire, 
the rear-rank holding itself ready to take aim through the 
same interval as in the fire direct, though in an oblique 
direction. 

At the word aim, the front-rank takes aim to the right with- 
out stirring the feet. The rear-rank advances the left foot 
about six inches towards the right toe of the man of the front- 
rank in the same file, incline the upper part of the body for- 
ward, in bending a little the knee, and takes aim to the right. 

At the word load, both ranks resume the position pre- 
scribed for the fire direct ; the rear— rank brings back the Jeft 
heel against the hollow of the right foot, at the instant the 
piece is brought to the priming position. 

Position of the ranJcs in the oblique fire to the left. 

At the word ready, both ranks execute what is prescribed 
for the fire direct. 

At the words left oblique, both ranks throw back the 
left shoulder, and look at the object at which they are to fire, 
the rear-rank holding itself ready to take aim to the left of 
the men of the same file in front, and in an oblique direction. 

At the word aim, the front-rank takes aim to the left with- 
out moving the feet. The rear-rank men advance the left 

21 



32 PART I. OF THE SQUAD. 

foot six inches towards the right heel of the front-rank men 
of their files ; they also advance the upper part of the body, 
in bending a little the knee, and take aim through the inter- 
vals to the left of their file-leaders. 

At the word load, both ranks come to the priming po- 
sition, the pieces still obliqued to the left, and prime ; the 
rear-rank brings back the left heel to the hollow of the right 
foot. In casting about both ranks take the same position as 
in the fire direct. 

The fire by file % 
FIRE BY FILE.— SQUAD-READY— COMMENCE 
FIRING. — At the word ready, both ranks take the position 
prescribed for the direct fire. At the words commence fir- 
ing, the right file aims and fires, the two men together ; the 
next file aims at the instant the first has fired, and so on suc- 
cessively to the left : after the first fire every man loads and 
fires without waiting for the others. Each man faces to the 
front in casting about, and after returning rammer, springs 
tip his piece with the left hand which places itself on the 
feather-spring, and at the height of the chin ; at the same 
time he makes a half face to the right, taking the position 
of ready. 

To arrest the fire* 

ROLL. — At this word, the firing ceases ; each man half 
cocks, if his piece be cocked ; loads or finishes loading, if 
not already loaded ; and shoulders arms. 

To Mark Time. 

Marching in the direct step in common time. 

MARK TIME-MARCH.— At the word march, given 
the instant either foot is coming to the ground, make a sem- 
blance of marching, by advancing first one foot, and then the 
other, always bringing back the advanced foot, and placing 
its heel by the side of the heel of the other. 

To resume the direct step. 

FORWARD-MARCH.— At the word march, given the 
instant either foot is coming to the ground, resume the direct 
step 

22 



PART I. OF THE SQUAD. 23 

To change step. 

CHANGE STEP-MARCH.— At the word march, given 
the instant either foot is coming to the ground, bring up 
quickly the foot in the rear to the side of that just placed on 
the ground, and step off with the latter. 

Alignments* 

Four or eight men are now united in one rank, elbow to 
elbow, and numbered from right to left. 

The men are first taught to align themselves man by man ; 
to effect which the two on the right are marched two paces 
to the front and aligned, after which the remainder are cau- 
tioned to move up one by one according to their numbers, 
and are aligned successively on the line of the two first. 
Each as designated, turns his head and eyes to the right, 
marches in common time, two paces forward, shortening the 
last, so as to be about six inches behind the new alignment ; 
he then moves up steadily by steps of two or three inches, 
to the side of the man next to him on the alignment, so that 
without deranging the head, the line of the eyes, or that of 
the shoulders, he may find himself in the exact line of his 
right-hand man, whose elbow he touches without opening 
his own. 

Alignments to the left are executed on the same princi- 
ples. 

When the men have learned to align themselves in this 
manner, the whole rank will be aligned at once as follows : 

RIGHT (or LEFT)-DRESS.— At the word dress, the 
rank, except the two men placed as a basis, moves up in 
common time, each man placing himself on the line in the 
manner just prescribed. 

The rank being aligned, the word front is given. 

Alignments to the rear are executed on the same principles, 
the men stepping back a little beyond the line and then dress- 
ing up, by the command right (or left) backward-dress. 

To march to the front. 

A well instructed man is placed on the right or left of the 
squad, according to the side on which the guide is to be. 

SQUAD FORWARD, GUIDE LEFT (or RIGHT)- 
MARCH. — At the word march, the squad steps off with 

23 



24 PART I. OP THE SQUAD. 

the left foot, the guide marching straight to the front and 
keeping his shoulders square with that line. 

The following rules are to be observed : — Touch lightly 
the elbow towards the guide, without opening the left elbow, 
or the right arm ; yield to pressure from the side to the guide, 
and resist that from the opposite side ; avoid lapping elbows, 
and swinging the arms ; keep the head to the front, the eyes 
cast on the ground about fifteen paces in front. 

The squad is next exercised in the oblique march to the 
right, and left, observing always to keep the touch of the 
elbow towards the guide. It is also taught to pass from 
common to quick time, and the reverse ; but the oblique 
march in quick time should not be practised until the squad 
^s well established in the cadence. 

The Quick Step* 

This step is at the rate of one hundred and twenty in a 
minute; its length conforms to the step in common time, 
whether direct or oblique. 

Marching in the direct step in common time* 

QUICK TIME-MARCH.— At the word march, given 
as either foot is coming to the ground, the squad steps off in 
quick time. 

To resume the direct step in common time. 

COMMON TIME-MARCH.— At the word march, given 
on either foot as above, the squad retakes the step in common 
time. 

To march the bach step. 

SQUAD BACKWARD, GUIDE LEFT (or RIGHT)- 
MARCH. — At the word march, the squad steps off smartly 
with the left foot to the rear, carrying it about fourteen inches, 
or half the common step, and so on with the feet in succes- 
sion, until the word squad, halt, when the foot in front is 
brought back to the side of the other. 

To march by the flank. 

Being at a halt and aligned. 

SQUAD, BY RIGHT (or LEFT) FLANK, RIGHT (or 
LEFT) FACE. — At the word face, the squad faces to the 
right (or left). 

24 



PART I. OF THE SQUAD. 25 

SQUAD, FORWARD-MARCH.— At the word march, 
the squad steps off with the left foot in common time. A 
well instructed soldier is placed by the side of the leading 
man to conduct him and regulate the step ; this man marches 
elbow to elbow with the soldier. The men cover each other 
accurately. At each step, the advancing heel of every following 
man is planted about six inches in advance of the opposite 
heel (yet on the ground) of the man immediately preceding. 
The knees should not be bent, in order to avoid treading on 
the heels of the men preceding. 

To halt the squad and face it to the front. 

SQUAD-HALT. — At the word halt, the squad halts, 
each man standing fast, though he may have lost distance. 

FRONT-FACE. — At the word face, each man faces to 
the left, if marching by the right flank, and to the right, if 
marching by the left flank. 

To change direction while marching by a flank. 

BY FILE, LEFT (or RIGHT) MARCH.— At the word 
march, the leading man changes direction to the left (or 
right), and then marches straight forward ; the others change 
direction as they successively arrive on the ground where 
the first changed. 

Marching by the front, to march by a flank. 

SQUAD BY LEFT (or RIGHT) FLANK-MARCH.— 
At the word march, given a little before either foot comes 
to the ground, each man turns his body, plants the foot that 
is raised in the new direction, and steps off with the other 
foot, without altering the cadence of the step. 

Flank marching will be executed first in common time, 
afterwards in quick time. 

Wheelings. 

Wheelings are of two kinds ; from a halt or on fixed pivots, 
and in marching, or on moveable pivots. In the latter case 
the wheel will be made to the side opposite the guide, or 
reverse flank. 

To wheel from a halt, or on a fixed pivot. 

A well instructed man is placed on the wheeling flank. 
C 25 



26 PART I. OP THE SQUAD. 

BY SQUAD, RIGHT WHEEL-MARCH— At the word 
march, the squad steps off with the left foot, turning at the 
same time, the head a little to the left, the eyes fixed on the 
line of the eyes of the men to the left, the pivot man marks 
time in turning, in order to conform to the movement of the 
marching flank ; the man who conducts this flank, takes 
steps of twenty -eight inches, and from the first step, advances 
a little the left shoulder, casts his eyes, from time to time, 
along the rank, and feels constantly the elbow of the next 
man lightly, without pushing. The other men, each feels 
lightly the elbow of the aext man towards the pivot, re- 
sists pressure from the opposite side, and conforms to the 
marching flank, lengthening or shortening the step accord- 
ing to his greater or less distance from the pivot. 

The squad wheels round the circle, once or twice before 
halting. 

The wheel to the left is executed according to the same 
principles. 

To halt the wheel. 

SQUAD-HALT. — At the word halt, each man stands 
fast. The two outer men opposite to the pivot flank are 
then placed in the direction to be given to the squad, leaving 
between them and the pivot only space necessary to contain 
the other men. 

LEFT-DRESS. — At the word dress, the squad places 
itself on the alignment of the two men established as a basis 
in the manner already prescribed. 

The squad being aligned, the word front is given. 

Wheeling to the left is executed on the same principles. 

To wheel in marching, or on a moveable pivot. 

RIGHT (or LEFT) WHEEL— MARCH. At the word 
march, given the instant the squad arrives at the wheeling 
point, the wheel is executed in the same manner as from a 
halt, except that the touch of the elbow remains toward the 
marching flank, or side of the guide, instead of the side of 
the pivot; the pivot man, instead of turning in his place, 
conforms to the movement of the marching flank, feels 
lightly the elbow of the next man, takes steps of nine inches, 
and gains ground forward, in describing the arc of a small 
circle to clear the point of the wheel. The middle of the 

26 



PART I. OF THE SQUAD. 27 

rank bends slightly to the rear. As soon as the movement 
commences, the man who conducts the marching flank casts 
his eyes on the ground over which he will have to pass. 

FORWARD-MARCH,— At the word march, given at 
the instant of completing the wheel, the squad moves for- 
ward, taking the step of twenty-eight inches — head direct to 
the front. 

Turning or change of direction to the side of the guide. 

This takes place only when the change of direction is to 
be made to the side of the guide. 

LEFT (or RIGHT) TURN— MARCH.— At the word 
march, given the instant the turn is to be made, the guide 
faces to the left (or right) in marching, and moves forward 
in the new direction, without altering the step or pace. The 
whole squad promptly conforms itself, without running, to 
the new direction ; each man advances the shoulder opposite 
to the guide, takes the quick step to carry himself in the 
new direction, turn his head and eyes to the side of the guide, 
and retakes the touch of the elbow on that side, in placing 
himself on the alignment of the guide, from whom he takes 
the step, and then turns his head to the front. Each man 
thus arrives successively on the alignment of the guide. 

To stack Arms* 

The squad being in two ranks at order-arms. 

STACK-ARMS.— At this command the front-rank man 
of every even numbered file passes his piece before him, 
seizing it with the left hand above the middle band, and 
places the butt behind and near the right foot of the man 
next on the left, the barrel turned to the front. At the same 
time the front-rank man of every odd numbered file passes 
his piece before him, seizing it with the left hand below the 
middle band, and hands it to the man next on the left ; the 
latter receives it with the right hand two inches above the 
middle band, throws the butt about thirty-two inches to the 
front, opposite to his right shoulder, inclining the muzzle 
towards him, and locks the shanks of the two bayonets: the 
lock of this second piece towards the right, and its shank 
above that of the first piece. The rear-rank man of every 
even file projects his bayonet forward, and introduces it 
(using both hands) between and under the shanks of the two 

27 



28 PART I. OF THE SQUAD. 

other bayonets. He then abandons the piece to his file leader, 
who receives it with the right hand under the middle band, 
brings the butt to the front, holding up his own piece and the 
stack with the left hand, and places the butt of this third 
piece between the feet of the man next on the right, the S 
plate to the rear. The stack thus formed, the rear-rank 
man of every odd file passes his piece into his left hand, the 
barrel turned to the front, and, sloping the bayonet forward, 
rests it on the stack. 

To disperse, the command is given : BREAK RANKS — 
MARCH. 

To resume Arms, 

The squad, on a signal, or order to fall in, re-forms in two 
ranks. 

TAKE-ARMS. — At this command the rear-ra»k man 
of every odd file withdraws his piece from the stack ; the 
front rank man of every even file seizes his own piece with 
the left hand, and that of the man on his right with the right 
hand ; the rear-rank man of every even file seizes his piece 
with the right hand at the middle band, advancing for the 
purpose, the hollow of his right foot as far as the right heel 
of his file leader ; these two men raise up the stack to loosen 
the shanks ; the front-rank man of every odd file receives 
his piece from the hand of the man next on the left, and the 
four men retake the position of order-arms. 

When companies stack arms, the sergeants, and also cor- 
porals, if in the rank of file closers, rest their pieces against 
the stacks nearest to them respectively, after ranks are bro 
ken, and resume their pieces on the signal to re-form ranks 

The colour-guard forms a separate stack. 



2< 



Fro. 1. 



PART I. OF THE SQUAD. 
Fio. 3. 



Fig, 3. 




Fig. 7. 



PART I. OF THE SQUAD. 

Fig. 8. Fra. & 






Fk* 10. 




Fig. 11. 




Fig. 12. 




PART I. OP THE SQUAD. 
Fig. 13. Fig. 14. 





Fig. 15. 




31 



PART I. 



OF THE COMPANY. 



Formation of the Company. (Fig. 1.) 

The company being assembled on its ground, the ser- 
geants, by the command fall in, cause the rank and file 
(corporals and privates) to form in one rank, faced to the 
right, and in the order of height from right to left, the tallest 
man on the right, (now head of the rank), the next tallest 
immediately covering the first, and so on to the left, or rear 
of the rank. 

The first sergeant then gives the words : 

FRONT-FACE. — At the word face., the company faces 
to the front, and the second sergeant places himself on the 
left of the rank. 

IN TWO RANKS, FORM COMPANY. > At the 

BY THE LEFT FLANK. LEFT-FACE. \ word face, 
the company faces to the left, except the sergeant and man 
on the left, who stand fast. 

MARCH. — At the word march, the men who have faced 
to the left, step off together; the second man, counting from 
the left, places himself behind the man next to the sergeant, 
and faces to the front ; the two following men, in like man- 
ner, on closing up, form the next file, and all the other men 
come successively to form files two deep, to the right of those 
already formed. The distance between the ranks is thirteen 
inches, measured from the breasts of the rear-rank men to 
the backs, or knapsacks, (if they be on), of the front-rank 
men. 

The captain now divides the company into two equal pla- 
toons, and each platoon into two equal sections. The pla- 
toon on the right is called the first platoon, and that on the 
left the second platoon. The sections are numbered from 
right to left, first, second, third, fourth. The corporals 
(four in number) are then placed on the right and left of each 
platoon, in the front rank according to height, and the files 
are numbered from right to left. 

The officers and sergeants now take their posts as follows ; 

The captain, in the front rank on the right of the company. 

The first lieutenant, two paces in rear of the rear-rank, 
and equidistant between the centre of the second platoon and 
the second file from the left of the company. 

33 



34 PART I. OF THE COMPANY. 

The second lieutenant, opposite the centre of the first pla- 
toon, and two paces in rear of the rear-rank. 

The third lieutenant, opposite the centre of the second pla- 
toon, and two paces in rear of the rear-rank. 

The first sergeant, on the right of the rear-rank covering 
the captain : he is denominated covering sergeant, or right 
guide of the company. 

The second sergeant, two paces in rear of the second file 
from the left of the company ; he is denominated the left 
guide of the company. In the left companv of a battalion, 
this sergeant is on the left of the front-rank, and is covered 
by a corporal in the rear-rank ; he is designated as the clo- 
sing sergeant, and the corporal, the covering corporal. 

The third sergeant, two paces in rear of the second file 
from the left of the first platoon. 

The fourth sergeant, two paces in rear of the second file 
from the right of the second platoon. 

The fifth sergeant, two paces in rear of the rear-rank, and 
equidistant between the second lieutenant and the third ser- 
geant. 

The officers and sergeants thus posted in rear of the com- 
pany, constitute the rank of file-closers ; this rank is two 
paces in rear of the rear-rank. 

The pioneer is posted in the line of file-closers on the 
right ; and the music in a line with the front-rank, four paces 
on its right, the drummer on the right of the fifer, or bugler. 

Absent officers and sergeants may be replaced, officers by 
sergeants, and sergeants by corporals, according to rank and 
the necessity of the case. 

To pass from two ranks, into one rank. 

IN ONE RANK FORM COMPANY.— The left guide 
faces to the left. 

MARCH. — The left guide steps off and marches in the pro- 
longation of the front-rank ; the next file steps off at the same 
time with the guide ; the front-rank man turns to the left at 
the first step, follows the guide, and is himself followed by the 
rear-rank man of his file, who turns on the spot where his file 
leader turned. The second file, counting from the left, and 
successively all the other files, march as prescribed for the 
first ; the front-rank man of each, immediately following the 
rear-rank man of the file next on the left. The captain halts 
the company as the last man on the right turns into the rank. 
The file closers extend themselves with the movement. 

34 



PART I. OP THE COMPANY. 35 

Posts of Officers and others in column. 
In column by Division. 

Two companies united, constitute a division, and are com- 
manded by the senior captain of those companies, who places 
himself two paces in front of the centre of the division ; the 
junior captain in the front-rank, on the right of the left com- 
pany of the division, covered by the covering sergeant of that 
company ; the covering sergeant of the right company, is 
the right guide of the division, and is on the right of the front- 
rank ; the left guide of the left company is the left guide of 
the division, and is on the left of the front-rank. 

When the division faces by a flank, the senior captain 
places himself by the side of the leading guide who is in the 
front-rank ; the junior captain by the side of the covering ser- 
geant of the left company, who steps in the front-rank. 
In column by Company. 

The captain is two paces in front of the centre of his com- 
pany ; the first sergeant on the right of the front-rank, and 
is the right guide of the company ; the second sergeant on the 
left of the same rank, and is the left guide of the company. 
In column by Platoon. 

The captain commands the first platoon, the first lieuten- 
ant the second platoon ; each takes post two paces in front 
of the centre of his platoon ; the first sergeant is the guide 
of the first platoon ; the second sergeant is the guide of the 
second platoon ; they are on the left of the front-rank of 
their respective platoons, if the column be right in front, and 
on the right if the left be in front. 

If the column be marching in the route step, the chiefs of 
platoon take the place of the guides on the directing flank, 
and are covered by the latter in the rear-rank. 

In column by Section. 
This column takes place only in column of route, and then 
only when platoons have a front of ten or more files. The cap- 
tain commands the first section ; the first lieutenant the third ; 
the second lieutenant the second ; and the third lieutenant the 
fourth section ; each taking post on the directing flank in the 
front-rank of his section ; the two guides who are thus dis- 
placed, each falls back to the rear-rank of his section and cov- 
ers its chief; the remaining file-closers place themselves in the 
rear-rank of their respective sections, all on the side of direction. 

35 



36 PART I. OF THE COMPANY. 

In column, except in column by sections, the file-closers, 
not otherwise provided for, are in their proper places behind 
the rear-rank of their respective subdivisions. In close 
column or in column at half distance, they close up to within 
one pace of the rear-rank. 

In column right in front, the left flank is the directing 
flank (except under peculiar circumstances or manoeuvres) ; 
the reverse is the case in column left in front. 

In column, each chief of subdivision always briskly repeats 
the commands march, and halt, the instant he hears them 
given. 

To open ranks. 

The company being at shoulder-arms, the left guide is 
placed on the left of the rear-rank. 

TO THE REAR, OPEN ORDER.— The covering ser- 
geant and the left guide, step off to the rear, in the back 
step, four paces, and align themselves parallel to the rear- 

MARCH.— The front rank stands fast; the rear-rank 
steps off in the back step, in common time, without counting 
steps, places itself on the alignment, marked out for it, and 
is aligned by the right on the left guide, by the covering 
sergeant. The file-closers step off at the same time with 
the rear rank, and place themselves two paces in the rear of 
that rank. 

The ranks being aligned the word front, is given. 

Alignments in open ranks. 

The ranks are first aligned man by man, as in the squad 
drill, three men being placed three paces in advance of the 
risht or left of each rank, to serve as a basis, and the words 
given, BY FILE RIGHT (or LEFT)-DRESS.— The men 
of each rank move up successively on the alignment, each 
man being preceded two paces, by his neighbour. 

The ranks are next aligned at once, forward and back- 
ward, in both parallel and oblique directions, by the com- 
mands RIGHT (or LEFT)-DRESS, or RIGHT (or LEFT) 
BACKWARD-DRESS; three men in each case being 
placed as a basis. t . 

Before closing the ranks, the company is exercised in the 
manual of arms and the loadings in twelve times. 

3o 



PART I. OF THE COMPANY. 37 

To close ranks. 

CLOSE ORDER-MARCH.— At the word march, the 
rear-rank closes to the front, each man covering his file- 
leader. 

The company is next instructed in the alignments, and 
the manual of arms in closed ranks, and then proceeds to 
the loadings and firings. 

Loading in four times and at will, are commanded and 
executed as prescribed in the squad drill. The captain and 
covering sergeant make a half-face to the right with the 
men, and face to the front when the man next to them re- 
spectively casts about. 

To fire by company. 

FIRE BY COMPANY.— At this command the captain 
places himself opposite to the centre of his company, four 
paces in rear of the rank of file-closers ; and the covering 
sergeant places himself in that rank opposite to his interval. 
This rule is general for the captain and covering sergeant in 
all the different firings. 

COMMENCE FIRING.— At this command, the captain 
gives the words, company — ready — aitn — -fire — load. At 
the word load, each man brings back his piece, loads and 
comes to the shoulder, when the captain recommences the 
fire by the same commands, and thus continues it till the 
roll of the drum. The captain may sometimes cause aim 
to be taken to the right and left, by giving the words, right 
(or left) oblique, between the words ready and aim. 

To fire by file. 

FIRE BY FILE. COMPANY. READY-COMMENCE 

FIRING. The fire is executed as prescribed in the squad 
drill. 

The firing ceases by a roll of the drum, when each man 
loads and comes to the shoulder. In actual firing, at the 
roll of the drum, the captain and file-closers give the words 
cease firing. The roll is always followed by a tap on the 
drum, when the captain and covering sergeant resume their 
places in line, and rectify, if necessary, the alignment of the 
ranks. 

D 37 



38 PART I. OF THE COMPANY. 

To fire by the rear-rank. 

FACE BY THE REAR-RANK.— At this command, 
the captain steps out and places himself near to, and facing 
the right file of the company ; the covering sergeant and 
file-closers pass quickly through the captain's interval, and 
place themselves, faced to the rear, the covering sergeant a 
pace behind the captain, and the file-closers two paces from 
the front-rank opposite to their places in line. 

COMPANY ABOUT-FACE.— At the word face, given 
the instant the last file-closer has passed through the inter- 
val, the company faces about; the captain places himself in 
his interval in the rear-rank, now front, and the covering 
sergeant covers him in the front-rank, now rear. 

The different firings are now executed in the manner 
already prescribed. The fire by file commences on the left, 
now the right flank. 

To resume the proper front. 

FACE BY THE FRONT RANK.— This is executed 
as prescribed in the command face by the rear-bank. 

COMPANY ABOUT-FACE.— The company having 
faced about, the captain and covering sergeant resume their 
places in line. 

To advance in line. 

COMPANY, FORWARD.— At this command, a ser- 
geant, previously selected, moves six paces in advance of the 
captain, and is correctly aligned on the prolongation of the 
captain and covering sergeant. This advanced sergeant is 
charged with the direction, and will take two points on the 
ground in the direct line to the front. 

MARCH. — The company steps off with life. The direct- 
ing sergeant observes, with the greatest precision, the length 
and cadence of the step, marching on the two points he has 
chosen ; he takes in succession, and a little before arriving 
at the point nearest to him, new points in advance, exactly 
in the same line with the two first, and at a distance of fif- 
teen or twenty paces from each other. The captain marches 
in the trace of the directing sergeant, keeping always six 
paces from him. The men march with the head and shoul 
ders square to the front, touch lightly the elbow towards the 

33 



PART I. OF THE COMPANY. 39 

captain, and resist pressure from the opposite side. The 
file-closers march in their places, two paces behind the rear- 
rank. 

To halt the company advancing in line, and to align it. 

COMPANY-HALT.— The company halts at the word 
halt, the directing sergeant returns to his place as a file- 
closer, and the captain rectifies the alignment. 

Advancing in line, to oblique to the right or left. 

RIGHT (or LEFT) OBLIQUE-MARCH.— The word 
march, is given, and the movement executed as prescribed 
in the squad drill ; the men maintaining the touch of the 
elbow towards the captain, who conforms his march to that 
of the directing sergeant. 

To resume the Direct March. 

FOR WARD-MARCH.— At the word march, the direct 
march is resumed. 

The company is next instructed to mark time by the com- 
mand 3i ark time-march ; to resume the march by the 
command forward-march ; to march in quick time by the 
command quick time-march ; and to resume the common 
time by the command common time-march ; the word 
march, being given as either foot is coming to the ground. 

To retire in line. 

COMPANY, ABOUT-FACE.— At the word face, the 
company faces about. 

COMPANY, FORWARD.— At the word forward, the 
covering sergeant moves up, opposite to his interval, into the 
rank of file-closers, now leading ; the captain replaces the 
covering sergeant in the rear-rank, now front, and the 
directing sergeant places himself in front of the captain, six 
paces in advance of the rank of file-closers, and in the man- 
ner prescribed for the advance in line. 

MARCH. — The company steps off in the manner pre- 
scribed for the advance in line. 

The company retiring in line, executes all that is pre- 
scribed for advancing in line 

39 



40 PART I. OF THE COMPANY. 

To halt the company retiring in line, and to face it to the 
front. 
COMPANY, HALT. ABOUT-FACE.— As soon as the 
company faces about, the captain, the covering sergeant, and 
the directing sergeant, resume their proper places in line. 

To march by the flank. (Fig. 2.) 

COMPANY BY THE RIGHT FLANK, RIGHT-FACE. 
— At the word face, the company faces to the right, and the 
covering sergeant places himself at the head of the front- 
rank, the captain on his left. 

COMPANY FORWARD -MARCH. — At the word 
march, the company steps off in common time, the captain 
and covering sergeant directing their march straight forward ; 
the men of the rear-rank march abreast of their respective 
front-rank men, and the file-closers opposite to their places 
in line. 

The march by the left flank is executed by the same com- 
mands, substituting left for right. As soon as the com- 
pany faces to the left, the left guide places himself at the 
head of the front-rank, the captain on his right. The cover- 
ing sergeant replaces the captain in the front-rank. 

To change direction by file. (Fig. 2.) 
The company being faced to a flank, and either in march or at a halt. 
BY FILE LEFT (or RIGHT) MARCH.— At the word 
march, the first file wheels ; if to the side of the front-rank 
man, this man describes the short arc of a circle, shortening 
a little the first three or four steps, to give the rear-rank man 
time to conform to the movement. If the wheel be to the 
side of the rear-rank man, this man conforms himself to the 
movement of the front-rank man, by describing a short arc 
of a circle. Each file wheels on the same spot where the 
first wheeled. 

To halt the company, marching by a flank, and to face it 
to the front. 

COMPANY, HALT. FRONT-FACE.— At the word 
face, the company faces to the left, if marching by the right 
flank, and to the right if marching by the left flank: and the 
captain, covering sergeant, and the left guide, return to their 
places in line. 

40 



PART I. OF THE COMFANY. 41 

Marching by a flank, to form on right {or left) by fie into 
line. (Fig. 3.) 

The march being supposed to be by the right flank. 

ON RIGHT, BY FILE INTO LINE-MARCH. — At 
the word march, the rear-rank marks time; the captain and 
covering sergeant turn to the right, march six paces forward, 
and halt ; the captain places himself on the line to direct the 
alignment as the men of the front-rank successively arrive 
on it ; the covering sergeant places himself behind the cap- 
tain, at the distance of the rear-rank ; the first man of the 
front-rank continues to march, passes behind the covering 
sergeant, turns to the right, and places himself by the left 
side of the captain ; the second man of the same rank passes 
behind the first, turns to the right, and places himself on the 
left of the first, and thus in succession to the last man of this 
rank : the rear-rank marks time until two men of the front- 
rank are formed, when it executes the movement in like 
manner, each man covering his file-leader. 

In marching by the left flank, the movement is executed 
by inverse means, substituting in the command the word 
left, for right. The captain and the left guide return to 
their places in line as soon as the company is formed and 
aligned. 

Marching by the flank to form by company or by platoon 

into line. (Fig. 4.) 

The march being supposed by the right flank. 

BY COMPANY INTO LINE-MARCH.— At the word 
march, the covering sergeant continues to march straight 
forward ; the men advance the right shoulder and march in 
quick time, diagonally, into line with the covering sergeant, 
taking the step from him as they successively arrive in line, 
one after the other. The rear-rank men conform to the move- 
ment of their file-leaders. The captain superintends the 
execution of the movement, and, when the company is form- 
ed, gives the words guide left, and places himself two 
paces in front of the centre, taking the step of the company. 

Marching by the flank to form platoon. 
BY PLATOON INTO LINE-MARCH.— The movement 
is executed by each platoon according to the above principles ; 
D2 41 



42 PART 1. OP THE COMPANY. 

the captain and first lieutenant, as their respective platoons 
are formed, giving the words guide left. 

In marching by the left flank, these movements are exe- 
cuted by the same commands and according to the same 
principles, the words guide right being substituted for guide 
left, the moment the formation is ended. 

Marching by the front, to march by a flank. 

COMPANY, BY RIGHT (or LEFT) FLANK-MARCH. 

— The movement is executed in the manner prescribed in 
the squad drill. 

The company marching by a flank, may be marched by 
the front by the same commands and means. 

Marching in column by platoon, to march by the flank in 
the same direction. 

COLUMN. BY RIGHT FLANK— Each chief of pla- 
toon goes to its right to conduct it. 

BY FILE LEFT-MARCH.— At the word march, each 
platoon faces to the right in marching, wheels by file to the 
left and marches forward: the leading file of the second 
platoon unites with the rear-file of the first, the chief and 
guide of the second passing through the interval to their 
places as file-closers. 

With the left in front, the movement is executed by in- 
verse means, substituting in the commands left for right, 
and right for left. The captain conducts the left flank 
and the covering sergeant returns to his place in rear of the 
last file. 

To break from line into column by platoon (Fig. 5.) 

The company being at a halt. 

BY PLATOON, RIGHT WHEEL. The chiefs of pla- 
toon place themselves in front of their platoons ; the cover- 
ing sergeant replacing the captain in the front-rank. 

MARCH. — The right front-rank man of each platoon 
faces to the right, the covering sergeant standing fast ; the 
chief of each platoon moves a little beyond the point at which 
the marching flank will rest when the wheel is completed, 
faces to the late rear, and places himself so that the line 
which he forms with the man on the right, who has faced, 
shall be perpendicular to that occupied by the company in 

42 



PART I. OF THE COMPANY. 43 

line. Each platoon wheels according to the principles pre- 
scribed for the wheel on a fixed pivot, and when the man 
who conducts the marching flank, arrives within three paces 
of the perpendicular, the chief gives the words platoon halt. 
The covering sergeant, and the second sergeant then move 
to the point where the left of their respective platoons is to 
rest, and are aligned by their chiefs on the man of their re- 
spective platoons who had faced to the right. Each chief 
aligns his platoon by the left, giving the words left-dress, 
followed by front, and takes his place in column. 

To break by platoon to the left, is executed according to 
the same principles, and by inverse means. 

To march in column. 

The guide of the leading platoon takes two points on the 
ground in a straight line to the front. 

COLUMN FORWARD. GUIDE LEFT-MARCH— 
At the word march, the whole steps off together; the guide 
of the second platoon marching exactly in the trace of the 
guide of the first, and preserving between the latter and him- 
self a distance precisely equal to the front of his platoon. 

A column, left in front, is put in march according to the 
same principles, substituting in the commands guide right 

for GUIDE LEFT. 

To change direction, marching in column. Fig. 6, 7. 

A marker is placed on the direction of the guide, at the 
point at which the change is to take place, presenting his 
breast to that flank of the column. 

The leading guide directs his march, so that incoming up 
his left arm may graze the breast of the marker. When 
the leading platoon arrives within four paces of the marker, 
its chief gives the words left turn, and adds march, the mo- 
ment the left guide is opposite the marker. The guide and 
the platoon turn to the left, conforming to what is prescribed 
in the squad drill ; the guide, the moment he has turned, 
takes points on the ground in the new direction. The second 
platoon continues to march forward until up with the mark- 
er, when it turns by the same commands and according to 
the same principles which governed the first. 

To change direction to the side opposite the guide ; when 

43 



44 PART I. OF THE COMPANY. 

the guide of the first platoon is within four paces of the 
marker, its chief gives the words ri^ht-wheel, followed by 
march, the instant the guide is opposite the marker. The 
wheel being nearly ended the chief gives the word forward, 
and when completed march, when the platoon moves for- 
ward. The second platoon wheels on the same ground 
where the first had wheeled, and by the same commands 
from its chief. 

With the left in front, changes of direction are made ac- 
cording to the same principles and by inverse means. 

To halt the column, and wheel it into line. (Fig. 8.) 

COLUMN-HALT. — At the word halt, the column halts, 
and the guides stand fast : their position is next rectified, if 
necessary. 

LEFT-DRESS. — Each chief of platoon, placing himself 
two paces outside of his guide, directs the alignment of his 
platoon perpendicularly to the direction, gives the word 
front, and returns to his place in column. 

LEFT INTO LINE WHEEL-MARCH.— At the word 
march, the front-rank man on the left of each platoon, faces 
to the left, placing his breast against the arm of the guide 
by his side, who stands fast, and the platoons wheel to the 
left, on the principles of wheels from a halt. Each chief, 
when the marching flank of his platoon is three paces from 
the line, gives the words platoon, halt, and the chief of the 
second returns to his place as a file-closer. The captain 
then goes to the point where the right of the company will 
rest in line, and aligns the company by the right, giving the 
words right-dress, followed by front. 

GUIDES-POSTS. — The covering sergeant covers the 
captain, and the left guide retires to his place as a file-closer. 

If the left be in front, the wheel to the right into line, is 
executed on the same principles, and by inverse means ; the 
captain after halting the first platoon, goes to the left of the 
company to align if by the left, and shifts to his proper flank 
at the command guides-posts. 

To diminish and increase front of column in marching. 

Diminishing. (Fig. 9.) 

Marching in column, supposed by company. 

BREAK INTO PLATOON.— The first lieutenant passes 

44 



PART I. OF THE COMPANY. 45 

around the left to the centre of his platoon, and cautions it to 
mark-time. 

MARCH. — The first platoon continues to march forward ; 
the second platoon marks time until clear of the first, when 
its chief gives the words, right oblique-march, and adds 
fonvard-march the instant the guide of his platoon covers 
the guide of the first platoon ; the guide of the first having 
placed himself on the left of his platoon the instant that flank 
was disengaged. 

Increasing. (Fig. 10.) 

FORM COMPANY.— The captain cautions the first pla- 
toon to oblique to the right. 

MARCH. — The first platoon obliques to the right, (the 
covering sergeant shifting to the right flank,) and when it 
has nearly unmasked the second, the captain gives the words, 
mark-time, followed by march, the instant it completes the 
unmasking. The second platoon continues to move for- 
ward, and when nearly up with the first, the captain gives 
the word forward, followed by march, the instant the two 
platoons unite, when they move forward together. 

In column, left in front, these movements are executed 
according to the same principles and by inverse means. 

Diminishing and increasing front of column by files. 

Files are broken off from the directing flank only ; that is, 
from the left flank, if the right be in front, and from the right 
flank, if the left be in front. 

The company marching and supposed to constitute part 
of a column right in front, the captain, as a caution to that 
effect, gives the words, one file from left to rear, march, 
when the left file marks time, and as soon as the rear-rank 
of the company has passed the men of that file respectively, 
they take post as follows : the rear-rank man of the file, be- 
hind the second file from the left, and the front-rank man, 
behind the first file, and thus continue the march. 

If another file is to break off, the same command is given, 
when the file already broken off, moves the space of one file 
to the right, leaving room for the next file to break off, and 
forms in its rear. 

If several files are to break off at the same time, the files 
named mark time, each rank advances a little the left shoul- 

4f> 



46 PART I. OP THE COMPANY. 

der, as it is cleared by the rear-rank of the company, obliques 
in rank, and places itself behind one of the two nearest files, 
as already prescribed. 

To cause files in rear to form into line, the captain, as a 
caution to that effect, gives the words, onejile into line, march, 
when the front-file returns quickly into line, and the remain- 
ing files incline the space of one file to the left. 

If several files are to move up into line at the same time, 
the files designated advance the right shoulder, and move up 
and form on the flank of the company by the shortest lines. 

The guide of the directing flank shifts his position, so as 
to be always next, on that flank, to the front-rank man re- 
maining in line. The file-closers who had been posted be- 
hind the files broken off, march abreast of their respective 
files, as in other flank marches. 

To march in column of route, and to execute the movements 
incident thereto. 

The length of the route step is twenty-eight inches, and 
ninety in a minute. 

The company supposed to constitute part of a column at 
a halt. 

COLUMN FORWARD, GUIDE LEFT (or RIGHT) 
ROUTE STEP-MARCH.— At the word march, the ranks 
step off together ; the rear-rank takes, in marching, a dis- 
tance of one pace from the front-rank ; the men carry their 
arms at will, and are not required to keep silence >r to 
march in the cadenced step ; but the ranks are not to inter- 
mix, or to open at too great a distance. 

Change of direction is executed without formal commands, 
on a caution from the captain. The rear-rank changes direc- 
tion on the same ground on which the front-rank had changed ; 
the pivot man, on the reverse flank, taking steps of fourteen, 
instead of nine inches, to clear the wheeling point. 

To pass to closed ranks and the cadenced step. 
SHOULDER-ARMS. CLOSE ORDER -MARCH.- • 
At the word march, the rear-rank regains the habitual dis- 
tance, and resumes the cadenced pace. 

To resume the route step. 
ROUTE-STEP- MARCH. —At the word march, the 
company resumes the route march as above. 

46 



PART I. OF THE COMPANY. 47 

To march by a flank in the same direction. 

Arms arc first shouldered raid ranks closed as above, when 
COMPANY BY RIGHT (or LEFT) FLANK. BY FILE 
LEFT (or RIGHT) MARCH.— At the word march, the 
company faces in marching and wheels by file, in the direc- 
tion indicated. If any files are broken off to the rear, they 
regain their places by wheeling, and follow the movement 
of the company. 

Marching in the route step, to diminish and increase front 
by platoon. 

The same commands and means are observed, as if the 
march were in the cadenced step, except that in the platoon 
which obliques, each man half faces to the right or left, and 
thus marches diagonally till the platoon covers or unmasks 
the other platoon. 

To diminish front by section. 

The captain causes arms to be shouldered, ranks closed, 
and then gives the words, break into sections — march. The 
movement is executed according to the principles indicated 
for the same movement by platoon in the cadenced step. As 
soon as the sections are formed, the route step is resumed by 
the proper commands. 

To increase front by section. 

The captain causes arms to be shouldered, ranks closed, 
and then gives the words, form platoons, march. As soon 
as the platoons are formed, the route step is resumed by the 
proper commands. 

Files are broken ofF, and formed into line, according to 
the principles already prescribed, the ranks being first closed 
and arms shouldered. 

When a column, marching in the route step, halts, the 
rear-rank closes to its habitual distance at the word halt, 
and the whole shoulder-arms. 

Countermarch. (Fig. 11.) 
The company being at a halt, and supposed to constitute part of a column. 

COUNTERMARCH COMPANY BY RIGHT FLANK. 
RIGHT-FACE. — The company faces to the right, the two 
guides to the right-about : the captain goes to the right of his 

47 



48 PART I. OF THE COMPANY. 

company, causes two files to break to the rear, and places 
himself beside the leading front-rank man. 

BY FILE LEFT-MARCH.— At the word march, both 
guides stand fast ; the company steps off; the first file, con- 
ducted by the captain, wheels round the right guide, and 
directs its march along the front-rank, so as to arrive behind, 
and two paces from, the left guide ; each file wheels, in suc- 
cession, around the right guide ; when the leading file is op- 
posite the left guide, the captain gives the words, company, 
halt, front-face, right-dress, aligns the company on the two 
guides, and adds front: he then places himself before the 
centre of his company, and the two guides shift to their 
proper places, passing by the front-rank. 

A column by platoon is countermarched by the same com- 
mands and according to the same principles. 

With the left in front, the countermarch is executed by 
inverse commands and means, but according to the same 
principles ; the column facing to the left, and wheeling by 
file to the right, passing always by the front-rank. 

Marching in column by platoon, to form on right (or left) 
into line. (Fig. 12.) 

A marker is posted at a point where the right of the com- 
pany is to rest in line, presenting his left shoulder to that 
line. This point should be nine paces in advance of the first 
platoon after it has turned. 

ON RIGHT INTO LINE. GUIDE-RIGHT.— The 
guide of each platoon shifts to the right flank, and the men 
touch elbows to the right. When the head of the column is 
nearly opposite the marker, the chief of the first platoon 
gives the words, right-turn, and when exactly opposite, 
adds — march. The first platoon turns to the right, its 
guide so directing his march, as to bring the man next on 
his left opposite the marker. When this platoon is near 
the line, its chief gives the word platoon, followed by halt, 
when within three paces of the line. The platoon halts, and 
the files not yet in line come up. The guide throws himself 
on the line opposite the left file of his platoon, faces to and 
is aligned on the marker. The chief of the platoon then 
places himself where the right of the company is to rest, and 
aligns his platoon on the guide and marker, giving the 
words right-dress. The second platoon continues to march 

43 



PART I. OF THE COMPANY. 49 

forward, until its guide is opposite the left file of the first, 
when it turns to the right at the command of its chief, and is 
halted in the manner prescribed for the first : at the instant 
it halts, the guide throws himself on the line opposite its left 
file, and the chief giving the words right-dress, takes 
his place as file-closer, passing around the left. The cap- 
tain aligns the company and gives the word front, 

GUIDES-POSTS.— The two guides return to their places 
in line. 

With the left in front, the line is formed on the left accord- 
ing to the same principles but by inverse means ; the cap- 
tain after halting the first platoon proceeding to the left of 
the company to align it, and shifting to his proper flank at 
the words guides-posts. 

As often as a company or battalion, marching otherwise 
than at carried arms, halts, it carries arms at the word halt; 
this rule is general. 



MANUAL OF ARMS. 

For Sergeants. 

The sergeants, like the rank and file, will always, under 
arms, appear with bayonets fixed. 

All sergeants, including the sergeant-major and the quar- 
termaster sergeant, also corporals of the colour-guard, and all 
corporals not in the ranks and files, will carry and handle 
their arms as will herein be prescribed, for sergeants. 

Sergeants, in the manual of arms, will observe in all the 
times, the cadence prescribed for the rank and file. In the 
loadings and firings they will remain at the shoulder, or sup- 
port arms, according to the order which they may receive. 

Position of Shouldered Arms. 

The piece within the right arm, the barrel to the rear, erect, 
and resting against the hollow of the shoulder; the right 
arm nearly straight, the right hand embracing the cock and 
guard, and the left arm hanging by the side. 

PRESENT-ARMS.— 1st mo. With the right hand bring 
the piece erect, opposite to the centre of the body, the ram- 
mer to the front; at the same time seize the piece with the 

E 49 



50 PART I. OF THE COMPANY. 

left hand above the lock, the little finger against the feather- 
spring, the thumb extended along the barrel and on the stock, 
the fore-arm resting on the body without constraint, and the 
hand at the height of the elbow. 

2d mo. Correct the position of the right hand, so as to 
bring it under and against the guard, as in the case of the 
men. 

SHOULDER-ARMS.— 1st mo. Glide the left hand, on 
the piece, to the height of the shoulder, and with this hand 
bring the piece erect against the right shoulder ; embrace, 
with the right hand, the cock and guard, the right arm near- 
ly straight. 

2d mo. Drop the left hand smartly by the side. 

ORDER-ARMS.— 1st mo. Bring the left hand prompt- 
ly to the middle band ; detach the piece a little from the 
shoulder with the right hand ; quit the hold of the right hand ; 
lower the piece with the left, seizing it again with the right 
above the lower band, the thumb on the barrel, the four fin- 
gers extended on the stock, the piece erect, the butt about 
three inches from the ground, the toe (or beak) of the butt 
over its place, and drop the left hand by the side. 

2d mo. Let the piece glide through the right hand, open- 
ing a little the thumb and fingers, so that the butt may come 
to the ground, without shock, its toe in a line with and against 
the toe of the right foot. 

SHOULDER-ARMS.— 1st mo. With the right hand 
raise the piece perpendicularly, the hand to the height of the 
right breast opposite to the shoulder, but further out, and 
about two inches from the body, on which the right elbow 
will rest ; seize the piece with the left hand under the right ; 
drop the right hand, and with it embrace the cock and guard, 
supporting the piece against the left shoulder, the right arm 
nearly straight. 

2d mo. Let the left hand fall smartly by the side. 

SUPPORT-ARMS.— 1 st mo. With the right hand bring 
the piece erect between the eyes, the rammer to the front ; 
seize the piece with the left hand at the lower band, raise 
this hand to the height of the chin, and grasp the piece at 
the same time about four inches below the lock with the 
right hand. 

2d mo. With the right hand turn the piece, the barrel to 
the front, support it against the left shoulder, and bring the 

50 



PART I. OF THE COMPANY. 51 

left fore-arm between the cock and right hand, horizontally 
across the body, the cock resting on the left fore-arm, and 
the left hand on the right breast. 

3d mo. Drop smartly the right hand by the side. 

SHOULDER- ARMS.— 1st mo. Seize the piece with 
the right hand, under and against the left fore-arm. 

2d mo. Bring the piece erect with the right hand against 
the right shoulder, the rammer to the front ; seize it with 
the left hand at the height of the shoulder ; correct the posi- 
tion of the right hand at the same time so as to embrace the 
cock and guard, the right arm nearly straight. 

3d mo. Drop smartly the left hand by the side. 

UNFIX-BAYONET.— 1st mo. Bring the left hand 
promptly to the middle band, detach a little the piece from 
the shoulder with the right hand. 

2d mo. Lower the piece with the left hand, seize it with 
the right above the lower band ; rest the butt on the ground, 
letting the piece glide through the left hand ; bring the right 
hand immediately to the bayonet. 

3d mo. Wrest off the bayonet and return it to the scab- 
bard ; next seize the piece with the right hand a little above 
the lower band ; drop the left hand at the same time by the 
side, and take the position of the soldier at ordered arms. 

SHOULDER-ARMS.— As from order-arms. 

FIX-BAYONET.— 1st and 2d mo. As those of unfix, 
bayonet, except that at the end of the second motion the 
right hand will be brought to seize the bayonet by the socket 
and shank, so that the socket may extend about an inch 
above the heel of the hand. 

3d mo. Draw the bayonet from the scabbard with the 
right hand, carry and fix it on the muzzle ; next seize the 
piece with the right hand above the lower band, and drop 
smartly the left hand by the side. 

SHOULDER-ARMS.— As from order-arms. 

For Corporals. 

To pass from the shoulder, as private, to the shoulder as 
sergeant. 

SHOULDER- ARMS.— 1st mo. With the right hand 
seize the piece at the handle, turn it, the lock Jo the front, 
as in the first motion of present-arms. 

2d mo. Carry the piece, with the right hand, erect against 

51 



52 PART I. OF THE COMPANY. 

the right shoulder, the rammer to the front, the right arm 
nearly straight, the right hand embracing the cock and guard ; 
seize the piece with the left hand at the height of the shoulder. 
3d mo. Drop the left hand smartly by the side. 

For Corporals of the Colour-guard^ (or Sergeants.) 

CHARGE-BAYONET.— 1st mo. Raise the piece with 
the right hand, in half- facing to the right on the left heel, 
and bring the hollow of the right foot opposite to, and three 
inches from, the left heel. 

2d mo. Drop the piece forward into the left hand, which 
will seize it a little above the lower band, the barrel up, the 
left elbow supported against the body ; with the right hand 
seize the handle below the guard, this hand supported against 
the hip, the point of the bayonet at the height of the eye. 

SHOULDER-ARMS.— 1st mo. In facing to the "front, 
raise the piece with the left hand, bring it erect against the 
right shoulder, the rammer to the front ; with the right hand 
at the same time embrace the cock and guard. 

2d mo. Quit hold with the left hand, and drop this hand 
by the side ; lengthen at the same time the right arm. 

For Corporals returning to the Ranks. 

SHOULDER-ARMS.— 1st mo. Detach the piece from 
the shoulder, bring it erect between the eyes, seize it with 
the left hand at the height of the neck ; grasp, with the right 
hand, the handle, this hand at the height of the elbow, the 
rammer to the front. 

2d mo. Raise the piece with the right hand, the thumb 
extended on the counter-plate ; turn the barrel to the front ; 
support the piece against the left shoulder ; at the same time 
drop the left hand and place it under the butt. 

3d mo. Drop the right hand smartly by the side. 



MANUAL OF THE SWORD OR SABRE FOR 

OFFICERS. 

Position of the Sicord or Sabre under Anns. 

The Carry. — The gripe in the right hand, which will be 
supported against the right hip, the back of the blade against 
the shoulder. 

52 



PART I. OF THE COMPANY. 53 

To Salute with the Sword or Sabre. 

1st. At the distance of six paces from the person to be 
saluted, raise the sword or sabre perpendicularly, the point 
up, the flat of the blade opposite to the right eye, the guard 
at the height of the shoulder, the elbow supported on the 
body. 

2d. Drop the point of the sword or sabre in extending 
the arm, so that the right hand may be brought to the 
side of the right thigh, and remain in that position until the 
person to whom the salute is rendered shall be passed, or 
shall have passed six paces. 

3d. Raise the sword or sabre smartly, and resume the 
position first prescribed. 



COLOUR-SALUTE. 

In the ranks, the colour-bearer, whether at a halt or in 
march, will always carry the heel of the colour-lance sup- 
ported at the right hip, the right hand generally placed on 
the lance at the height of the shoulder, to hold it steady. 
When the colour has to render honors, the colour-bearer will 
salute as follows: 

At the distance of six paces, glide the right hand along 
the lance to the height of the eye ; lower the lance by straight- 
ening the arm to its full extent, the heel of the lance remain- 
ing at the hip, and bring back the lance to the habitual posi- 
tion when the person saluted shall be passed, or shall have 
passed six paces. 



INSTRUCTION 

FOR THE DRUM MAJOR (OR PRINCIPAL MUSICIAN.) 

In column in manoeuvre, the field music and band will 
march abreast with the left centre company on the reverse 
flank. 

In column in route, as well as in the passage of defiles to 
the front or in retreat, they will march at the head of their 
respective battalions. 

Beats of the Drum and Sounds of the Bugle. 
The number of beats of the drum for the assembly, pa- 
E2 &3 



54 



PART I. OF THE COMPANY. 



rade, and movements of the infantry, independent of mere 
police calls and the particular march of the regiment, is fixed 
at eighteen. These beats are : 



1. 


The generale. 


10. 


The disperse. 


2. 


The assembly. 


11. 


Drummer's call. 


3. 


To the colour. 


12. 


The roll. 


4. 


The long roll. 


13. 


First sergeant's call. 


5. 


The troop. 


14. 


Double quick march 


6. 


Quick time. 


15. 


Run. 


7. 


The charging step. 


16. 


Halt. 


8. 


The reveille. 


17. 


March in retreat. 


9. 


The retreat. 


18. 


Commence firing. 



The number of bugle sounds is fixed at twenty-three, ex- 
clusive of the particular march of each regiment. These 
sounds are : 



1. 


The generale. 




13. 


Double quick march. 




2. 


The assembly. 




14. 


Run. 




3. 


To the colour. 




15. 


Halt. 




4. 


The troop. 




16. 


Forward march. 




5. 


Common time. 




17. 


March in retreat. 


c 5 


6. 


Quick time. 




18. 


By the right flank 


"1 


7. 


The charging s 


tep. 




march. 


1 


8. 


The reveille. 




19. 


By the left flank 


> 1 


9. 


The retreat. 






march. 


s 


10. 


The disperse. 




20. 


Commence firing. 


11. 


Bugler's call. 




21. 


Cease firing. 




12. 


First sergeant's 


s call. 


22. 
23. 


Rally on the reserve. 
Rally on the battal- 





Signals of the Drum Major (or principal Musician) for 
the different beats. 



1. The generale. 

2. The assembly. 



Extend the right arm, seize the 
staff at the middle, and raise the 
pommel to the height of the chin. 

Extend the right arm, raise the 
staffabout a foot from the ground, 
and place the thumb on the pom- 
mel. 

54 



TAUT I. OP THE COMPANY. 55 

3. To the colour. Raise the staff perpendicularly, 

the ferrule upwards, the arm ex- 
tended and at the height of the 
shoulder. 

4. The long roll. Put the staff on the right shoulder, 

the ferrule to the rear. 

5. The troop. Raise the arm, turn the wrist 

within, and place the staff hori- 
zontally across the body at the 
height of the chin. 

6. Quick time. Project the ferrule of the staff di- 

rect and horizontally to the front. 

7. The charging step. The same signal, with a brisk agi- 

tation of the staff. 

10. The disperse. Raise the staff perpendicularly, 

the ferrule down, the arm extend- 
ed at the height of the shoulder. 

12. The roll. Raise the staff in the left hand in 

the manner of the last signal. 

Signals for the movements of the Field Music and Band. 
1st. To march by the right flank, take the staff at the 
middle and extend the arm to the right. 

2d. To march by the left flank, make the same signal, 
extending the arm to the left. 

3d. To diminish front, let the ferrule fall into the left 
hand, held as high as the eyes. 

4th. To increase front, let the pommel of the staff fall 
into the left hand, held as high as the eyes. 

5th. To change direction, turn half round to the drum- 
mers, and indicate to them, by a movement of the staff, to 
which side they are to wheel or turn. 

6th. To oblique to the right, extend the right arm as high 
as the shoulder, holding the staff slantingly, and grasp the 
ferrule, the left hand as high as the hip. 

7th. To oblique to the left, make the contrary signal ; the 
pommel of the staff will always indicate to which side the 
obliquing is to take place. 

To Ground Drums, fyc. 
1 . To put up drumsticks. Grasp the staff under the pom- 
mel, and raise it as high as 
the eyes, extending the arm 
to the front. 

55 



56 



PART I. OF THE COMPANY. 



2. To unsling drums. 

3. To ground drums. 

1. To take up drums. 

2. To suspend drums. 

3. To draw out drumsticks. 



Draw the pommel to the 
breast. 

The same signal as for put- 
ting up drumsticks. 
' Make the same signals with 
the staff as for putting up 
drumsticks, for detaching 
drums, and for grounding 
drums. 



Instruction for the Corporal of Pioneers. 

In column in manoeuvre, the pioneers will be on the re- 
verse flank, abreast with the right centre company. 

In route marches, as also in passing defiles to the front or 
rear, the pioneers will march six paces in front of the drum- 
mers. In route marches, all the pioneers of a general col- 
umn (column of several battalions) may be assembled at its 
head. 

Pioneers and drummers may be designated as markers, 
and used accordingly, in the manoeuvres and evolutions. 

56 



PART I. OF THE COMTANY. 
Fig. 1. 



n □ o d j a u □ □ 



. 2d Platoon. 
Fig. 2. 



IstPlatoon 



_J 







Fig. 3. 



Fig. 4. 







^$ 



\ x -0^ o 



Fig 5. 




Fig. 7. 




Fig. 6. 

■ilk 



v\V\\\VA 

■"I 






57 



PART 1. OP THE COMPANY. 
Fig. 8. 




a a a a a a 



Fig. 9. 




i P a a 
f / 

/ 

i r 
J / 

V 


a a a 

/Fig. 10 

V 


J 1 





Fig. 11 



5) 



Fig. 12. 




58 



PART I. 



OF THE BATTALION. 



Formation of a Regiment, or Battalion, in order of battle. 

(Fig. 1.) — The regiment or battalion is supposed to con- 
sist of ten companies, to wit : one grenadier company, one 
light infantry or rifle company, and eight battalion compa- 
nies. 

The battalion companies are drawn up according to the 
rank of their captains, as follows :■ — 1st, 5th, 4th, 7th, 3d, 
8th, 6th, 2d, and are designated from right to left, first com- 
pany, second company, third company, &c. 

The grenadier company is posted on the right of the bat- 
talion, and the light infantry or rifle company, on the left of 
the battalion. 

The two first companies on the right, whatever be their 
denomination, form the frst division : the next two compa- 
nies, the second division ; and so on to the left. 

The colour-bearer (a sergeant) and five corporals, as a 
colour-guard, are posted on the left of the right centre battal- 
ion company, of which they make a part. They are formed 
in two ranks, the colour-bearer in the front-rank, with a cor- 
poral on his right and left, and three corporals in the rear- 
covering. If there be two colours, then four corporals only 
will constitute the colour-guard. The colour-bearers will be in 
the front-rank, with a corporal between them, covered by 
three corporals in the rear. 

The colour-company and all on its right are denominated 
the right wing of the battalion ; the remaining companies, 
the left wing. 

The colonel takes post thirty paces in rear of the file- 
closers, opposite to the centre of the battalion ; the lieuten- 
ant-colonel and major opposite to the centres of the right 
and left wings respectively, and twelve paces in rear of the 
file-closers. The colonel, lieutenant-colonel, and major, are 
mounted. 

59 



60 PART I. OF THE BATTALION. 

The adjutant and sergeant-major are opposite to the right 
and left of the battalion respectively, and eight paces in rear 
of the file-closers ; they aid the lieutenant-colonel and ma- 
jor respectively in the manoeuvres. 

The quartermaster, surgeon, and assistant-surgeon, drawn 
up in one rank, from right to left, in the order they are 
named, are posted on the left of the colonel, three paces in 
his rear. 

The quartermaster sergeant is posted in a line with the 
front-rank of the field-music, and two paces on the right. 

The pioneers, with the corporal of pioneers on their right, 
are formed in two ranks and posted on the right of the gre- 
nadiers, their left four paces from the right of that company. 

The field-music is formed in two ranks, the drummers in 
the rear, and posted twelve paces in rear of the file-closers, 
the left opposite to the centre of the left centre company. 
The senior principal musician is two paces in front of the 
field-music, the other two paces in the rear. 

The band is formed in two ranks, and posted three paces 
in rear of the field-music. 

Two sergeants, one denominated the right general guide, 
the other the left general guide, axe posted in the line of file- 
closers, the first in the rear of the right, and the second in 
the rear of the left-flank of the battalion. 

For manoeuvring, the companies in each battalion are al- 
ways equalized. 

To open Ra?iks. 

PREPARE TO OPEN RANKS.— At this command, the 
lieutenant-colonel and major place themselves on the right of 
the battalion to direct the alignment. 

TO THE REAR OPEN ORDER.— The covering ser- 
geants, and the covering corporal step off smartly four paces 
to the rear opposite to their places in line, and are aligned by 
the lieutenant-colonel on the covering corporal who inverts 
his piece and holds it erect between his eyes. 

MARCH. — The rear-rank and file-closers step off to the 
rear in common time ; the rear-rank passes a little in rear of 
its new line, halts, dresses to the right, and is aligned by the 
covering sergeants, superintended by the lieutenant-colonel. 
The file-closers fall back two paces from the rear-rank, and" 

60 






PART I. OF THE BATTALION. 61 

are aligned by the major on the file-closer of the left, who 
inverts his piece and holds it erect between his eyes. 

FRONT. — The lieutenant-colonel and major return to 
their places in line. 

To close Ranks. 

CLOSE ORDER— MARCH.— At the word maech, the 
rear-rank closes to the front, each man covering his file 
leader. 

Manual of Arms. 

The ranks being closed, the manual of arms is executed in 
the following order : 

Present-arms, - - - Shoulder-arms, 
Order-arms, ... Shoulder-arms, 

Support-arms, - - - Carry-arms, 
Charge-bayonet, - - - Shoulder-arms. 



LOADINGS AT WILL AND THE FIRINGS. 

Loading at will is executed by the commands and in the 
manner prescribed in the squad-drill ; the officers and ser- 
geants in the ranks, half face to the right with the men, and 
face to the front when the men next to them cast about. 

The fire by company and by file, is always direct, that 
by battalion and by wing, is either direct or oblique ; in the 
latter case the commanding officer gives the caution right 
(or left) oblique, between the words ready and aim. 
The colour-guard is not to fire, but to reserve itself for the 
defence of the colour. 

The fire by Company. 

FIRE BY COMPANY.— At this command, the captains 
and the covering sergeants place themselves in the manner 
prescribed for this fire in the company drill. The colour 
and its guard step back so as to bring the front-rank of the 
guard on a line with the rear-rank ; these rules are general 
for all the different firings. 

COMMENCE FIRING.— At this command, the right 
company of each division begins the fire, their captains giv- 
ing the words (such) company, ready, aim, fire, load, 

F 61 



62 PART I. OF THE BATTALION. 

The captains of the left companies of divisions, observe the 
same rule, each taking care not to give his first command, 
till he sees one or two pieces shouldered in the right com- 
pany of his division : the captains of the right companies of 
divisions, after the first discharge, observe the same rule 
\rith regard to the left companies. In order that the right 
companies of divisions may not all fire at once, their cap- 
tains, for the first discharge only, give the word fire, in suc- 
cession from right to left. 

The commanding officer causes the firing to cease by a 
short roll, when the captains and all the file-closers give the 
words cease firing ; the men complete the loading and 
come to the shoulder : the roll is followed by a tap of the 
drum, when the captains, covering sergeants, and the colour- 
guard resume their places in line. These rules are general 
for all the firings. 

The fire by Wing, 

FIRE BY WING. RIGHT (or LEFT)WING. \ The 

READY. AIM. FIRE. LOAD. \ wings 

fire alternately, care being taken to see that one or two pieces 

are shouldered in the wing that has just fired before giving 

the first command for the other. 

The fire by Battalion, 

This is executed by the commands : FIRE BY BAT- 
TALION. BATTALION— READY. AIM. FIRE. LOAD. 

The fire by File, 

FIRE BY FILE. BATTALION. > At the command, 
READY. COMMENCE FIRING. \ commence firing, 

the firing begins on the right of each company at the same 

time. 

To fire by the Rear-rank. 

FACE BY THE REAR-RANK.— The captains, cover- 
ing sergeants, and the file-closers, conform to what is pre- 
scribed in the company drill, under this head. The colour- 
bearer passes into the rear-rank, the corporal of his file step- 
ping before the corporal next on his own right, to let the 
colour-bearer pass, and then stepping in front of the colour- 
bearer to reform his file ; the closing sergeant and covering 

62 



PART I. OP THE BATTALION. 63 

corporal change places; the lieutenant-colonel, adjutant, 
major, sergeant-major, field-music, and band, throw them- 
selves before the front-rank, each opposite to his place in 
line, the first two passing round the right, the others round 
the left of the battalion. 

BATTALION— ABOUT-FACE.— The battalion faces 
about, the captains placing themselves in their intervals in 
the rear-rank, now front, and their covering sergeants be- 
hind them in the front-rank, now rear. 

The different firings are executed by the same commands 
as if the battalion were faced by the front-rank. The right 
and left wings and companies, retain their former designa- 
tions. The fire by file, commences on the left, now right, 
of each company. The captains, covering sergeants, and 
colour-guard, on the first command, take the places pre- 
scribed for them in the fires, with the front-rank leading. 

To resume the proper Front. 
FACE BY THE FRONT-RANK. > The battalion re- 
BATTALION— ABOUT-FACE. \ turns to its proper 
front in the manner prescribed for the face by the rear- 

RANK. 

To stack and resume Arms. 

STACK-ARMS. — Arms are stacked in the manner pre- 
scribed in the squad-drill. 

BREAK-RANKS— MARCH— At the word march, the 
ranks disperse. 

To return the battalion to the ranks, a short roll is given, 
during which the battalion re-forms behind the stacks of 
arms. 

TAKE-ARMS. — This command is executed in the man- 
ner prescribed in the squad-drill. 

BATTALION.— At this word, the ranks fix their atten- 
tion and remain immoveable. 

Manner of determining a Line. 

The commanding officer having determined on the direc- 
tion of his line, and his points A B, sends out two officers 
C D, to seek two intermediate points in the same line ; the 
officer D advances, when C finds him in the direct line be- 
tween himself and the point A, he advances, taking care to 

63 



64 PART I. OF THE BATTALION. 

keep D always between himself and the point A, which he 
does by making him signals to advance or retire ; when D 
finds C in the direct line between himself and B, he makes 
him the signal to halt, and they will find themselves in the 
intermediate points, C D. 



k -J 1 -J 

— -1. 



i 



ID 

Movements. 



The following movements are arranged throughout as for 
eight companies, but they are applicable to ten companies. 
The movements are detailed as performed from the right ; 
the mode of doing them from the left is explained in each 
case. 

In the successive formations, (see No.'s 6, 7, 8, 9 and 10, 
of movements from open column, No.'s 8, 9 and 10, from 
close column, and 1 and 2, from column doubled on the cen- 
tre,) each captain causes his company to support arms the 
moment the captain, who follows him, commandsjfrofrt. 

If the firing is to commence during the execution of the 
successive formations, the order to that effect is given to the 
captain whose company is first in line ; this captain places 
himself behind the centre, and as soon as the next captain 
commands front, he commences the fre by file. At the 
words fire by file, the marker nearest the company just 
formed, places himself before the nearest file of that compa- 
ny, and the other marker retires. The captain of this last 
company commences the fire as soon as the captain of the 
next following company commands front ; the marker re- 
tires, and the guide before the opposite flank places himself 
before the nearest file of the next company, and so on in con- 
tinuation. 

All the successive formations, except No. 8, from open 
column, may be formed by inversions, and they are executed 

64 



PART I. OP THE BATTALION. 65 

according to the same principles as formation in direct or- 
der, the first command always being, by inversion. (See 
No. 5, from open column.) 

The battalion being in line by inversion, to bring it back 
to the direct order, it first breaks or ploys, by company or 
by division, according as the column may have been, by 
company or by division, before it was formed in line by in- 
version. 

When a battalion, in line by inversion, has to ploy into 
column, the movement is executed according to the same 
principles as if the line were in direct order ; but observing 
the following rules : — If the column is to be by company or 
division, with the first in front, the caution, left in front, 
is given in the command, because the battalion being in line 
by inversion, that subdivision is on the left. Each chief 
whose subdivision takes post in the column in front of the 
directing one, halts in his own person when up with the pre- 
ceding right guide, and sees his subdivision file past ; and 
every chief aligns his subdivision by the right. When the 
column is to be put in march, the command guide left, is 
given, because the proper right is in front. For the same 
reason, if the last subdivision is to be in front, the words 
right in front, are given in the command ; the divisions 
are aligned by the left ; and in putting the column in march, 
the words guide right, are given, because tjie proper left 
is in front. 

In the movements, each chief of subdivision, previous to 
the order of execution, steps in front of his subdivision and cau- 
tions it as to the particular movement it has to perform ; the 
covering sergeants always replace their captains in the front- 
rank. 

MOVEMENTS FROM LINE. 

Movement No. l,from Line. 
To break to the right into column. (Fig. 2.) 
BY COMPANY. } At the word march, each compa- 
RIGHT-WHEEL. V ny wheels to the right on a fixed 
QUICK-MARCH. ) pivot, the left guide placing himself 
on the marching flank to conduct it ; when that flank arrives 
within three paces of the point where it is to rest, the cap- 
tain commands (such) company-halt ; the left guide steps 
forward to the point where the left of the company is to rest, 

F2 65 



66 PART I. OF THE BATTALION. 

and is aligned by the captain on the pivot man. Each cap- 
tain aligns his company by the left, giving the words left- 
dress, followed by front, and takes his place in column. 

Wheeling to the left into column, is performed according 
to the same principles, but by inverse means. 

Movement No. 2, from Line. (Fig. 3.) 

When the line breaks to the right, in order to march to 
the left, or the reverse, the command break to the eight 

TO MARCH TO THE LEFT, Or BREAK TO THE LEFT TO MARCH 

to the right, precedes the command by company-right 
(or left)-wheel. The company on that flank towards 
which the wheel is made, marches forward twice the extent 
of its front, while the others are wheeling, and there halts. 
The lieutenant-colonel places two markers, one abreast with 
the leading company, the other abreast with the next com- 
pany, near the directing guides. These two companies turn 
to the left (or right) the moment the column is put in march. 

Movement No. 3, from Line. 
To break to the rear into column. (Fig. 4.) 

BY THE RIGHT OF COMPANIES, ) The battalion 
TO THE REAR INTO COLUMN. V faces to the right, 
BATTALION— RIGHT-FACE. ) each captain goes 
to the right of his company, breaks two files to the rear, and 
places himself so that his breast shall touch the left arm of 
the front-rank man of the last file of the company on his 
right ; for this object the captain of the right company sup- 
poses a company to be on his right-, and dresses on the other 
captains. 

QUICK-MARCH. — Each company, conducted by the 
covering sergeant in front of the leading front-rank man, 
marches perpendicularly to the rear, each file wheeling on 
the same ground in succession. The captains stand fast, 
let their companies file past, and when the last file has wheel- 
ed, each captain gives the words (such) company-halt, 
front-face. The left guide then places himself so that 
his left arm may touch the captain's breast, and the captain 
adds left-dress, followed by front, and takes his place in 
column. 

To break to the rear by the left, the same command, sub- 
stituting left for right, and the same means are observed. 

66 



PART I. OF THE BATTALION. 67 

The captains shifting to the left of their companies and the 
left guides leading. 

Movement No 4, from Line. 
To ploy into close column, or mass. (Fig. 5.) 
This may be performed by company or by division. 
CLOSE COLUMN BY DIVISION, ON THIRD ) At 
DIVISION RIGHT IN FRONT, INTO CO- V the 
LUMN. BATTALION, INWARD-FACE. ) word 
face, the divisions on the right and left of the directing di- 
vision, which stands fast, face towards that division. Each 
chief of those on the right goes to the left of his division, 
causes files to break to the front and places himself by the 
side of his left guide, who is in front of the leading front-rank 
man. Each chief of those on the left of the directing divi- 
sion, goes to the right of his division, causes files to break 
to the rear, and places himself by the side of his right guide, 
who is in front of the leading front-rank man. 

QUICK-MARCH.— The chief of the directing division 
gives the words guide left, when its left guide places him- 
self on its left, and the file-closers advance one pace on 
the rear-rank. The other divisions, each conducted by its 
chief, step off together at the word, and the file-closers in- 
cline to the distance of one pace from the rear- rank. Each 
division enters the column parallelly to the directing division, 
to effect which those next to that division march by file, the 
one on its right, to the front, the one on its left, to the rear, 
each five paces before it turns to enter the column ; the other 
divisions march diagonally towards the points at which they 
are to enter the column. Each division that is to form in 
front of the directing division,- is conducted by its chief till 
its left guide is nearly up with the left guide of the directing 
division, the chief then gives the words: (such) division, 
halt, front-face, and the left guide faces to the rear and 
covers the preceeding guide at a distance of five paces ; the 
chief then adds left-dress, followed by front, and takes 
his place in column. Each chief of divisions which are 
to form in rear of the directing division, halts when he is 
up with the left guide of that division, lets his division file 
past, and when the last file has passed him, gives the words, 
(such) division, halt, front-face, when the left guide 
covers the preceding guide at a distance of five paces ; the 

07 



68 PART I. OF THE BATTALION. 

chief then adds left-dress, followed by front, and takes his 
place in column. 

The lieutenant-colonel rectifies the position of the guides 
in front, and the major, those in rear of the directing divi- 
sion. 

If the battalion is to ploy with the left in front, it will be 
so expressed in the command. The chief of the directing 
division gives the words guide-right the moment the move- 
ment begins, and the formation takes place according to the 
same principles but by inverse means. 

The battalion may ploy on any named division, with the 
right or left in front, according to the same principles. 

The guides who have faced about will face to the front at 
the words guides about— face, given by the commanding- 
officer, the moment the movement is complete. 

The battalion may be ployed into column at full or half 
distance, on the same principles, by substituting in the com- 
mands, COLUMN AT FULL (or HALF) DISTANCE, for CLOSE 
COLUMN. 

Movement No. 5, from Line. 

To ploy into column doubled on the centre. (Fig. 6.) 

DOUBLE COLUMN, ) The two centre 

AT HALF DISTANCE. V companies (fourth 

BATTALION, INWARD-FACE. ) and fifth) stand fast, 
the remaining companies face towards the centre. Each 
captain whose company has faced, causes two files at the 
head of his company to break to the rear ; the left guide of 
each right company, and the right guide of each left compa- 
ny places himself at the head of the front-rank, the captain 
by his side. 

QUICK-MARCH.— The two centre companies stand fast, 
their chief places himself before the centre, and gives the 
words guide-right. The remaining companies, conducted 
by their captains, enter the column at company distance, 
each behind the one preceding in the same wing, the corre- 
sponding companies of the two wings uniting ; that is, the 
third company unites with the sixth, the second with the 
seventh, and the first with the eighth. An instant before the 
union, the left guides of the right companies pass into the 
rank of file-closers, and when the head of the companies 
arrive opposite the centre of the directing division, each cap- 



TAKT I. OF THE BATTALION. 69 

tain gives the words (such) company, halt, front-face ; the 
senior captain of each division then adds right-dress, fol- 
lowed by front, and takes his place in column. 

The divisions thus formed, are denominated first, second, 
third, fourth, beginning at the front. 

The lieutenant-colonel in rear assures the right guides of 
the right companies on the direction, as they successively ar- 
rive. 

The double column, closed in mass, may be formed ac- 
cording to the same principles, by substituting in the com- 
mand, CLOSED IN MASS, for that Of AT HALF DISTANCE. 

Movement No. 6, from Line. 
Changes of Front. (Fig. 7.) 
Before the caution is given for a change of front, the base 
company is established on the new line, and two markers 
are placed in front of that company opposite the right and 
left files ; the markers face to the right, if the company be- 
long to the right wing ; and to the left, if it belong to the 
left wing. If the change is to be made on the fifth company, 
left wing forward, that company serves as the base, and the 
moment it is established the fourth company is faced about, 
wheeled to the right, halted, and faced to the front, its right 
guide steps out on the line at the point where its right is to 
rest and covers the markers, and the captain of the fifth 
steps into the rear-rank to give place to the captain of the 
fourth, who aligns his company by the left. If the change 
is to be made on the fourth company, right wing forward, 
the line is established by inverse means, the fourth company 
serves as the base and the fifth is aligned upon it. In these 
central changes, both the central companies are established 
before the caution is given. 

CHANGE FRONT ON FIFTH COMPANY, ^ At the 
LEFT WING FORWARD. RIGHT WING, | word 
ABOUT-FACE. BY COMPANY, RIGHT \ face, 
HALF WHEEL. QUICK-MARCH. FOR- I the 
WARD-MARCH. GUIDE-RIGHT. J com- 

panies of the right wing face about, their captains behind 
the rank now in rear : the companies of both wings half- 
wheel to the right, and the moment they have sufficiently 
wheeled, the words forward-march are given, when they 
move forward in echellon towards the new line, dressing by 

69 



70 PART I. OF THE BATTALION. 

the right. Each company of the right wing, as it approaches 
the new line, turns to the right, and when it has passed the 
line three paces, its captain gives the words (such) company, 
halt, about-face ; its right guide throws himself on the 
line opposite the right file and covers the preceding guides, 
and the captain placing himself on the right of the preced- 
ing company, gives the words left-dress, followed by 
front. Each company of the left wing, on approaching 
the line, turns to the right, and when within three paces of 
the line, its captain gives the words (such) company, halt ; 
its left guide throws himself on the line opposite the left file 
and covers the preceding guides, and the captain placing 
himself on the left of the preceding company, gives the 
words right— dress. 

GUIDES-POSTS.— The captains and guides take their 
places in line, and the markers retire. 

In central changes, the lieutenant-colonel rectifies the po- 
sition of the guides of the right wing, the major those of the 
left ; in other cases, the lieutenant-colonel alone rectifies the 
position of the guides, always placing himself on their rear 
as they successively arrive on the line. 

If the change of front is to be made forward on the right 
or left company, the command is given, change front for- 
ward ON FIRST (01* EIGHTH) COMPANY. BY COMPANY, RIGHT 

(or left) half wheel. quick-march, forward-march, 
guide-right (or left,) and the movement is executed ac- 
cording to the principles prescribed above for the companies 
of the left wing. 

, If the change of front is to be made to the rear on either 
of the flank companies, the command is given, change 

FRONT TO THE REAR ON FIRST (or EIGHTH) COMPANY. BAT- 
TALION ABOUT FACE. BY COMPANY, LEFT (or RIGHT) HALF 
WHEEL. QUICK-MARCH. FORWARD-MARCH. GUIDE-LEFT 

(or right,) and the movement is executed according to the 
principles prescribed above for the companies of the right 
wing. 

Movement No. 7, from Line. 

To march by a flank. 

BATTALION BY THE RIGHT (or LEFT) > The in- 

FLANK. RIGHT (or LEFT)-FACE. $ stant the 

battalion faces, the captains step out of the front-rank, and 

70 



PART 1. OP THE BATTALION. 71 

are replaced by their covering sergeants. If the face be to 
the right, the captains place themselves on the left of their 
covering sergeants, and the closing sergeant, in like man- 
ner places himself on the left of the covering corporal, who 
steps into the front-rank. If the face be to the left, each 
captain goes to the left of his company, and places himself 
on the right of the covering sergeant of the company pre- 
ceding his own ; the captain of the left company, on the 
right of the closing sergeant, who is now in the front-rank, 
the covering corporal in the rank of file-closers. 

BATTALION FORWARD. QUICK-MARCH— At the 
word march, the whole step off together, the sergeant of the 
leading file giving the direction. 

If it be necessary to change direction in marching, a mar- 
ker is established at the point of change, and the command- 
ing officer gives the words : by file, vight (or left,) and adds 
march, the instant the leading file is abreast of the marker. 
Each file wheels in succession on the same ground. 

If it be intended to halt and front the battalion, the com- 
manding officer gives the words : battalion, halt — front— 
face. The instant the battalion faces to the front, the cap- 
tains and covering sergeants resume their places in line and 
the former rectify the alignment. 

If the battalion, marching by the right flank, is to forfh on 
the right by file, two markers are placed in advance, at 
points where the right and left of the leading company are 
to rest, presenting their right shoulders to the line : the com- 
manding officer then gives the words : on right bv file 
into line, and adds march, the instant the leading file is 
opposite the first marker. The movement is executed in 
the manner prescribed for this formation in the company 
drill. Each company forms on the left of the one which 
precedes it. The left guide of each company, except the 
leading one, places himself on the direction of the markers, 
and opposite to the left file of his company, the moment this 
file arrives on the line. 

The movement ended, the commanding officer gives the 

words GUIDES— POSTS. 

The lieutenant-colonel, in succession assures the direc- 
tion of the guides. 

If the march be by the left flank, this movement is exe- 

71 



72 PART I. OP THE BATTALION. 

cuted according to the same principles, and by inverse 
means. 

Movement No. 8, from Line. 
To advance in line. (Fig 8.) 

The commanding officer places himself forty paces in rear 
of the colour-file, facing to the front : the lieutenant-colonel 
a like distance in front of the same file, facing to the rear, and 
is established perpendicularly to the line by the commanding 
officer, who then throws himself twenty paces further to the 
rear and establishes two markers on the prolongation of the 
line passing through the colour-bearer and the lieutenant- 
colonel : the first marker twenty-five paces in rear of the 
battalion ; the second, the same distance from the first, both 
facing to the rear. The colour-bearer takes two points on 
the ground in the direction of the lieutenant-colonel, the first 
point, twentv paces in advance. 

BATTALION-FORWARD.— At the word forward, 
the front-rank of the colour-guard advances six paces, and is 
re-placed by its rear-rank ; the two general guides also ad- 
vance abreast with the colour-bearer, opposite the right and 
left flanks of the battalion. The captains of the left wing 
shift to the left of their companies, the covering sergeant of 
the company next on the left of the colour-company, step- 
ping into the front-rank, and the closing sergeant replacing 
the covering corporal, who steps into the rank of file-closers. 
The lieutenant-colonel having assured the colour-bearer on 
the line between himself and the corporal of the colour-file, 
places himself fifteen paces on the right of the captain of the 
colour-company, to maintain this captain, and the next one 
beyond him, abreast with the three centre corporals. The 
major places himself eight paces on either flank of the colour- 
rank. 

QUICK-MARCH.— At the word march, the battalion 
steps off with life: the colour-bearer is charged with the step 
and the direction, the corporals on his right and left, and 
the general guides maintain themselves abreast with him, 
and march in the same step ; the centre corporal of the co- 
lour-guard, in the front-rank, marches in the trace of the 
colour-bearer. The captains of the colour-company, and 
the company next on the left, with the three corporals in the 
centre of the front-rank, constitute the basis of alignment for 
both wings of the battalion ; the other captains maintain 

72 



PART I. OF THE BATTALION. 73 

themselves on the prolongation of this basis. The men 
march with the head and shoulders square to the front, feel 
lightly the elbow towards the centre, and resist pressure 
from the flanks, holding themselves always slightly behind 
the line of captains. If opening or crowding of files occur, 
or any disorder ensue, the remedy will be applied as prompt- 
ly, and as gently as possible. 

Pending the march, the line, determined by the two mar- 
kers, is prolonged by placing, in proportion as the battalion 
advances, a third marker behind the first ; then the second 
marker quits his place and throws himself behind the third ; 
the first marker, in his turn, does the like in respect to the 
second, and so on in succession as long as the battalion con- 
tinues to advance, each taking care to face to the rear and to 
cover accurately. A staff-officer, or the sergeant-major, 
placed twenty paces behind the marker nearest the battalion, 
assures the markers on the direction, and cautions each when 
to shift his place. 

The major throws himself, from time to time, twenty 
paces in front of the colour-bearer, faces to the rear and 
covers the markers behind the centre, in order to rectify, if 
necessary, the direction of the colour-bearer, who, in such 
case, takes new points on the ground between himself and 
the major. 

Movement No. 9, from Line. 
To halt the battalion and to align it. 

BATTALION-HALT. COLOUR > At the word 
AND GENERAL GUIDES-POSTS. $ halt, the battal- 
ion halts. At the word posts, the colour-bearer and the 
general guides take their places in line ; the captains of the 
left wing shift to the right of their companies ; the colour- 
guard falls back into the rear- rank, and the closing sergeant 
and covering corporal return to their places. 

CAPTAINS-RECTIFY THE ALIGNMENTS.— The 
captains cast an eye towards the centre, align themselves 
under the direction of the lieutenant-colonel, and promptly 
dress their companies. 

Movement No. 10, from Line. 

To retire in line. 

FACE TO THE REAR. > At the words about- 

BATTALION, ABOUT-FACE. \ face, the battalion 
G 73 



74 PART I. OF THE BATTALION. 

faces about, the colour-bearer passes into the rear-rank now 
leading, the corpora] of his file stepping behind the corporal 
on his right, to let the colour-bearer pass, and then placing 
himself in his rear, to reform the colour-file. The com- 
manding officer places himself behind the front-rank, now 
rear, and the lieutenant-colonel and major before the rear- 
rank, now front. 

The same dispositions are then made as for the advance 
in line, except that the markers, who were then in rear, are 
now in front facing the battalion, the first twenty-five paces 
from the lieutenant-colonel. 

BATTALION-FORWARD.— The colour-bearer and the 
corporal on his right and left, advance eight paces and are 
replaced by the next rank of the guard : the general guides 
move out abreast with the colour-rank, the covering ser- 
geants place themselves in the line of file-closers, and the 
captains in the rear- rank, now front; the three file-closers 
nearest the colour, unite in rear of the colour-rank, to serve 
as a basis of alignment for the line of file-closers ; the cap- 
tains of the left wing, now right, shift to the left, now right, 
of their companies. 

QUICK-MARCH. — The battalion retires in line on the 
same principles which governed the advance in line ; the 
file-closer behind the colour-bearer, marches exactly in hi3 
trace, and the colour-bearer directs himself on the markers. 
The lieutenant-colonel, on the outside of the file-closers of 
the colour-company, maintains the three file-closers of the 
basis of alignment, in a square with the line of direction ; 
the other file-closers keep themselves aligned on this basis. 

Movement No. 11, from Line. 
To halt the battalion and face it to the front 
BATTALION-HALT. ) At the words aboft- 

FACE TO THE FRONT. } FACE,the colour-rank, 

BATTALION, ABOUT-FACE. ) general guides, cap- 
tains, and covering sergeants, retake their habitual places in 
in line ; the colour-bearer goes into the front-rank, and the 
battalion is aligned as in No. 9. 

Movement No. 12, from Line. 

Passage of obstacles. (Figs. 9, 10.) 

If the obstacle should be presented before the third com- 

74 



TART I. OF THE BATTALION. 75 

pany, while the battalion is advancing, it will be passed as 
follows : 

THIRD COMPANY, OBSTACLE.— The captain of this 
company steps out and gives the words, third company, by 
the left flank, to the rear into column-march, and hastens 
to its left. At the word march, the company faces to the 
left in marching, the two left files disengage to the rear, and 
the company, quickening the step, is conducted by the left 
guide, at the head of the front-rank, parallelly to, and in 
rear of the fourth company ; the captain of the third, halts 
opposite to the captain of the fourth, lets his company file 
past, and when its right file is up with him, faces his com- 
pany to the right, and causes it to move forward, giving the 
words, third company, by the right-flank march — guide 
right, and placing himself before its centre ; when the com- 
pany is at wheeling distance from the fourth, the captain 
gives the words, to the step, at which it takes the step of 
the battalion^ and preserves its distance, its right guide 
following in the trace of the captain of the fourth. The 
left guide of the second company places himself on the left 
of the front-rank of his company as soon as the third faces 
to the left, and maintains between himself and the right of 
the fourth company, the space necessary for the return of 
the third. 

The obstacle being passed, the company returns into line 
as follows : 

THIRD COMPANY, > The captain adds, by 

FORWARD INTO LINE. \ company, right half- 
wheel, march ; the company quickening its step, makes a 
half-wheel to the right, and when sufficiently wheeled, the 
captain gives the words forward-march — guide-left ; the 
company marches straight forward towards the line, and 
enters it by a turn to the left; as soon as it is in line, its 
captain, placing himself on its right, gives the words, to the 
step, and the company takes the step from the colour-bearer. 
Should the obstacle cover the front of several contiguous 
companies (the three right for example,) it will be passed as 
follows: 

THREE RIGHT COMPANIES, OBSTA- ) Atthe word 
CLE. BY THE LEFT FLANK, TO V march, each 
THE REAR INTO COLUMN-MARCH. ) of the desig- 
nated companies faces to the left, disengages files to the rear, 

75 



76 PART I. OF THE BATTALION. 

and executes the movement in the manner prescribed for the 
third, each forming in rear of the one which precedes it, and 
as soon as it has its wheeling distance, taking the step of the 
battalion. 

The obstacle being passed, these companies return into 
line as follows : 

THREE RIGHT COMPANIES. ) At the words, 

FORWARD INTO LINE— MARCH. \ into line, the 
captain of each of these companies adds, by company, right 
half-wheel. At the word maech, each company conforms 
itself to what has been prescribed for the third company. 

If the companies of the left wing are to pass an obstacle, 
they execute the movement according to the same principles 
and by inverse means. 

In retiring in line, these movements are executed on the 
same principles as if the battalion were advancing. 

If, when advancing in line, it become necessary to halt 
the battalion in order to retire, and there be companies in 
column in its rear, these companies face about with the bat- 
talion, precede it in march, and take their places in line by 
the oblique step, as they clear the obstacles. 

When the colour-company is to pass an obstacle, the co- 
lour-rank returns into line the moment the company faces to 
the right or left : the major places himself six paces before 
the extremity of the company behind which the colour-com- 
pany marches, in order to give the step and the direction : he 
himself, first taking the step from the battalion. 

As soon as the colour-company returns into line, the front- 
rank of the colour-guard throws itself out six paces in front 
of the battalion and takes the step from the major, who 
throws himself twenty or thirty paces in front of the colour- 
bearer, faces the battalion, and is established on the perpen- 
dicular by the commanding officer, placed behind the centre ; 
the colour-bearer then takes points on the ground between 
himself and the major. 

If the obstacle cover several companies of the centre, each 
of these companies files into column behind that, still in line, 
and of the same wing which may be nearest to it. 

Movement No. 13, from Line. 
To pass a defile in retreat. (Fig. 11, 12.) 
If a battalion, retiring in line encounter a defile, it is im- 

70 



PART I. OF THE BATTALION. 77 

mediately halted and faced to the front. If the defile be in 
rear of the left-flank, and its width sufficient to admit a co- 
lumn by platoon, a marker is placed fifteen or twenty paces 
in rear of the file-closers, at the point around which the sub- 
divisions are to change direction, in order to enter the defile. 

TO THE REAR, BY THE RIGHT ) The captain oC 

FLANK, PASS THE DEFILE. \ the right company 
adds (such) company, by the right fank, right-face — quick 
— inarch. At the word face, this company faces to the 
right ; at the word march, its leading file wheels to the 
right, marches to the rear four paces beyond the file-closers, 
wheels again to the right, and marches forward towards the 
left flank ; the remaining files of this company wheel in suc- 
cession at the same point where the first had wheeled. The 
next company from the right, executes in its turn, the same 
movement by the commands of its captain, who gives the 
word march, so that his first file, wheeling on its ground, 
may immediately follow the last file of the first company. 
The following companies, each in its turn, execute what is 
prescribed for the second. 

When the whole of the second company is on the direc- 
tion with the first, the captain of the first causes his com- 
pany to form by platoon into line, and the guide of the first 
platoon directs himself on the marker. The other companies, 
each in succession, the moment the one in its rear is wholly 
on the direction, forms by platoon into line, in the manner 
prescribed for the first. 

The first platoon of the leading company, when opposite 
the marker, turns to the left, and the following platoons ex- 
ecute the same movement, at the same point. As the last 
companies will not be able to form platoons before reaching 
the defile, they so direct themselves, in entering it, as to 
leave room to the left for this movement. 

As the platoons of each company clear the defile, compa- 
nies are successively formed. 

A defile in rear of the right flank is passed by the left 
flank, the movement being executed according to the same 
principles and by inverse means. 

If the defile be too narrow to receive the front of a pla- 
toon, it is passed by a flank. 

G2 77 



78 PART I. OF THE BATTALION. 

MOVEMENTS FROM OPEN COLUMN. 
Movement No. \,from Open Column, 

To march in column. 

COLUMN-FORWARD. \ At the words guide-left, 

GUIDE LEFT-MARCH. \ the leading guide takes two 
points on the ground in the direction to be marched. At the 
word march, the whole step off together, the leading guide 
marching on the points he has chosen, and taking new points 
as he advances ; the following guides preserve both step and 
distance, each marching in the trace of the guide who im- 
mediately precedes him. 

The lieutenant-colonel marches abreast with the leading 
guide, and assures him in the direction ; the major is abreast 
with the last subdivision, and sees that each guide marches 
in the trace of the one immediately preceding. 

With the left in front the same commands and means are 
observed, substituting the words guide-right for guide- 
left. 

A close column, or a column at half distance, may be 
put in march by the same commands and means. 

Movement No. 2, from Open Colvmn. 
To change direction in marching. (Fig. 13.) 

A marker is placed on the side of the directing guide, 
at the point at which the change is to take place, presenting 
his breast to that flank of the column ; he remains in posi 
tion till the last subdivision has passed. 

HEAD OF COLUMN, \ Each chief causes his 

TO THE LEFT (or RIGHT.) \ subdivision to change 
direction, the moment it arrives opposite the marker, in the 
, manner prescribed in the company drill. 

The major sees that the guides direct themselves on the 
marker, so as to graze his breast. 

A column at half distance changes direction by the same 
commands and means, except that in the change of direction 
to the reverse flank, the pivot of each subdivision takes steps 
of fourteen inches, instead of nine, in order to clear in time 
the wheeling point, and the marching flank describes the arc 
of a larger circle, in order to facilitate the movement. 

Movement No. 3, from Open Column. 

To halt the column. 

COLUMN-HALT.— At the word halt, the column halts 

78 



PART I. OF THE BATTALION. 79 

Movement No. l,from Open Column. 
To form to the left into line. 

The column being at a halt, the guides on the directing 
flank are directed to cover, each at a distance equal to the 
front of his company. 

LEFT-DRESS.— Each captain goes to the left of his 
company, aligns it on the left guide, and gives the word 
front. 

LEFT INTO LINE-WHEEL.— The right guide of the 
leading company throws himself on the line of the left 
guides, opposite to where the right of his company is to rest, 
faces to those guides, and is assured in position by the lieu- 
tenant-colonel. 

QUICK-MARCH. — Each company wheels to the left on 
a fixed pivot, the pivot man facing so as to present his breast 
against the arm of the left guide, who stands fast ; when the 
marching flank is within three paces of the line, each cap- 
tain gives the words, (such) company-halt; places himself 
where the right of his company is to rest, and adds right- 
dress, followed by front. 

GUIDES-POSTS.— The guides pass to their places in 
line through the nearest captain's interval. 

With the left in front, the line is formed to the right, ac- 
cording to the same principles ; the left guide of the left com- 
pany places himself on the direction of the right guide, as 
prescribed above for the right guide of the right company, 
and the captains align their companies by the left. At the 
words guides-posts, the captains, as well as the guides, take 
their places in line. 

A column at half distance may form line in the same 
manner, first taking wheeling distance. 

Movement No. 5, from Open Column. 
To form line to the right by inversion. 

BY INVERSION, ^ At the words guide- 

RIGHT INTO LINE-WHEEL. I right, the left guide 

BATTALION GUIDE RIGHT, f of the leading com- 

QUICK-MARCH. J pany places himself 

on the direction of the right guides. At the word march, 

the companies wheel to the right, and are aligned by the 

left according to the principles prescribed in the last number. 

79 



80 PART I. OF THE BATTALION. 

The lieutenant-colonel in front assures the guides on the 
direction. 

With the left in front, the column forms line to the left 
by inversion, according to the same principles. 

Movement No. 6, from Open Column. 
To form on right into line. (Fig. 14.) 

This is performed from the march. Two markers are 
established in advance by the lieutenant-colonel, at points 
where the right and, left files of the leading company will 
rest in line ; these markers are placed so as to present the 
right shoulder to the battalion when formed. 

ON RIGHT INTO LINE. BAT- > When the lead- 

TALION, GUIDE-RIGHT. \ ing company is up 

with the first marker it turns to the right, receiving from its 
captain the words right turn, march, followed by (such) 
company, halt when within three paces of the marker, the 
covering sergeant then takes his place in the rear-rank, the 
left guide retires as file-closer, and the captain, placing him- 
self at the point where the right of his company is to rest, 
gives the words right-dress, aligns his company on the 
markers and adds front. Each of the other companies 
continues to march straight forward until opposite the left 
flank of the one which precedes it, when it turns to the right 
and forms on the line in the manner prescribed for the first ; 
the left guide, the instant his company halts, places himself 
on the line opposite the left file, and covers the preceding 
guide. 

The line being formed, the commanding officer gives the 
words guides-posts, and the guides and markers retire. 

The lieutenant-colonel placing himself in rear of the guides, 
as they successively arrive on the line, assures them on the 
direction. 

With the left in front, the line is formed on the left accord- 
ing to the same principles ; the captains go to the left of their 
companies to align them, and at the words guides-posts 
take their places in line. 

A column at half distance, may form line in the same 
manner. 

Movement No. 7, from Open Column. 
To form to the front into line. (Fig. 15.) 

The column being halted, two markers are established by 

80 



PART I. OF THE KATTALION. 81 

the lieutenant-colonel at company distance in front of the 
leading company, and at points where the right and left files 
of that company are to rest ; these markers are placed so as 
to present the right shoulder to the battalion when formed. 

FORWARD INTO LINE.— The captain of the leading 
company puts his company in march, giving the words 
guide-right, halts it three paces from the markers, and aligns 
it against them by the right, the left guide taking his place 
as file-closer. 

BY COMPANY, LEFT HALF-WHEEL. ) There. 

QUICK-MARCH. FORWARD-MARCH. V maining 

GUIDE-RIGHT. ) companies 

make a half-wheel to the left, and the moment they have 
sufficiently wheeled, the words forward march, are given, 
when they move forward in echellon towards the line, dress- 
ing by the right. Each company, on approaching the line, 
turns to the right on a caution from its captain, and when 
within three paces of the line, the captain gives the words 
(such) company halt ; the left guide then throws himself on 
the line opposite to the left file, facing the preceding guide, 
and the captain, placing himself on the left of the pre- 
ceding company, gives the words right-dress, followed by 
front. 

The line being formed, the commanding officer gives the 
words guides-posts, when the guides and markers retire. 

The lieutenant-colonel conforms himself to what is pre- 
scribed in the last number. 

With the left in front, the line is formed according to the 
same principles and by inverse means. 

Movement No. 8, from Open Column. 
To form line faced to the rear. (Fig. 16.) 

The column is halted, and the markers are established as 
in the last number. 

INTO LINE, FACED TO THE REAR.— At this com- 
mand, the captain of the leading company faces his company 
to the right, puts it in march and directs the leading file to- 
wards the left marker ; the leading file passes in rear of 
this marker, three paces beyond the line, wheels to the left, 
and when opposite the right marker, the captain halts his 
company and aligns it by the right on the two markers. 

81 



82 PART I. OF THE BATTALION. 

BATTALION, RIGHT-FACE. > The remaining com- 

QUICK-MARCH. $ panies face to the right, 

and at the word march, move off, each, conducted by its 
chief, towards the point where its left is to rest ; this point 
being marked by the left guide, who precedes his company 
on the line by fifteen paces and faces towards the markers. 
Each captain directs his company in rear of his left guide, 
passes the line three paces, wheels by file to the left, and 
when the leading file arrives near the left of the preceding 
company, gives the words (such) company, halt, front-face ; 
he then places himself on the left of the preceding company, 
and adds right-dress, followed by front. 

The line being formed, the commanding officer gives the 
words guides-posts, when the guides and markers retire. 

The lieutenant-colonel conforms himself to what is pre- 
scribed in No. 6. 

With the left in front, the movement is executed accord- 
ing to the same principles and by inverse means. 

A column at half distance, may form line in the same 
manner. 

Movement No. 9, from Open Column. 
To form line by two movements. 
Should a column, arriving behind the line, and prolonging 
itself on that line, be halted before all the companies have 
entered the new direction, it will form line as follows : 

It is here supposed that the column has been halted just 
as the fifth company has entered the new direction, and that 
there are eight companies in the column ; the guides of the 
first five companies are assured on the direction. 

LEFT INTO LINE WHEEL, THREE ) At the words 
REAR COMPANIES FORWARD IN- } forward into 
TO LINE. QUICK-MARCH. ) lixe, the chief 

of each of the rear companies, gives the words by company, 
left half wheel. At the word march, the first five compa- 
nies form to the left into line, and the three last, forward into 
line, by means already prescribed : each captain of the three 
rear companies, when his company has sufficiently wheeled, 
gives the words, forward-march, guide-right. 

Movement No. 10, from Open Column. 
If, instead of arriving behind, the column arrive before 
the line, the formation will be made as follows : 

82 



PART I. OF THE BATTALION. 83 

LEFT INTO LINE WHEEL, 1 At the command, 
THREE REAR COMPANIES, I faced to the rear, 
INTO LINE FACED TO THE [ the captain of each 
REAR. QUICK-MARCH. J of the rear compa- 

nies gives the words (such) company, right-face. At the 
word march, the first five companies form to the left into 
line, and the three last, into line faced to the rear, by means 
already prescribed. 

With the left in front, these movements are executed ac- 
cording to the same principles and by inverse means. 

Movement No. 11, from Open Column. 
To form close column- 
Marching in column by company to close on leading com- 
pany. 

COLUMN, CLOSE IN MASS > At the word march, 
QUICK-MARCH. \ the captain of the lead- 

ing company halts his company and aligns it by the left, the 
file-closers closing one pace upon the rear-rank. All the 
other companies continue to march, and as each in succes- 
sion arrives at the distance of five paces from the one pre- 
ceding, its captain halts it, and its left guide places himself 
on the direction of the guides who precede ; the captain 
there aligns his company by the left, and the file-closers close 
one pace upon the rear-rank. 

The lieutenant-colonel, in front of the leading guide, as- 
sures the position of the guides as they successively place 
themselves on the direction. The major follows the move- 
ment abreast with the last guide. 

Movement No. 12, from Open Column. (Fig. 17.) 

The column by company being at a halt, to close on the 

rear company. 

ON EIGHTH COMPANY, ^j At the word 

COLUMN CLOSE IN MASS. face, all the 

BATTALION, ABOUT-FACE. j> companies, ex- 

COLUMN FORWARD, cept the desig- 

GUIDE RIGHT. QUICK-MARCH. J nated one, face 

about, their guides remaining in the front-rank, now rear. 

At the words guide-right, all the captains place themselves 

two paces outside of their companies, on the directing flank. 

83 



84 PART I. OF THE BATTALION. 

At the word march, the designated company stands fast, 
and its captain aligns it by the left. The other companies 
step off at the word march, and as each arrives at the dis- 
tance of five paces from the one before it, its captain halts 
it, and faces it to the front ; at the instant of halting, its left 
guide places himself on the direction of the guides already 
established, and the captain aligns his company by the left, 
the file-closers closing one pace upon the rear-rank. 

GUIDES, ABOUT-FACE.— The guides who are faced 
to the rear, face to the front. 

The lieutenant-colonel, in rear of the guide of the desig- 
nated company, assures the position of the guides as they 
come up ; the major is abreast of the rearmost company. 

A column by division is closed in mass by the same com- 
mands and means. 

A column by company or division, at full distance, may 
be closed to half distance, by the same means and commands, 
substituting to half distance, close column, for column 
close in mass. Each subdivision halts at platoon distance 
from the subdivision immediately preceding. 

With the left in front, these two last movements are exe- 
cuted according to the same principles. 

Movement No. 13, from Open Column. 
Countermarch. 

COUNTERMARCH. > At the word 

BATTALION, RIGHT-FACE. V face, all the 

BY FILE LEFT. QUICK-MARCH. ) companies face 

to the right, and the movement is executed in the manner 

prescribed in the company drill. 

With the left in front, the countermarch is executed by the 

same commands, substituting left for right, and right 

for left, and by inverse means, the companies facing to the 

left and wheeling by file to the right. 

A column at half distance is countermarched in the same 

manner and by the same commands. 

Column in Route. 

This column, like a column in manoeuvre, ought never to 
have a depth greater than the front it occupied in line, less 
the front of a subdivision. It is put in march, or, being in 
march, takes the route step, and passes from the route to the 

-4 



PART I. OF THE BATTALION. 85 

cadenccd step, by the command prescribed in the company 
drill. It is habitually formed by company, but it may be 
broken into platoons or sections, according to the width of 
the defile ; this may be done by all the companies at once, 
or by each in succession, before entering the defile. In like 
manner, files may be broken off, or subdivisions may be suc- 
cessively marched b> a flank in double or single file. 

Each company, as soon as the breadth of the way per- 
mits, is formed into column by section, by platoon, or by 
company, by commands of the captains. 

In marching by a flank in double or single file, where the 
pass is so narrow as to oblige it to defile with a front of two 
men, or man by man, the captain and leading guide precede 
the leading file of such company, and the file-closers pass 
between the files corresponding with their usual positions ; 
the whole follow closely and without loss of time. In pass- 
ing from double to single file, the rear-rank man of each 
file covers his front-rank man. 

If the head of the column encounter an obstacle which 
may oblige it to relax its march, all the following subdivi- 
sions preserve the habitual step, and close up in mass, if 
necessary, on the subdivision nearest to the obstacle, in order 
not to increase the usual depth of the column. Distances 
are afterwards recovered as each subdivision has successive- 
ly passed the obstacle. If this cannot be done without run- 
ning, the leading subdivision is halted beyond the obstacle, 
at a distance sufficient to contain the whole column closed 
in mass, until the rear subdivision has closed ; the column 
is then put in march, and the subdivisions take their proper 
distances. 

The commanding officer, at the head of the column, regu- 
lates the step of the leading subdivision, and indicates to its 
chief, the time for executing the various movements which 
the nature of the route may render necessary. 

MOVEMENTS FROM CLOSE COLUMN. 

Movement No. \,from Close Column. 

To form open column by the head. 

BY THE HEAD OF COLUMN, > At this command 

TAKE WHEELING DISTANCE. \ the captain of the 

leading company puts it in march. The instant the second 

H 85 



80 PART I. OF THE BATTALION. 

company has its wheeling distance from the first, its captain 
puts it in march, and so with the other companies in succes- 
sion. 

The lieutenant-colonel, at the head of the column, directs 
the march of the leading guide ; the major is abreast with 
the rearmost guide. 

Movement No. 2, from Close Column. 

To form open column on the rear. 

Two markers are established on the direction to be given 
to the line, the first opposite to the rearmost company, the 
second towards the head of the column, at company distance 
from the first, both facing to the rear; the right general 
guide places himself on the prolongation of these markers, 
a little beyond the point at which the head of the column 
will extend. 

ON EIGHTH COMPANY, ") At the words guide 

TAKE WHEELING DISTANCE. I -left, the captains 
COLUMN, FORWARD. f place themselves 

GUIDE-LEFT. QUICK-MARCH. J two paces outside 
of the directing flank. At the word march, the designated 
company stands fast ; its captain aligns it by the left on the 
first marker, and gives the word front, when the marker, 
replaced by the left guide, retires, and the captain takes his 
place in column. All the other companies step or7 at the 
word march, the guide of the leading one directing himself 
a little within the right general guide ; when the company 
next the rearmost one arrives opposite the second marker, 
its captain halts and aligns it on that marker, in the manner 
prescribed for the rearmost company. As each of the other 
companies arrives at wheeling distance from the one in its 
rear, its captain halts and aligns it on the left guide, who, at 
the instant of halting, places himself on the direction facing 
to the rear. 

The movement ended, the commanding officer gives the 
words, guides, about-face, when they face to the front. 

The lieutenant-colonel successively assures the guides on 
the direction, placing himself in their rear ; the major, at the 
head of the column, directs the march of the leading guide. 

Movement No. 3, from Close Column. 
To form open column on the head. (Fig. 18.) 
Two markers are placed in the manner just prescribed, 

86 



PART I. OP THE BATTALION. 87 

one abreast with the leading company, the other at company 
distance in rear of the first, both faced to the rear ; the left 
general guide places himself on the prolongation of the 
markers, a little beyond the point at which the rear of the 
column will extend. 

ON FIRST COMPANY, TAKE WHEEL- ") All the 
ING DISTANCE. BATTALION, ABOUT- I compa- 
FACE. COLUMN, FORWARD, GUIDE- fnies, ex- 
RIGHT. QUICK-MARCH. J cept the 

designated one, face about, the guides remaining in the front- 
rank, now rear. At the words guide-right, the captains 
throw themselves outside of their guides. At the word 
march, the designated company is aligned by the left, as in 
he last number ; the other companies are put in march, and 
as each arrives at wheeling distance from the one in its rear, 
it is halted, faced about, and aligned by the left. 

The lieutenant-colonel and major, conform themselves to 
what is prescribed in the last number. With the left in 
front, these movements are executed according to the same 
principles. To take half distance, the word half is substi- 
tuted for wheeling, in the command. A column at half 
distance takes wheeling distance in the same manner. Dis- 
I tances are taken according to the same principles, in a co- 
■i lumn by division. 

Movement No. 4, from Close Column. 
To change direction in marching. (Fig. 19.) 
.j The change is made to either flank, on the principles of 
wheeling in marching. A marker is placed at the point of 
change, and the battalion takes the guide on the flank oppo- 
site to the intended change ; as soon as the direct march is 
. j resumed, and the last subdivision is in direction, the battal- 
ion takes the guide on its proper flank, the commanding offi- 
cer giving the words, guide-left (or right.) 

BATTALION, RIGHT WHEEL-MARCH.— The lead- 
ing division wheels to the right, the pivot-flank taking steps 
of fourteen inches, and the marching flank conforming to 
the movement of the pivot, by describing the arc of a large 
circle. The other divisions at the same time, conform to the 
movement of the first ; the left guide of each advancing 
slightly the left shoulder, and lengthening a little the step 
obliques to the left, and gains so much ground to the front 

87 



88 x ART I. OF THE BATTALION. 

that there may constantly be an interval of three paces be- 
tween his division and that which precedes it ; as soon as he 
covers the preceding guide, he ceases to oblique, and marches 
exactly in his trace. Each division conforms itself to the 
movement of its guide. 

The lieutenant-colonel regulates the march of the leading 
guide, and the major, in rear, regulates the march of the fol- 
lowing guides. 

FORWARD-MARCH.— The leading division resumes 
the direct march ; the others conform to its movement. 

Movement No. 5, from Close Column. 

To change direction from a halt. (Fig. 20.) 

This is executed by the flank of subdivisions. Two mark- 
ers are placed on the new direction, at points where the right 
and left flanks of the leading subdivisions are to rest. 
CHANGE DIRECTION BY THE ) At the word 
RIGHT FLANK. BATTALION, V face, the column 
RIGHT-FACE. QUICK-MARCH. ) faces to the right 
and each chief of the subdivision places himself by the side 
of his leading guide. At the word march, all the subdivi- 
sions step off together ; the leading guide of the first, directs 
himself from the first step, parallelly to the markers ; its 
chief stands fast, lets his subdivision file past him, and as 
soon as the last file has passed, halts it, faces it to the front, 
and aligns it by the left on the two markers. Each of the 
following subdivisions, enters the column parallelly to, and 
three paces from, the subdivision which precedes it ; the 
chief, on arriving at the point where the left of his subdivi- 
sion is to rest, halts, lets it file past him, and when the last 
file has passed, halts it, faces it to the front, (the left guide 
placing himself on the direction,) and aligns it by the left. 

In changing direction by the left flank, the same means 
are observed, substituting in the commands the word left 
for right. Each chief conducts his subdivision until the 
leading file arrives at the point where it is to rest, when the 
subdivision is halted and aligned as already prescribed. 

The lieutenant-colonel in front, assures the guides as they 
successively arrive on the direction ; the major follows 
abreast with the last subdivision. 

88 



PART I. OP THE BATTALION. 89 

Movement No. 6, from Close Column, 
Countermarch. (Fig. 21.) 
COUNTERMARCH. BATTALION, > At the word 



RIGHT AND LEFT-FACE. $ face, the odd 

divisions, counting from the head of the column, face to the 
right, the even divisions, to the left; the right and left guides 
of all divisions face about : each chief goes to the head of 
his division, breaks two files to the rear, and places himself 
by the side of his leading front-rank man. 

BY FILE LEFT AND > At the word march, each 

RIGHT. QUICK-MARCH. \ division conducted by 
its chief, steps off, the guides standing fast ; each odd divi- 
sion wheels by file to the left around its right guide ; each 
even division wheels by file to the right around its left guide, 
each division so directing its march as to arrive behind its 
opposite guide, and when its head is up with this guide, the 
chief halts the division, faces it to the front, and aligns it by 
the right, the chiefs of the even divisions shifting to the right 
for that purpose. As each division is aligned, its chief gives 
the word front, and the guides shift to their proper flanks. 

A column left in front, is countermarched by the same 
commands and means, except that the divisions are aligned 
by the left. 

The movement ended, the lieutenant-colonel places him- 
self abreast with the leading ; and the major abreast with 
the rearmost division. 

A close column by company is countermarched by the 
same means and commands. 

Movement No. 7, from Close Column. 

To form divisions from close column of companies. (Fig. 22.) 

FORM DIVISIONS. LEFT > The left companies 
COMPANIES, LEFT-FACE. $ face to the left, and their 
captains place themselves by the side of their left guides. The 
right companies stand fast, the right and left guides of each 
place themselves before the right and left files of their re- 
spective companies, the guides facing so as to rest the right 
arm against the breast of the front-rank man of the file. 

QUICK-MARCH.— The left companies only are put in 
mareh, their captains standing fast ; each captain as the left 
H2 89 



90 PART I. OF THE BATTALION. 

file of his company has cleared the right company, gives the 
words : (such) company halt, front-face, and places himself 
on the left of the right company of his division ; the left 
guide at the same time places himself before the left file of 
his company, faces to the right and covers the guides of the 
right company ; the captain then gives the words, right- 
dress, and aligns his company on the left guide, which being 
done, he adds front, and remains in his position. 

GUIDES-POSTS.— The captains and guides take their 
places in column, the left guide of each right company pass- 
ing through the interval in the centre of the division. 

A column at full or half distance, forms division in the 
same manner ; but the captains of the left companies, after 
commanding frojit-f ace, give the words: company, forward, 
guide -right-march, followed by halt, right-dress. 

If the left be in front, these movements are executed by 
inverse means ; the right companies conform themselves to 
what is prescribed above for the left companies, and the 
guides in front of the left companies face to the left. 

Movement No. 8, from Close Column. 
To deploy on the first division. (Fig. 23.) 

The column being at a halt, the lieutenant-colonel estab- 
lishes three markers, three paces in front of the leading divi- 
sion, one opposite the right and left files of that division, and 
one opposite the left file of the right company : these mark- 
ers face to the right; the left general guide covers these 
markers, at a point a little beyond where the left of the bat- 
talion is to rest. 

ON FIRST DIVISION ) At the word face, 

DEPLOY COLUMN. V the three last divisions 

BATTALION, LEFT-FACE. ) face to the left, and the 
chief of each places himself by the side of its left guide. 

QUICK-MARCH.— At the word march, the chief of the 
first division goes to its right and gives the words right- 
dress ; the division is aligned on the markers, each captain 
aligning the company on his left and giving the word front. 
The other divisions march parallelly to the line ; the chief 
of the second stands fast, sees his division file past him, and 
the instant its right guide is abreast with him, halts his divi- 
sion and faces it to the front, giving the words second divi- 
sion halt, front-face : the left guides of both companies then 

90 



PART I. OF THE BATTALION. 91 

step out and cover the markers, each opposite to the left file 
of his company, and the chief placing himself on the left of 
the first division, gives the words right— dress, when the divi- 
sion is aligned in the manner indicated for the first. The 
instant the second division is halted, the chief of the third 
halts in his own person, sees his division file past him, and 
when its right guide is abreast with him, halts his division 
and faces it to the front in the manner indicated for the second, 
he then gives the words forward, guide— right, march, fol- 
lowed by halt when his division is within three paces of the 
line: the division is then aligned in the manner indicated for 
the second. The chief of the fourth division conforms him- 
self to what is prescribed for the third. 

The movement ended, the commanding officer gives the 
words guides-posts, when the captains and guides take 
their places in line and the markers retire. 

The lieutenant-colonel conforms himself to what is prescrib- 
ed No. 13, in movements from open column. The major 
follows abreast with the last division. 

Movement No. 9, from Close Column. 

To deploy on the fourth division, (fra 24.) 

The markers are established as indicated in the last num- 
ber, facing to the left, the central marker opposite the right 
file of the left company, and the right general guide covers 
them at a point a little beyond where the right of the batta- 
lion is to rest. 

ON FOURTH DIVISION ") At the word face, the 
DEPLOY COLUMN. BAT- I first three divisions face 
TALION, RIGHT-FACE. f to the right and the chief 
QUICK-MARCH. J of each places himsel f by 

the side of his right guide. At the word march, these divi- 
sions step off, the guide of the first directing himself, three 
paces within the line marked by the general guide. The 
chief of the third stands fast, sees his division file past him, 
halts it when its left guide is abreast with him, and faces it to 
the front. The chief of the fourth, the moment his division 
is unmasked, causes it to advance, giving the words fourth 
division, forward, guide-left, march ; when this division is 
three paces from the marker, its chief halts it and gives the 
words left-dress ; each captain aligns the company on his 
right and gives the word front. The instant the third divi- 



92 PART I. OF THE BATTALION. 

sion is unmasked, its chief causes it to approach the line, and 
halts it in the manner prescribed for the fourth : the moment 
it halts, its right guide, and the covering sergeant of its left 
company, place themselves on the line opposite the right files 
of their respective companies, and cover the markers ; the 
division is then aligned in the manner prescribed for the 
fourth. The second and first divisions are in succession 
halted and aligned by the left in the same manner as the 
third, their chiefs giving the words left— dress the moment 
their divisions face to the front and the guides are on the 
line. 

The movement ended, the commanding officer gives the 
words guides-posts, when the captains and guides take 
their places in line and the markers retire. 

The lieutenant-colonel conforms himself to what is pre- 
scribed in the last number. The major follows abreast with 
the last division. 

If the left be in front these deployments are made accord- 
ing to the same principles, and by inverse means. 

Movement No. 10, from Close Column* 
To deploy on an intermediate division. 
The line is first traced by the means already indicated, 
both the general guides throwing themselves out in the man- 
ner above prescribed. 

ON— DIVISION, DEPLOY COLUMN. ) Whether the 
BATTALION, OUTWARD-FACE. \ right or left be 
QUICK-MARCH. ) in front, the 

divisions, which, in line, belong to the right of the directing 
division, face to the right, those which belong to the left of 
that division, face to the left; the divisions in front of the 
directing division, deploy by the means indicated in No. 9 ; 
those in its rear, deploy as prescribed No. 8. The directing 
division, the moment it is unmasked, approaches the line, 
taking the guide left or right, according as the right or left 
is in front. The chief of this division aligns it by the di- 
recting flank, and then steps into the rear-rank, to give place 
to the chief of the next division for aligning his division. At 
the words guides-posts, all the captains take the right of 
their companies. 

The lieutenant-colonel assures the positions of the guides 

92 



PART I. OF THE BATTALION. 93 

on the right of the directing division ; the major, those on 
the left. 

A column at half distance, may ploy into line by one of" 
the means here prescribed, the column first closing in mass. 

A column by company may be ployed in the same man- 
ner as a column by division. 

MOVEMENTS FROM COLUMN DOUBLED ON THE 
CENTRE. 

Movement No. 1. 
To form line to the front. (Fig. 25.) 
The line is first traced in the manner prescribed in the 
last number. 

DEPLOY COLUMN. BAT- ) The column is de- 
TALION, OUTWARD-FACE. V ployed on the two com- 
QUICK-MARCH. > panies at its head, ac- 

cording to the principles prescribed for deployment of close 
columns. The captains of these companies, each, at the 
word march, places himself on the right of his own com- 
pany and aligns it by the right ; the captain of the fourth 
stepping into the rear-rank the moment he aligns his com- 
pany, to give place to the captain of the third to align his 
company by the left. 

The deployment ended, the command is given guides- 
tosts. 

Movement No. 2, 
To form line to the right (Fig. 26.) 

RIGHT INTO LINE WHEEL, LEFT COM- ) At the 
PANIES ON RIGHT INTO LINE. BATTA- V words 
LION, GUIDE-RIGHT. QUICK-MARCH. ) guide- 
right, the left guide of the fourth company, places himself 
on the line at the point where the left of his company will 
rest, and covers the right guides. At the word march, the 
right companies wheel to the right into line, and the left 
companies move forward and form on right into line, in the 
manner prescribed in No. 5, from open column. 

The column may form line to the left according to the 
same principles. 

Dispositions against Cavalry. 

The battalion is first formed into column by division, at 

93 



94 PART I. OF THE BATTALION. 

half (or company) distance ; or into column, doubled on the 
centre, at half distance. (Fig. 27.) 

The commands for forming into column with a view to 
the square, are always preceded by the caution, to form 

SQUARE. 

The moment the column is formed, the file-closers of the 
fourth division, passing by the outer flanks of their compa- 
nies, throw themselves two paces before the front-rank op- 
posite to their respective places in line, and face towards the 
head of the column. The music, formed in one rank, place 
themselves at platoon distance, behind the inner platoons ot 
the second division, and the pioneers behind the colour-guard. 
The lieutenant-colonel and major are abreast with the lead- 
ing division, the former on the left, and the latter on the right 
flank of the column. 

The column may now be put in march, or it may form 
square, as follows : (Fig. 28.) 

FORM SQUARE.— The lieutenant-colonel, facing to the 
left guides, and the major, facing to the right guides, align 
them from the front, on the respective guides of the fourth 
division, who stand fast, holding up their pieces inverted, 
perpendicularly ; the right guides, in placing themselves on 
the direction, take their exact distances. 

RIGHT AND LEFT INTO LINE WHEEL — The 
chief of the first division cautions it to stand fast ; all the 
captains of the second and third divisions throw themselves 
before the centres of their respective companies, and caution 
them that they are to wheel, the right companies to the right, 
and the left companies to the left, into line. The colour- 
bearer steps back into the line of file-closers, opposite to his 
place in line, and is replaced by the corporal of his file. 
The chief of the fourth division gives the words, fovrtk di- 
vision, forward, guide left, and places himself two paces 
outside of its left flank. 

QUICK-MARCH.— The first division stands fast, but its 
right file faces to the right, and its left file to the left. The 
companies of the second and third divisions wheel to the 
right and left into line, and the music advances a space equal 
to the front of a company. The fourth division closes up 
to form the square, and when closed, its chief halts it, faces 
it about, and aligns it by the rear-rank ; the junior captain 
passes into the rear-rank, now front, and is covered by the 

94' 



PART I. OF THE BATTALION. 95 

covering sergeant of the left company, in the front-rank, now 
rear ; the file-closers close up a pace on the front-rank, and 
the outer file of each flank of the division face outwards. 

GUIDES-POSTS.— The chiefs of the first and fourth 
divisions, as well as the guides, enter the square. The cap- 
tains whose companies have formed to the right into line, 
remain on the left of their companies, covered by their left 
guides in the rear-rank ; the covering sergeant of each of 
these companies places himself as a file-closer behind the 
right file of his company. The field *and staff enter the 
square, the lieutenant-colonel placing himself behind the left, 
and the major behind the right of the first division. 

If the battalion present ten instead of eight companies, the 
fourth division makes the same movements prescribed above 
for the second and third divisions, and the fifth, the move- 
ments prescribed for the fourth. 

The fronts of the square are designated as follows : the 
first division is always the first front ; the last division the 
fourth front ; the right companies of the other divisions, the 
second front ; and the left companies of the same divisions 
the third front. These designations are always maintained, 
whether the column shall have been with the left or right in 
front. Each front is commanded by the lieutenant-colonel, 
the major, or its senior captain. The commander of each 
front places himself four paces in its rear, and if a captain, 
he is replaced momentarily in command of his company, by 
the next in rank therein. 

In a simple column, left in front, the square is formed ac- 
cording to the same principles and by inverse means. 

If the square is to advance, the movement is performed as 
follows : (Figs. 29, 30.) 

FORM COLUMN.— The commander of the first front 
adds, first division, forward, guide left ; the commander of 
the fourth front cautions it to stand fast ; the commander of 
the second front causes it to face to the left, and then gives 
the words, by company, by file left ; the commander of the 
third front causes it to face to the right, and then gives the 
words, by company, by file right. At the moment the se- 
cond and third fronts face to the left and right, each captain 
in them causes the two headmost files of his company to 
break to the rear. 

QUICK-MARCH.— The first front marches forward; its 

95 



96 PART I. OF THE BATTALION. 

chief halts it when it shall have advanced a space equal to 
half its front, and aligns it by the left. The corresponding 
companies of the second and third fronts wheel by file to 
the left and right, and march to meet each other behind the 
centre of the first division, and the moment they unite, the 
chief of each division halts it, faces it to the front, and 
aligns it by the left. The commander of the fourth front 
causes it to face about ; its file-closers remaining before the 
front-rank. 

The column may now be put in march. 

If the square is to be reformed, the column is first halted, 
and the square is reformed in the manner already prescribed. 

If the square is to march in retreat, the column is formed 
as above, and as soon as formed the command is given : 
(Fig. 31.) 

TO MARCH IN RETREAT. > At the words face 

FACE BY THE REAR-RANK. ] by the rear-kaxk, 
the file-closers of the interior divisions throw themselves, 
passing by the outer flanks of their respective companies, 
behind the front-rank opposite to their places, in line ; the 
file-closers of the other divisions stand fast. 

BATTALION, ABOUT-FACE.— The battalion faces 
about; each chief of division throws himself before its rear- 
rank, become front, passing through the interval between 
its two companies ; the guides step into the rear-rank, now 
front. 

The column may now be put in march ; or it may form 
square, as if it were faced by the front-rank, its fronts pre- 
serving the same designations as when faced by the front- 
rank. (Fig. 32.) 

The battalion being in square by the rear-rank, may march 
in retreat, or in advance, by reforming column according to 
the principles already prescribed, the fourth, instead of the 
first front marching forward. If the column, thus reformed, 
is to continue the march in retreat, it remains faced by the 
rear-rank ; but if it is to advance, it faces to the front by the 
commands, to march in advance, face by the froist- 

RANK. BATTALION, ABOUT-FACE. 

To reduce the square. 
REDUCE SQUARE. > This is executed in the manner 
QUICK-MARCH. $ prescribed for forming column 
from square ; but the file-closers of the fourth front throw 

9fi 



PART I. OF THE BATTALION. 97 

themselves behind the rear-rank the moment it faces about, 
and the field and staff, the colour-bearer, pioneers, and mu- 
sic, return to their places in column. 

A column by company may also form square in the man- 
ner prescribed for a column by division. The leading and 
rearmost companies conform themselves to what is prescribed 
for divisions in those positions. The other companies form 
by platoons to the right and left into line ; each chief of pla- 
toon, after halting it, places himself on the line, as if the 
platoon were a company, and is covered by the guide in the 
rear-rank. 

A battalion in column at full distance, having to form 
square, always closes on the leading subdivision ; and a 
column closed in mass, always for the same purpose, takes 
distances by the head. 

When a battalion is ployed, with a view to the square, it 
should always be in the rear of the right or left division, in 
order that it may be able to commence firing pending the 
execution of the movement. The double column affords this 
advantage, and being more promptly formed than any other, 
is to be preferred. 

In firing in square, the colour-guard will fire like the men 
of the company of which it forms a part. 

Rules for manoeuvring by the rear-rank. 

The battalion being by the front-rank, to cause it to ma- 
noeuvre by the rear-rank, the command is given, face by 

THE REAR-RANK BATTALION. ABOUT-FACE. 

If the battalion be deployed, this movement is executed as 
prescribed for the fire by the rear-rank. 

If the battalion be in column by company, or by platoon, 
right, or left in front, the chiefs of subdivision, in taking 
their new places in column, each passes by the left flank of 
his subdivision, and the file-closers by the right flank ; the 
guides place themselves in the rear-rank. 

If the column be formed by division, the chiefs of division, 
each passes by the interval in the centre of his division, and 
the file-closers by the outer flanks of their respective compa- 
nies ; the junior captain in each division steps into the rear- 
rank, and is covered in the front-rank by the covering ser- 
geant of the left company. 

I 97 



98 PART I. OF THE BATTALION. 

The lieutenant-colonel is abreast with the leading subdi 
vision, and the major abreast with the rearmost one. 

The battalion being faced by the rear- rank, the companies, 
divisions, and wings, preserve their prior denominations re- 
spectively. 

The manoeuvres by the rear-rank are executed by the 
same commands and on the same principles as if the battalion 
faced by the front-rank ; but in such manner that when the 
battalion shall be brought to its proper front, all the subdivi- 
sions may find themselves in their regular order from right 
to left. 

According to this principle, when a column, formed by 
the rear-rank, is deployed, the subdivisions which, in line 
by the front-rank, ought to find themselves on the right of 
the subdivision on which the deployment is made, face to the 
left; and those which ought to be placed on its left, face to 
the right. 

When a battalion in line, faced by the rear-rank, is to be 
ployed into column, the words left, or right in front, are 
announced in the commands, according as it may be intend- 
ed, that the first or last subdivision shall be at the head of 
the column, because the first subdivision is on the left, and 
the last on the right of the battalion faced by the rear-rank. 
The column by the rear-rank takes the guide to the right, if 
the first division be in front, and to the left in the reverse 
case. 

A column, faced by the rear-rank, is brought to its proper 
front by the commands, face by the front-rank. Bat- 
talion, about-face, which are executed in the manner 
prescribed for facing by the rear-rank. If the column be 
formed by company or by platoon, the chiefs of subdivision, 
in order to take their new places in column, pass by the left 
of subdivisions, now right, and the file-closers by the right, 
now left. 

98 



PART I. OF THE BATTALION. 



n 



&~* 



~ *> 



— <--- 

n * 



■s 



— 1-- 
I! 






a] 



A Colonel, 
a Lieut. Colonel. 
a Major. 
b Qr. Master, 
c Adjutant. 
<£ SergL Major. 
x Field Music. 
,k / Band. 
«|? Colour and guard 

^ Pioneers. 
^ Right genl. guide. 
<?£) Left genl. guide. 



99 



/' 



PART I. OF THE BATTALION. 
Fig. 2. 



YYY\ 



/-" 



,,'-" 


s '- 


''* — T 


[ 


/ 


/ 
/ 


1 


' 


1 



Fig. 3. 



f 



Fig. 4. 




Fig. 5. 



^«* — _. 






\ 



Fig. 6. 



J* *==» 



/ / 



r 



\ 



100 



PART I. OF THE BATTALION. 

Fig. 7. 



\ 





h\ 



Fig. 8. 



12 



101 



PART I. OF THE BATTALION. 

Fig. 10. 




Fig. 11. 



I I 1 Kk 



i! I • 



TT—ft 




102 



TATIT I. OF TTIfi BATTALION. 
Fig. 13. 



\y 



I JLI 



E-J JL 



/ 



i 



\ 



Fig. 14. 



/KWW 



\ \ 



\ 



Fro. 15. \ N * 



\ \ \ \ \J\ 



• U \- 



103 



Z 



PART I. OF THE BATTALION. 



i i 

I 3' 

f. > 



/ / 



Fig. 16. 



Fia. 17. 



I v 



Fig. 18. 



104 



PART I. OF THE BATTALION- 



Fig. 19. 




Fig. 20. 




m 



lis 



Fig. 21. 






Fig. 22. 



Fig. 23. 



• <-<.«- 



105 



PART I. OF THE BATTALION. 
Fig. 24. 






Fig. 25. 



Fig. 56. 



-.. 


N 









-- 






jf 









Fig. 27 





"""'"' 


E3 


C ^ D3 ° """ 


■ran 

ODD 


eon cos rig 

oca z ■ a t - - 


Fig. 29 



r 



r i 



" — < 



Fig. 29. 



t 






j 




Fig. 


30. 




ono 


ooa 


















DCD 


ana 

n 


in 


sea 



106 



TART I. OF THE BATTALION. 



Fig. 31. 



















too a 


a a 




□ a 


a i 


a 


a 


a=. caa 




an 


o n 


D 


. 




V 








f 






a n 


J~Z 




"?o 


a a 




B 


















c a o a 


on 




CO 


= D 


a 


a 






31 











Fig. 32. 



1 

1 




sir w jH~ L i 
: A : 


> 


8 A s 


> 



107 



LIGHT INFANTRY AND RIFLE. 

A SUPPLEMENT TO PART I. 



OF THE COMPANY. 



Deployments. 

A company may be deployed as skirmishers, either for- 
ward, or by the flank. It is deployed forward, when it is 
behind the line on which it is to be established ; and by the 
flank when already on that line. In both cases it is divided 
into three platoons ; the right and left platoons, denominated 
respectively, first and second platoons, form the line of 
skirmishers ; the centre platoon, the reserve. 

A company may be deployed, as skirmishers, on its left, 
on its right, or on its centre file. 

A line of skirmishers ought, as far as possible, to be align- 
ed ; but to obtain this regularity, advantages which the ground 
may present for covering the men, ought not to be neglected. 

The intervals between files of skirmishers depend on the 
extent of ground to be covered ; but they should not exceed 
ten, or, at most, fifteen paces. 

The front to be occupied to cover a battalion, comprehends 
the front of the battalion and half of each interval on the 
right and left of the battalion. 

1st. To deploy forward. (Fig. 1.) 

The company being at a halt, to deploy it forward on the 
left file, the captain, previously to givmg the order, indicates 
to the left guide the point towards which he is to direct him- 
self, and cautions the centre platoon that is to form the re- 
serve. 

Deploy as skirmishers. — The first and second lieutenants 
throw themselves respectively on the right and left flanks of 
the company ; the third sergeant places himself two paces 
in front of the centre of the company, to move forward on 
a line with the skirmishers between the platoons ; the third 

K 109 



110 LIGHT INFANTRY. 

lieutenant takes command of the centre platoon, two paces 
behind the centre of the file-closers, and cautions it to stand 
fast. 

On the left file, at ten paces, take intervals. Quick (or 
double quick) march. — At the word march, the first and se- 
cond platoons put themselves in movement j_ the left guide 
conducts the left file towards the indicated point ; the other 
files, throwing forward the left shoulder, advance in double 
quick time, or in a run, (according as the order is, quick or 
double quick,) diagonally to the front and to the right, in 
order to gain to the right the space of ten paces, which ought 
to separate each file from that next on its left ; when the se- 
cond file, counting from the left, arrives abreast with the 
first, it conforms itself to the direction of the latter, takes 
the quick step, holds itself steadily at ten paces from the 
first, and on the same alignment ; the third file, and all the 
others towards the right, as they successively arrive on the 
alignment, conform themselves to what is prescribed for the 
second ; the right guide arrives with the last file ; the first 
and second lieutenants, at the commencement, throw them- 
selves behind the centres of the right and left platoons re- 
spectively, and direct their movements. 

When the left guide arrives at the point where the left of 
the line is to rest, the captain halts the skirmishers ; each 
centre-rank man immediately places himself two paces on 
the left of his file-leader ; the files which are not yet in line 
promptly come into it, taking the prescribed intervals, and 
aligning themselves by the left. 

The line being formed, the first and second sergeants throw 
themselves behind the first two files at the right and left re- 
spectively, and the third sergeant at a like distance behind 
the centre of the line. 

The first and second lieutenants promptly rectify any ir- 
regularity committed in the taking of intervals ; they then 
throw themselves twenty or thirty paces behind the centres 
of their respective platoons. Each of these officers has with 
him two men taken from his platoon before the commence- 
ment of the movement. 

The fourth and fifth sergeants, and the second bugler or 
drummer, remain with the reserve ; the fourth sergeant on 
its left flank, the fifth as file-closer. 

At the beginning of the deployment, the third lieutenant 

110 



OP THE COMPANY. Ill 

marches the reserve, by the shortest line, to about a hundred 
and forty paces behind the centre of the line of skirmishers, 
halts, faces it to the front, and maintains it steadily at that 
distance; the reserve conforms itself to all the movements 
of the line. 

The captain gives a general superintendence to the whole 
deployment, and then throws himself about seventy paces in 
rear of the line, taking with him the first bugler or drummer, 
and two or three men from the reserve. 

The deployment may be made on the right or centre of 
the company according to the same principles and by the 
same commands, substituting right-file or centre-file, for 
left-file : if on the centre file, the right file of the second 
platoon closes upon the third sergeant in marching, and all 
the other files to the right and left, take their intervals from 
the centre. 

On whatever file, the right, left, or centre, the deploy- 
ment may be made, the rear-rank men place themselves to 
the left of their respective file-leaders at the moment of form- 
ing the line. 

2d. To deploy by the flank. 

To deploy the company from a halt, on the left file, the 
captain, previously to giving the caution, indicates to the 
right guide the point on which to direct himself. 

Deploy as Skirmishers. — The first and second lieuten- 
ants and the third sergeant conform themselves to what 
is prescribed under this command in the preceding case ; 
the third lieutenant in rear of the centre platoon, cautions it 
to face about. 

By the right flank, at ten paces, > The centre platoon 
take intervals. ) faces about, and its 

chief marches it to the point which it is to occupy as the re- 
serve, halts and faces it to the skirmishers ; the other pla- 
toons face to the right, the left file of the second standing 
fast ; the first and second lieutenants, each places himself by 
the left file of his platoon ; the right guide on the left of the 
right file to conduct it. 

Quick (or Double-Quick)-March. — At the word march, 
given the instant the centre platoon has cleared the line, 
the first, platoon stands fast until joined by the second, 
when the lieutenant of the former gives the words, (such) 

111 



112 LIGHT INFANTRY. 

platoon, forward, quick (or double-quick) march ; in the 
mean time the second platoon commences the movement ; 
its left file stands fast ; the next file halts at the distance of 
ten paces from the first, the third at the same distance from 
the second, and so on to the right file of the first platoon. 
As each file halts in succession it faces to the enemy, and 
each rear-rank man places himself two paces on the left of 
his file-leader. 

The captain and first and second lieutenants conform 
themselves to what is prescribed in the first case. 

The deployment on the right file is executed on the same 
principles, substituting in the command, left for right. 

(Fig. 2.) To deploy on the centre, the captain, previously 
to giving the caution, causes the centre platoon to march to- 
wards its position as the reserve, closes the intervals between 
the remaining platoons, and indicates to the two guides the 
direction in which each ought to march. 

Deploy as Skirmishers, by the right and } The right 
left Flanks, on the Centre, take In- > file of the 
tervals. y second pla- 

toon stands fast; the first platoon faces to the right, the se- 
cond to the left ; the right and left guides place themselves 
by the side of the leading files of their respective platoons to 
conduct them. 

Quick (or Double-Quick)-March. — The two platoons 
march in opposite directions ; the file next on the right, and 
the file next on the left of the centre file, each halts at ten 
paces from this file, and all the other files halt each at the 
same distance from the file next in its rear. 

The officers conform themselves to what is prescribed in 
the first case. 

Any interior file, other than that on the right of the second 
platoon, may be designated as the directing file ; in which 
case the third sergeant places himself on the right of the 
designated file, and the deployment is executed in the man- 
ner just prescribed. 

3d. To extend intervals. 

The line of skirmishers being at a halt, intervals are ex- 
tended to the left as follows : (Fig. 3.) 

112 



OF THE COMPANY. 113 



By the left flank, five (or ) paces,} The num- 

Extend internals. Quick (or Double- > ber of paces 
quick)-March. } designated, 

will be understood as so many paces in addition to the then 
intervals. The right file stands fast, the others face to the 
left, and extend in the manner prescribed in the second case. 
The line being in march to the front, will be extended by 
the right as follows : 

On the left Jile five (or ) paces, ex- } The left 

tend intervals* Quick (or Double- > file con- 
quick)— March. ) tinues to 

march on the point of direction, all the others extend inter- 
vals in the manner prescribed in the first case. 

Intervals may be extended by the right flank, by the right 
and left flanks at once, and also on the right file according 
to the principles just given. 

(Fig. 3.) If, in extending intervals, the object be to make 
one company occupy a line as skirmishers, which had been 
occupied by two, the files of the retiring company throw 
themselves successively to the rear, and form company in 
close order, in proportion as they are replaced on the line. 

4th. To close intervals. 

The line of skirmishers being at a halt, will close on the 
left as follows : (Figs. 4 & 5.) 

By the left flank, five (or ) paces, } The left 

Close intervals. Quick (or Double- > file stands 
quick)-March. } fast ; the 

others face to the left, close on that file the number of paces 
prescribed, and face to the right as each halts. 

The number of paces named in the command, denote the 
number of paces less than the then intervals. 

The line being in march to the front, will close on the left 
file as follows : 

On the left file, five (or ) paces, Close } The left 

intervals. Quick (or Double-quick)- > file con- 
March. y tinues to 

march on the point of direction ; the other files, each throws 
forward the right shoulder, assumes the double-quick step or 
run, according as the command is quick or double-quick 
and inclines to the left until its interval is reduced the pre- 
scribed number of paces. 

K2 113 



114 LIGIIT INFANTRY. 

Intervals are closed by the right flank, and on the right 

or centre file, according to the principles just given. 

(Figs. 4 & 5.) When intervals are reduced in order to 
receive a reinforcement of skirmishers, that is, for example, 
to cover the same extent of ground with two companies 
which had been covered by one, the new company is so de- 
ployed as to finish the movement at about twenty paces be- 
hind the line which it will have to occupy, and its files suc- 
cessively throw themselves on that line in proportion as they 
are unmasked by the files of the old company. The re- 
serves of the two companies unite behind the centre of the 
line. 

5th. To relieve a company deployed as skirmishers. 

(Figs. 6 & 7.) When a company so deployed, is to be 
relieved, the captain is advised of the intention, and commu- 
nicates it to the first and second lieutenants. 

The new company executes its deployment forward so 
as to finish the movement at about twenty paces in rear of 
the line. Arrived at this distance, the files of the new com- 
pany by command of their captain, throw themselves a few 
paces beyond the old line and halt ; the new line being es- 
tablished, the old company assembles on its reserve. 

If the skirmishers to be relieved are marching in retreat, 
the company thrown out to relieve them, deploys by the 
flank, as prescribed in the second case. The old skirmishers 
continue to retire with order, and after having passed the 
new line, they rally on their reserve. 

To march in advance. 

When a company, deployed as skirmishers, marches in 
line, the guide is habitually in the centre ; if it be intended 
that the directing guide shall be on the flank, the words guide- 
left (or right) will precede the word march. 

Whether the skirmishers march in line, or by a flank, the 
first and second lieutenants, and in case of need, the sergeants 
repeat, with the greatest rapidity, all the commands for the 
movement. 

Skirmishers forward. — The three sergeants throw them- 
selves on the line, the first on the right, the second on the 
left, and the third in the centre : the chief of the reserve gives 
the words, platoon forward, guide left. 

114 



OP THE COMPANY. 115 

Quick (or double-quiclc) march. — At the word march, 
the line and the reserve step off; the guide charged with the 
direction, marches on the point indicated to him : the skir- 
mishers hold themselves aligned on this guide, and preserve 
their intervals towards him. The first and second lieuten- 
ants, each directs the movements of his platoon, holding him- 
self behind its centre. 

To halt the skirmishers advancing. 

Skirmishers-Halt. — At the word halt, the line and the 
reserve halt ; the first and second lieutenants, if necessary, 
promptly rectify the alignment and intervals, and then take 
their places, as also the three sergeants. 

To march in retreat. 

Skirmishers in retreat. — The reserve and skirmishers 
face about ; the skirmishers individually, the reserve by com- 
mand of its chief, and the three sergeants throw themselves 
on the line as prescribed in the advance in line. 

Quick (or double-quick) March. — At the word march, 
the skirmishers and the reserve step off in conformity with 
what is prescribed in the advance in line. The chief of the 
reserve in front of the rear-rank, now front, maintains his 
platoon opposite the centre of the line at the prescribed dis- 
tance. 

To halt the skirmishers retreating. 

Skirmishers-Halt. — At the word halt, the skirmishers 
and the reserve halt and face to the front, the skirmishers 
individually, the reserve by command of its chief. The first 
and second lieutenants rectify the alignment and intervals, 
and then resume their places, as also the three sergeants. 

To inarch by a flank. 

Skirmishers, by the right flunk. — The skirmishers face to 
the right ; the right guide throws himself to the side of the 
leading man, to conduct him ; the reserve also faces to the 
right by command of its chief. 

Quick (or double quick) march. — At the word march, the 
skirmishers and the reserve put themselves in march ; the 
right-guide directs himself on the point indicated to him ; 
each skirmisher follows in trace of the one immediately pre- 
ceding, and preserves his distance. 

115 



116 LtGHT INFANTRY. 

The march by the left flank is executed according to the 
same principles, substituting in the commands left for right. 

To halt the skirmishers marching by a flank. 

Skirmishers-Halt. — At the word halt, the skirmishers 
and the reserve halt and face to the front. 

The Firings. 

The fire is given either at a halt, or in marching, and al- 
ternately by the two men of the same file, who so arrange 
it between them, that one or the other always has his piece 
loaded ; to this end the right hand (front-rank) man fires 
and loads ; the left hand (rear-rank) man withholds his fire 
until the first shall have rammed; the second, in his turn, 
waits, in like manner, for the first, and so on in continuation. 

Tojire at a halt. 

Commence Firing. — This command is executed accord- 
ing to the rules just prescribed ; the men are not to remain 
in the same place whilst reloading, unless covered by some 
chance object. 

To fire marching 

This fire, like that at a halt, is executed by the command, 
commence firing. 

At this command, if the line be advancing, the front-rank 
man of every file halts, fires, and reloads, before throwing 
himself forward ; the rear-rank man of the same file con- 
tinues to march eight or ten paces beyond the first, halts, 
fires, and reloads ; the front-rank man having reloaded, 
throws himself forward a like distance beyond his rear-rank 
man, and fires again, conforming himself to what has just 
been prescribed, and so on in continuation. 

If the line be marching in retreat, the front-rank man of 
every file halts, faces about, fires, and then reloads whilst 
throwing himself to the rear ; the rear- rank man of the same 
file continues to march, halts at eight or ten paces beyond 
the front-rank man, faces about, fires, and then observes 
what is just prescribed for the front-rank man ; the latter 
man at the same distance in rear of his rear-rank man, halts 
again, faces about, finishes loading, fires, and then does as 
he had done before, and thus the alternate fire by the men 
of the same file is continued. 

116 



OF THE COMPANY. 117 

If the company be in march by the right flank, the front- 
rank man of every file faces to the enemy, steps one pace 
forward, halts, fires, and throws himself behind his rear-rank 
man, who had been next behind him, reloading as he marches ; 
as soon as this second man, who has continued to march, 
shall judge that the first has rammed, he in his turn faces to 
the enemy, steps one pace forward, halts, fires, and throws 
himself behind his front-rank man, reloading as he marches, 
and thus the fire is continued. 

If the company be in march by the left flank, the fire is 
executed in the same manner ; but it is the rear-rank man 
(the leader) who fires first. 

In executing this fire, the files must avoid mingling with 
each other ; consequently, the man who has continued to 
march, must never pass a man of another file, who shall be 
at a halt, for the purpose of firing. 

Skirmishers should also be taught to load and fire kneel- 
ing and lying. In commencing the fire, officers are to see 
that all the files do not fire at once, but in succession. 

Marching in retreat, the commander of the skirmishers 
takes advantage of any chance object the ground may pre- 
sent, to arrest the march of the enemy as long as possible. 

The fire is stopped by the sound or beat indicated for that 
purpose : at this signal, the men cease firing, and those who 
have not reloaded, load. If the line be in march, it con- 
tinues the movement ; and of the two men of the same file, 
the one in front waits till the other is abreast with him. 

Rallying and assembling. 

A company, deployed as skirmishers, rallies to resist ca- 
valry ; it assembles under other circumstances. The rally 
is made in a run ; the assembly in quick time. 

To rally on the reserve. (Fig. 8.) 

Rally on the reserve. — This command being given, the 
captain throws himself on the reserve, the chief of which 
begins the formation of the circle by throwing back a little 
the two flanks of the reserve. The skirmishers running in, 
form themselves as they successively join the reserve, on its 
right and left, in two ranks, without regard to height, face 
outwards and complete the circle. The officers and sergeants 

117 



118 LIGHT INFANTRY. 

direct the execution of the movement, and then place them- 
selves within the circle. 

These dispositions being made, the captain profits by any 
interval of time the cavalry may allow him for putting him- 
self in safety against its attacks, either by rejoining his bat- 
talion, or by gaining some advantageous position : to this 
end he reduces the circle, and reforms the company into co- 
lumn by platoon, and in two platoons ; he marches in this 
order, by the front or rear- rank ; and if threatened anew by 
the -cavalry, he halts and again forms circle, by throwing 
back the flanks of the two platoons ; the second platoon, if 
not already faced by the rear-rank, is first so faced, and the 
other platoon by the front-rank. 

The company being formed into circle, is deployed as 
skirmishers, as follows : 

Reduce circle. — At this command, the officers and ser- 
geants pass out ; the chief of the reserve aligns it on its 
centre ; the first and second lieutenants reform their platoons 
on the right and left of the reserve ; which being executed, 
the company is deployed by one of the means already indi- 
cated. 

If the suddenness of the attack leave no time to rally the 
skirmishers on the reserve, the rally is made by platoon ; 
the first and second lieutenants each rallies his platoon on 
the ground the most advantageous behind the line of skir- 
mishers. Pending the movement, the captain throws him- 
self on the reserve, and so disposes it as to protect the rally- 
ing of the platoons and to resist the cavalry. The platoons 
being rallied, they rejoin the reserve as promptly as possible. 

To rally on the battalion. 

The company being deployed as skirmishers, rallies on 
the battalion, as follows : 

Rally on the battalion. — The skirmishers of each platoon 
and the reserve unmask the front of the battalion, directing 
themselves, in a run, towards its nearest flank, and then form 
in its rear. 

The company being formed, it places itself, for the time, 
whatever be its designation or number, on the left or right 
of the battalion, according as it may belong to the left or 
right wing, and if not a flank company, it will not resume 

118 



OF THE BATTALION. 119 

its proper place in line, except by order of the commanding 
officer. 

To assemble on the reserve. 

The company being deployed as skirmishers, assembles 
on the reserve, as follows : 

Assemble on the reserve. — At this command, the reserve 
is formed in the precise order it stood before the deployment ; 
the skirmishers assemble upon it, and each resumes his place 
in his previous rank and file. The company being reformed 
rejoins the battalion. 



OF THE BATTALION. 



To deploy the battalion as Skirmishers. (Fig. 9.) 

The battalion being in line, it is supposed to consist of but 
eight companies, and that it is to deploy on the sixth com- 
pany holding the three right companies in reserve. This 
example will serve for a battalion of ten, or any other num- 
ber of companies. Each company, deployed as skirmishers, 
is supposed to occupy a front of one hundred paces. 

The commanding officer, previously to giving the cau- 
tionary command, communicates his purpose to the lieuten- 
ant-colonel, the adjutant, and the major, the last of whom 
is charged with the command of the battalion reserve. He 
also indicates to the lieutenant-colonel the direction to be 
given to the line, as well as the point of rest for the sixth 
company, and to the major, the position in which to estab- 
lish the reserve. The lieutenant-colonel throws himself eight 
or ten paces before the right of the sixth company, and the 
adjutant, a like distance before its left. 

DEPLOY AS SKIRMISHERS. BY COM- ^ At this 
PANY, AT A HUNDRED PACES, ON THE I command, 
RIGHT OF THE SIXTH COMPANY, TAKE f the sixth 
INTERVALS. J and fifth 

captains march their companies eight or ten paces forward, 
make the preparatory dispositions, and give the preparatory 
commands for deploying forward, the sixth company on its 
right file, the fifth on its loft file. The fourth captain causes 

119 



120 LIGHT INFANTRY. 

his company to face to the right, the seventh and eighth cap- 
tains cause their companies to face to the left. 

QUICK (or double-quick) MARCH. — At the word march. 
the movement commences. The sixth and fifth companies 
deploy forward ; the right guide of the sixth, directing him- 
self on the point indicated to him by the lieutenant-colonel. 
The companies which have faced to the right and left, march 
straight forward. The fourth takes its interval of a hundred 
paces from the left of the fifth and then deploys forward on 
its left file ; the seventh and eighth, each takes the like inter- 
val from the nearest file of the company next on its right, 
and then deploys forward on its right file. Each of the 
five companies deploys according to the principles prescribed 
for an isolated company, and those on the right and left of 
the sixth and fifth, are each aligned on these central compa- 
nies, the first deployed. 

The lieutenant-colonel and adjutant follow up the deploy- 
ment, the first towards the right, the second towards the 
left, and when finished, place themselves near the command- 
ing officer, the first on the right, the second on the left. 

The company reserves are established as echellons in re- 
spect to each other, as follows : the reserve of the sixth, at 
a hundred and forty paces behind the right of its skirmishers : 
the reserves of the fourth and fifth, united, opposite to the 
interval between their skirmishers, and thirty paces nearer 
the line than the reserve of the sixth ; the reserves of the 
seventh and eighth, also united, opposite to the interval be- 
tween their skirmishers, and thirty paces farther from the 
line than the reserve of the sixth. 

The major, on receiving the orders of the commanding 
officer, marches the battalion reserve thirty paces to the rear, 
and ploys it into column by company, at half distance ; which 
being done, he conducts it to the position indicated by the 
commanding officer. 

The commanding officer superintends the general deploy- 
ment, and when finished, throws himself at a point in rear 
of the line, whence his view may best embrace all the parts, 
in order to direct their movements. 

If, instead of deploying forward, it be intended to deploy 
by the flank, the sixth and fifth companies are marched 
eight or ten paces forward, halted and deployed, the sixth 
on its right file, the fifth on its left, bv the means indicated 

120 



OP THE BATTALION. 121 

in the second case in the drill of the company. Each of the 
other companies marches by the flank, and as soon as the 
last file of each, nearest to the point of direction, shall have 
taken the interval of one hundred paces, the company moves 
up on the line, halts, and deploys. 

The battalion, in the preceding cases, has been supposed 
to commence each movement from line : if, on the contrary, 
it be in column, the deployment is made by the same com- 
mands and according to the same principles, observing what 
follows : — If to deploy forward, the directing company, as 
soon as unmasked, marches eight or ten paces in front of 
the line which had been occupied by the head of the column, 
halts, and then deploys on the designated file ; each of the 
other companies, marching by the flank, takes its interval 
to the right or left, halts, and then deploys forward. — If to 
deploy by the flank; the directing company advances as be- 
fore, halts, and then deploys on the designated file ; each of 
the other companies, having taken its interval to the right 
or left, moves up "on the line, halts, and then deploys as soon 
as the company next towards the direction shall have finish- 
ed its deployment. 

The echellons in the example given, descend from right 
to left; they may be posted on the same principles so as to 
descend from left to right. The commanding officer indi- 
cates to the captains, before the commencement of the de- 
ployment, the number of paces which the reserve of each 
company ought to take to the rear. 

When the colour-company is to be deployed as skirmish- 
ers, the colour, without its guard, is detached, and remains 
with the battalion reserve. 

To rally the battalion deployed as skirmishers. 
(Figs. 10, 11.) 

The commanding officer rallies his battalion by the com- 
mands indicated for the rally of a company, and so disposes 
the battalion reserve as to protect this movement. 

The companies deployed as skirmishers rally in squares 
on their respective reserves: each reserve forms the first 
front of the square ; the skirmishers who rally first form the 
lateral fronts, and the other files the fourth front. The of- 
ficers and sergeants direct the rally, and form the men, as 

L * 121 



122 



LIGHT INFANTRY. 



they successively arrive, into two ranks, without regard to 
height, and cause them to face outwards. 

The rally being effected, the commanders of company 
squares (senior captains, and the sixth captain) profit by an 
interval of time the cavalry may allow for putting them in 
safety, either by marching upon the battalion reserve, or by 
taking an advantageous position : to this end, each of those 
squares is formed into column, and marched in this order, and 
if threatened anew, it halts, and again forms itself into square. 

As the companies successively arrive near the battalion 
reserve, each reforms as promptly as possible, and, without 
regard to designation or number, takes the place in the co- 
lumn next in rear of the companies already in it. 

The battalion reserve also forms square, if itself threatened 
by cavalry. 



Indication of movements which may be executed by the 
sounds of the bugle, or beats of the drum. 



Double-quick march 

Run 

Forward march 

Halt 

March in retreat. . . . 
Commence firing.... 



No. of 


No. of 


sounds. 


beats. 


12 


15 


13 


16 


14 


5 


15 


17 


16 


18 


17 


19 



Cease firing 

March by the right \ 

flank 5 

March by the left flank. 
Rally on the reserve. 
Rally on the battalion 



No. of 

sounds. 


No. of 
beats. 


18 


14 


19 


1 


20 
21 
22 


12 
2 
3 



Remark, — The words of command given by the instructor who represents 
the commander in the company manoeuvres of Light Infantry, are printed 
in italics at the beginning of the paragraphs ; but in the battalion manoeu- 
vres of Light Infantry, they are printed in capitals. 



122 



OP TnE COMPANY. 



FlO. 1. 

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOQOQOOOOOOOOOQOOOOOOOOOOOOO 



? ? 



? ? 1 ? 

Mil 
i 



o o 

? ? 



I 






li 



J 

J J T ! if 









j** 



Fia. 2. 



o a aoooaooooooooooooooooooaooa. goooooooooa 



a_at>. o o a o o .a o as . 



LIGHT INFANTRY. 



000000000000000 3 00 00003 00000000000000000 



*66«A6SbS i*66466- iSaaca 



f ii l| 

"? p i ! 



'21 < 



ill 

I!! 



00000000000000 49000 



5 HU! 

" 2 » 
9 o | 



Fig. 3. 



Fig. 4. 



• , iFFi ?,i 






! i 



Da d o i. c on o_o o 000.0 a o. o 
oV ■ 



124 



OP THE COMPANY. 
Fig. 5. 

ft Z 1 do 9 a a 



S8» 



O O 



Fig. 5. 



0O9Q0. 00000900 6 0000000 00000000990 0' 00300 

o 

O O. O o 

»4i.'4 4-4 4'4 6 4 4.A4'fJ 4 4 6 "«.'6o O * "& * S"** d,b.* do* 6 6 d 4.A o 



ooo 
Be 



o o 

L2 125 



LIGHT INFANTRY. 
Fig. 7. 



o 6\o 



! "I j 1 '.! S ! \A \ 1 j I I i 5° 

loo L L u u \» U h i°° r ?° r r Krrrpi 



H 

bo IOO 13 1> ]co £0 JOO 

k \ { . 1 i <&: 

| ! 

66664 6*6 



\ 



! ! \ 

5oO tOO JOO IOO fol K 

! j | ; [ j 

6 I c h 6 6 6 I 4 A 6 6 6 A 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 U 4 6 6 



/ 



4ga 



°~9 ° 









Fig. 8. 


















O t) OO O O Q 


o 


OO 


0«6S'60 «ip a o o o 


a 


a 


c 


a o 


o 


a o o_ 





Q O OO'ft C 


\ \ 






















// 








i Jo! ! 

III! 
















// 


\\ 




o°a 


i ! 

■ ■ i 












o 
o o 




1 * 


\\ 






I'i! 

1 '. 
















// 


\\ 






ill! 
















/ / 




OP THE BATTALION. 

Fig. 9. 



h 



Jilt 



V 



/ 



: 7 

It 



1*8 






t 



X 



*2? 

If 



!§ 

3 



•ii 
i 

• s 



127 



LIGHT INFANTRY. 
Fig. 10. 




m 



Fig II 



<fc 



W 



\ i i 



/ 



4 J 



128 



PART II. 



CAVALRY TACTICS. 



The words of command given by the Instruc- 
tor, (who represents the commander?) are printed 
in Capital letters. 



PREFACE. 



It is not to be expected that the militia or volunteer 
Cavalry are to be instructed in all the minutiae prac- 
tised by the regular Cavalry. It will be sufficient that 
every man learns the rudiments of Infantry formations, 
to act occasionally on foot, and to mount and dismount 
with ease, to sit a horse naturally, and to have his 
stirrups sufficiently short to enable him to command 
his horse, and to rise in them to strike, when it may be 
necessary to use the sword or the lance. 

The manoeuvres are simple, and can easily be learned. 
The sword exercise is reduced to a very few motions. 
It has not been thought necessary to enter into all the 
cuts usually practised by Cavalry in the attack and 
defence ; it is deemed sufficient that a militia or volun- 
teer trooper should be able to draw and return his 
sword with agility, to pay the compliments with grace, 
and, for the attack, to come to the preparatory, of 
" raise -sword" and dash at his adversary with cut, or 
point, as may be most effectual in the charge against 
horse or foot. 

131 



CONTENTS OF PART SECOND. 



Page 

Definitions of certain terms of formation and manoeuvre 7 

Mounting 10 

Position on horseback 10 

Dismounting 11 

Riding lesson 11 

Manual of the sword 13 

Of the squad 14 

Formation of the squad 15 

Alignments 15 

Marches to the right "• 16 

Formations to the left 16 

Formations to the right or reverse flank 17 

Formations to the front 17 

To advance and retire in line 18 

Diminution and increase of front 18 

Formation of the company 20 

Formation of the squadron 21 

Formation of the regiment 22 

To open and close ranks 23 

Posts of officers and others in column 23 

Of the charge or attack 24 

Rules for guides and markers 25 

Movements from line 27 

No. 1. To change front forward on first squadron 27 

2. To change front to the rear on left squadron 28 

3. To change front on central squadron 28 

4. To break to the right into column 29 

5. To break to the right, to march to the left 29 

6. To break to the right to the rear, to march to the left 30 

7. To ploy into close column on second squadron 30 

8. To advance in echellon of squadrons 31 

9. Passage of lines to the front 32 

10. Passage of lines to the rear 32 

11. To march in line 33 

Movements from close column 35 

No. 1. To deploy on second squadron 35 

2. To wheel into line on rear squadron 35 

3. To change direction from a halt 36 

4. Countermarch 37 

Movements from open column 37 

No. 1. To form line to the left 37 

2. To form line to the right by inversion 38 

3. To form line to the front 38 

4. To form line to the front on rear company 39 

5. To form line faced to the rear 39 

6. To form line faced to the rear on rear company 40 

7. 8. To form line by two movements 40, 41 

9. To form on right into line 41 

10. To form close column 42 

Skirmishing 42 

M 133 



PART II. 



CAVALRY. 



Definitions of certain terms of Formation and Manoeuvre. 

A Rank — Is any number of men side by side in line. 

Cavalry are said to be marching by — 

Files — When each front-rank man has his rear-rank man 
following him, the whole in one single string. 

Twos — When each front-rank "two" has its rear-rank 
"two" following it, being a column two abreast. 

Fours — When each front-rank "four" has its rear-rank 
"four" by its side, being a column eight abreast. 

Sections of Fours — -When each front-rank "four" has its 
rear-rank "four" following it, being a column four abreast. 

A Platoon — Is the fourth part of a squadron. Platoons 
in squadron are numbered 1st, 2d, 3d, 4th, from the right. 

A Company — Is the half of a squadron. Companies are 
right and left in each squadron. 

A Squadron — Two or more squadrons compose a corps 
or regiment. Squadrons are numbered 1st, 2d, 3d, &c. from 
the right. 

Close Order — The ordinary distance at which the rear- 
rank is formed behind the front-rank — one yard or pace. 

Open Order — The increased distance taken by the rear- 
rank on some occasions of parade — six yards or paces. 

Front — The distance towards which the line faces when 
formed — the extent from flank to flank — that is, the breadth. 

The extent of front of a squadron is to be calculated at 
about as many yards as it contains files. 

Depth — Distance from front to rear. 

Distance — Space between one division and another in co- 
lumn. 

From one horse to another when marching in file, twos, 
foius, or sections of fours — one yard. 

W 135 



8 PART II. CAVALRY. 

From one squadron to another in close column — ten yards. 

From one squadron, company, or platoon, to another, in 
open column. The extent of front of each squadron, com- 
pany, or platoon, taken from front-rank to front-rank, adding 
ten paces for the interval between squadrons when in line. 

The depth of two ranks, taking the length of the fullest 
sized cavalry horses, at eight feet, and the distance between 
the ranks at three feet, is to be reckoned at about nineteen 
feet. 

Intervals — Spaces between squadrons and regiments in 
line — those between squadrons, ten paces; those between 
regiments, fifteen. 

Points of Direction — Objects towards which it is intended 
to march in line or column. The directing guide must march 
perfectly straight, by always keeping in line two objects at 
some distance before him. 

Flank. — The extremity of the right or left of a military 
body in line or column. 

Directing Flank — That flank of a column towards which 
the guides cover in marching. When the column is march- 
ing with the right in front, the left is the directing flank ; 
with the left in front, the right (except under peculiar cir- 
cumstances or manoeuvres.) The directing flank is indicated 
by the commands "guide left" or "guide right" as the 
case may be, and the dressing is towards that flank. Pres- 
sure must be yielded when coming from that flank, and 
resisted when coming from the opposite flank. 

Pivot — The man on that flank which forms the central 
point in wheeling. 

Alignment — A straight line, upon which a body of troops 
is to form. 

Every division which is to be aligned upon another, will 
halt abreast of the rear-rank, parallel to the line of forma- 
tion, to move forward into the alignment of the division al- 
ready formed. 

Inversion — When the squadrons are not in their propei 
order ; or when the right are to the left, and the left to the 
right. 

Column — A line broken into several parts, each part fol- 
lowing exactly behind the other. 

Column of Route — A column (of twos or sections of fours) 
for convenience and ease. 9 

136 



PART II. CAVALRY. 9 

Direct Echellon — A line broken into several parts, mov- 
ing direct to the front or rear, in this manner — 



Oblique Echellon — A line broken into several parts by 
wheels from line, or column, less than the quarter circle, so 
as to be oblique to the former front, and parallel with each 
other — thus : 



Paces — There are three paces, the walk, the trot, and the 
gallop. — The walk at the rate of three and a half to four 
miles an hour. The trot at eight miles and a half an hour. 
The gallop at eleven miles an hour. The gallop is not con- 
sidered applicable to general purposes of manoeuvre, though 
it may be used occasionally for very simple formations. 

The rate of charge should not exceed the speed of the 
slowest horses. 

To preserve uniformity of movement, the trot and gallop 
should commence gradually, and by the whole body at the 
same time. 

The term pace, by which distance and intervals are mea- 
sured, is reckoned at one yard. 

Commands — Are of two kinds, those of caution and those 
of execution. They should be given in a firm and clear 
tone, and repeated by the chiefs of subdivisions. There 
should be a short pause between the command of caution 
and of execution. At the command of caution, chiefs of 
subdivisions will caution their subdivisions as to the particu- 
lar movement which each has to perform. 

The commands march and halt should be instantly re 
peated by chiefs of subdivisions. When a line breaks from 
a halt by a wheel, the chief of each subdivision will judge 
of the instant when the movement ought to finish to order 
halt, and left, or right-dress. 

At the word march, a line or column will move at a walk, 
M2 137 



10 PART II. CAVALRY. 

unless the command indicates a different pace. When a 
command is not distinctly heard by some part of the line, 
each officer (when the intention is obvious) will conform as 
quickly as possible to the movement which he sees executed 
on his right or left, according to the point from whence he 
perceives it to be given. 

Mounting. 

STAND TO HORSE.— The position of the man is on the 
left side of the horse, square to the front ; toes on a line with 
the horse's fore feet ; right hand, back upwards, holding the 
rein of the snaffle over the curb, six inches from the ring of 
the bitt ; left hand hanging down by the thigh. 

PREPARE TO MOUNT.— Face to the right, place the left 
hand where the right was, and run the right up to the mid- 
dle of the reins or knob, which is held between the finger and 
thumb ; step to the right opposite the horse's shoulder, and 
taking both sides of the curb-rein with the left hand, just 
under the right, put the little finger between them, the back 
of the hand towards the horse's head ; run down the left 
hand to the neck of the horse, and still holding the bridle, 
seize with the fore-fingers of the left hand, a lock of the 
mane, about a foot from the saddle ; seize the stirrup-leather 
with the right hand near the stirrup ; step back with the right 
foot, and place the ball of the left in the stirrup, the left knee 
close to the horse's shoulder, and the right hand on the can- 
tie of the saddle. 

MOUNT. — By a spring from the right foot, rise in the stir- 
rup, bring both heels together, knees against the saddle, and 
body upright ; place the right hand on the pommel and sup- 
port the body, while the right leg passes clear over the horse, 
the right knee closes on the saddle, and the body comes 
gently into it ; the left hand quits the mane and the right the 
pommel ; the snaffle-rein is laid with the right hand, back 
upwards, into the left, the middle finger dividing them, the 
superfluous part of the reins hanging down on the off-side ; 
both reins are pressed between the thumb and first joint of 
the fore-finger, the bridle hand raised so as just to feel the 
horse's mouth ; the right foot takes the stirrup without the 
aid of hand or eye. 

Position on Horseback. 
The body balanced in the middle of the saddle ; head up- 

133 



PART II. CAVALRY. 11 

right and square to the front ; shoulders well thrown hack ; 
chest advanced ; upper part of the arms hanging down 
straight from the shoulder; left elbow bent, and slightly 
closed to the hips : little finger on a level with the elbow ; 
wrist rounded, throwing the knuckles to the front ; thigh 
stretched down from the hip ; the flat of the thigh well turn- 
ed inward to the saddle : knees a little bent ; legs hanging 
straight down from the knee and near the horse's sides ; 
heels stretched down, the toes raised from the insteps, and 
as near the horse's sides as the heels. 

Dismounting, 

PREPARE TO DISMOUNT— The right hand takes the 
rein above the left ; the right foot quits the stirrup ; the left hand 
slides forward on the rein and seizes a lock of the mane 
about twelve inches from the saddle, feeling the horse's 
mouth very gently ; the right hand drops the reins to the 
off-side, and is placed on the holster. 

DISMOUNT.-Supporting the body with the right hand and 
left foot, the right leg is brought clear over to the near side ; 
heels close ; the right hand on the cantle preserves the bal- 
ance of the body ; the right foot is brought to the ground, 
and then the left ; seize the reins with the right hand under 
the left, and advance, left foot first, to the position of stand 

TO HORSE. 

Riding Lesson. 

Aids are given by the hand and legs: corrections and 
animations by the spur. 

To March. — At the word forward, raise the hand so as 
to feel gently the horse's mouth, and approach the legs with- 
out closing them : this is called " to gather the horse," and 
is preparatory to all movements. At the word march, turn 
the nails downwards, so as to give a little more rein, and 
close the calves of both legs according to the sensibility of 
the horse : when the horse obeys, ease the legs by degrees, 
and replace the hand quietly in its former position. 

To Halt. — At the word halt, feel the reins equally and 
firmly, drawing the hand towards the body, and closing for 
an instant both legs, in order to press the horse well up to 
the bridle : when the horse has obeyed, resume the former 
position. 

To Rein Back. — Raise the hand a little and draw it gen- 

139 



12 FART II. CAVALRY. 

tly to the centre of the body, bending a little forward, till 
the horse obeys — use the calves of the legs only to keep 
him straight ; ease the reins after every step and feel them 
again. 

To Turn to the Right, — Open the right rein and close 
gradually the right leg, making the horse pass over a quar- 
ter of a circle of two or three paces, on the line of the 
shoulders ; diminish the effect of the rein and right leg, and 
sustain the horse with the left rein and leg, to terminate the 
movement. Turning to the Left, is performed on the same 
principles, by contrary movements. 

To Turn to the Right (or Left) About, is performed by 
similar movements continued, making the horse pass over a 
half circle of about five paces, on the line of the shoulders. 

To Trot. — Ease the reins and press the calves of both 
legs, according to the horse's temper ; then feel both reina 
to raise the fore-hand. 

To Canter. — A light and firm feeling of the reins, to raise 
the horse's fore-hand ; a pressure of both legs, to bring the 
haunches under him. 

Passaging. — When ground is to be taken to a flank, by 
passaging the whole move at the words eight (or left) pass, 
march — until the word halt. In passaging to the right, 
at the words eight pass, propel the horse's shoulders to the 
right, by opening the right rein and slightly closing the right 
leg : at the word march, open the right rein and close the 
left leg, in order to make the haunches follow ; hold the right 
leg ready to sustain the horse. Passaging to the left is exe- 
cuted by contrary movements. 

Obliquing. — At the words right oblique, march, each 
man makes a quarter turn of his horse to the right, so that 
his right knee comes behind the left knee of the man on his 
right ; the man on the right of the rank marches steadily in 
the direction indicated to him, the others dress on him. The 
rear-rank moves in the same manner, and is regulated by 
the front-rank, which it takes care to conform to ; and thus 
the horses' heads of the rear-rank are directed in rear of the 
second man from their leader towards the right. In obli- 
quing to the left the same principles and contrary movements 
are employed. 

Wheeling — Wheelings are of two kinds, from the halt, 

140 



PART II. CAVALRY. 13 

and upon the movo: in cither case the dressing is the outer 
or marching flank. 

From the Halt. — The pivot man turns his horse on his 
fore-feet, keeps his ground, and comes gradually round with 
the rank. The outward flank man looks to his rank, regu- 
lates the pace at which the wheel is made, and conducts the 
flank so as to avoid crowding on the rank, the men resisting 
pressure from the outward and yielding to pressure from the 
inward flank. The rear-rank must rein back at the pivot 
and partly passage and incline towards the wheeling flank 
m order to cover. 

On the Move. — Both flanks are kept in motion : the inner 
flank describing an arc of a lesser circle : the outer flank de- 
scribing an arc of the large circle and moving about one 
half faster than the rate at which the body is marching : the 
intermediate men conforming to the movements of the flanks. 
Pressure must be yielded when coming from the side towards 
the guide, and resisted from the opposite side, whether the 
guide be on the pivot, or the marching flank. 

In the evolutions, the wheelings are on a fixed pivot. In 
changes of direction in column the wheels are made on the 
move so as not to retard the march, the arcs described by 
the pivots are five paces, and when marching in column of 
four, or twos, the pivots wheel without slacking the pace. , 

The wheelings should be first practised in single rank. 

In wheeling from line into column, the dressing after the 
wheel is to the marching flank. 

Manual of the Sword. 

DRAW-SWORD. — Carry the right hand over the reins ; 
run the hand to the wrist, through the sword-knot ; grasp 
the sword and draw it six inches out of the scabbard. 

Draw the sword briskly, carry it to the right shoulder, 
point upwards ; drop the hand on the upper part of the right 
thigh, the little finger on the outside of the gripe and the 
back of the blade in the hollow of the shoulder. This is the 
position of carry-sword. 

SLOPE-SWORD.— Loosen the grasp of the handle, ad- 
vancing at the same time the sword-hand, with the wrist 
turned up, so as to allow the back of the sword to rest on 
the shoulder in a sloping position. 

141 



14 PART II. CAVALRY. 

CARRY-SWORD — Draw the hand to its position, so 
as to allow the sword to resume its perpendicularity. 

RAISE-SWORDS.— As front-rank. Raise the sword- 
hand perpendicularly and bring it as high as the chin, blade 
to the left and fingers opposite the face, which is the position 
preparatory to give point. Raise the wrist to the height of 
the eyes — the arm half extended — the edge turned towards 
the right, and the point a little lower than the wrist. 

As rear-rank. — Raise the sword, the arm half extended ; 
the wrist a little above the head ; the edge upwards, the point 
backwards and about one foot above the wrist. These are 
the positions of the sword by the two ranks just before the 
charge and at the shock when the men are to give point, or 
cut and use their swords as they see fit, after breaking the 
line. 

CARRY-SWORDS.— Bring the sword to its original po- 
sition on the thigh. 

RETURN-SWORDS.— Raise the blade perpendicularly ; 
the flat to the front, edge to the left, the thumb to the height 
of the chin and six inches from it. Carry the wrist near, 
and opposite to, the left shoulder, drop the point, turn the 
head to the left, return the sword, bringing the head again to 
the front and the hand to its position behind the thigh. 

Pistol and carbine exercise are omitted, because it is deem- 
ed best to let every man use his pistol or carbine as may be 
most convenient to him. 

Officer's Salute Mounted. 

Being at the position of " carry-swords," raise the hand 
by a circular motion as high as, and opposite to, the chin, 
with the edge of the blade to the left, then stretching the arm 
out, and at the same time bringing the point of the blade in 
a line with the knee and foot, the edge still kept to the left. 

The salute being made the sword is recovered by bring- 
ing it back smartly to carry-s words. 

Dismounted. 

The salute is the same as that prescribed for the infantry. 

Of the Squad. 

The first drills should be in single rank of squads not ex- 
ceeding twelve men. The following examples applv to a 

142 



PART II. CAVALRY. 15 

squad of sixteen men in two ranks, but they are equally ap- 
plicable to a squad in single rank, by leaving out what re- 
gards the rear- rank in the instructions. 

The marches and formations should be executed as often 
by the left as by the right ; but in order to avoid repetitions 
of right and left, they are laid down with reference to the 
former hand only. 

After the men go through the whole correctly at a walk, 
the marches and formations should be performed generally 
at a trot. 

Short halts should take place at intervals : the men should 
also be dismounted at least once during the drill. 

Formation of the Squad, 

The squad is formed in two ranks at open order, six yards 
distance : the men in the position of stand to horse. 

ATTENTION, SQUAD— TELL OFF BY FOURS.— 
The men of each rank number themselves one, two, three, 
four, from right to left. 

PREPARE TO MOUNT.— Numbers two and four step 
forward with the right foot, face their horses, take the snaffle 
rein with both hands near the ring, rein back their horses 
gently to the distance of four yards, and all prepare to 
mount. 

MOUNT. — As already explained. Being mounted, num- 
bers two and four move into their intervals gently, and the 
rear-rank closes to the distance of one yard from the front- 
rank. (Fig. 1.) 

In dismounting in two ranks, at the words prepare to 
dismount, numbers one and three of the front-rank move 
forward four paces, and two and four of the rear-rank rein 
back the same distance. 

The whole are then dismounted as already explained. 

Alignments. 

The three right files of each rank are placed four paces 
forward and aligned. 

BY FILE, RIGHT-DRESS — The men of each rank ad- 
vance singly and dress on the men of their respective ranks 
already established, taking care not to pass beyond them, 
and feeling the touch of the boot gently to the right. 

FRONT.— The men turn their heads to the front. Dress 

143 



16 PART II. CAVALRY. 

ing back is practised in the same manner. After the men 
are sufficiently practised to align by files, they are taught to 
align by the whole rank at once, by the command right- 
dress. 

Marches to the Right. 

BY FOURS. 

FOURS, RIGHT.— Each rank wheels by fours to the 
right. (Fig. 2.) 

GUIDE LEFT-MARCH.— The whole move forward 
dressing to the left. 

By Sections of Fours. 

SECTIONS OF FOURS-RIGHT.— The whole wheel 
fours right, as before. 

GUIDE LEFT-MARCH.— The leading four of the front- 
rank marches straight forward, its rear-rank inclining and 
covering it ; the remainder move off their ground in succes- 
sion in the same manner: first a front-rank four, and then a 
rear-rank four, alternately. (Fig. 3.) 

By Twos. 

TWOS-RIGHT.— The right hand two of the front-rank 
wheels to the right ; the remainder turn their horses' heads 
towards the right. 

MARCH. — The leading two marches straight forward, 
followed by its rear-rank two : the remainder move off their 
ground in succession in the same manner ; first a front-rank 
two and then a rear-rank two, alternately, the whole covering 
by the left. (Fig. 4.) 

Marches to the right By Files, are made according to the 
same principles as By Twos, substituting in the command 
files for twos. The files should be instructed to cover ac- 
curately. 

Formations to the Left. 

If the column is marching by subdivisions of eight, or if 
the front of subdivisions exceed that number, the column 
must be halted before it is wheeled into line ; in other cases 
the formations may be made from the move. 

From Fours. 

COLUMN-HALT — LEFT INTO LINE WHEEL- 

144 



TART II. CAVALRY. 17 

MARCH. — The whole of the fours wheel to the left, and 
dress to the right. (Fig. 5.) 

From Sections of Fours. 

LEFT INTO LINE-MARCH.— The leading four wheels 
to the left, and moves up three horses' lengths, followed by 
its rear-rank : the remainder continue moving on, and as 
each four arrives opposite its place, it wheels to the left, and 
forms up to the rank to which it belongs, dressing to the 
right. (Fig. 6.) 

Formations to the left, From Twos and Files, are made 
according to the same principles and by the same command 
as From Sections of Fours. (Fig. 7.) 

Formation to the Right or Reverse Flank. 

These formations are made from the move. 

From Fovrs. 

ON RIGHT INTO LINE-MARCH.— The rear-rank 
fours check their pace till the front-rank fours of the rank 
next behind come up abreast of them ; in the meantime the 
leading four of the front-rank wheels to the right, and ad- 
vances three horses' lengths beyond the right flank of the 
column, and halts : its rear- rank wheeling to the right, co- 
vering it and moving up to the proper distance ; the remain- 
der continue to move on, each four wheeling to the right 
when opposite its place, and forming up to the rank to which 
it belongs, dressing to the right. (Fig. 8.) 

From Sections of Fours* 

ON RIGHT INTO LINE-MARCH— The leading four 
of the front-rank wheels to the right, advances three horses' 
lengths, and halts ; its rear- rank four arriving behind it, 
wheels, covers, and moves up to its proper distance ; the re- 
mainder continue moving on, and as each four arrives oppo- 
site its place, it wheels to the right, and forms up to the 
rank to which it belongs, dressing to the right. (Fig. 9.) 

Formations to the right from Twos and Files, are made 
according to the same principles and by the same command 
as From Sections of Fours. (Fig. 10.) 

Formations to the Front. 

These formations are made from a halt, or move. 

N 145 



18 PART II. CAVALRY. 

From Fours. 

FRONT INTO LINE-MARCH.— The leading four of 
the front-rank advances three horses' lengths and halts, its 
rear-rank fours moving up by an incline, to its proper dis- 
tance and covering it ; the rest of the rear-rank fours check 
their pace till the front-rank fours of the rank next behind 
come up abreast of them, the whole moving up into line by- 
inclining to the left, and dressing, as they come up, by the 
right. (Fig. 11.) 

From Sections of Fours. 

FRONT INTO LINE-MARCH.— The leading four of 
the front-rank advances three horses' lengths and halts, its 
rear-rank four moving up to its proper distance, and covering 
it : the remainder move up into line, by inclining to the left, 
and dressing, as they come up, to the right. (Fig. 12.) 

Formations to the front, From Twos and Files, are made 
according to the same principles and by the same commands 
as From Sections of Fours. (Fig. 13.) 

To Advance in Line. 

SQUAD, FORWARD, GUIDE LEFT (or RIGHT) 
Mx\RCH. — The whole move forward together, dressing to- 
wards the guide, who marches straight to the front on the 
points of direction. 

To Retire in Line. 

This may be done either from a halt, or on the move : in 
both cases the wheels about must be on a fixed pivot. 

FOURS RIGHT (or LEFT) ABOUT.— Each rank wheels 
about by fours. 

GUIDE RIGHT (or LEFT)-MARCH.-The word march, 
to be given, the instant the fours have gone about, and the 
whole move forward together, dressing towards the guide. 

To resume the natural order the same commands and 
means are observed. 

Diminution and Increase of Front. 

These movements are intended for the passage of defiles, 
and will be executed by the sub-divisions in successions, al 
the same given point. 

In diminishing from platoons to sections of fours and so 

146 



PART II. CAVALRY. 19 

down to files, it will be necessary first to halt the column, in 
order to avoid crowding and confusion, which would, other- 
wise, obviously arise from the want of space necessary to 
execute the movements. 

Diminish, From Squadron to Companies. 

BY COMPANIES, MARCH.— The right company con- 
tinues to move forward ; the left company halts until its 
right is cleared, when its chief gives the words right ob- 
lique, march, and as soon as it covers in column, forward 
guide-left. 

From Companies to Platoons. 

BY PLATOONS-MARCH.— The first platoon continues 
to move forward ; the second platoon halts until its right is 
disengaged, when its chief gives the word, right oblique, 
march, and as soon as it covers in column, forward, guide- 
left. The fourth platoon executes the same movement when 
it arrives at the place where the second platoon broke. 

From Platoons to sections of Fours. 
BY SECTIONS OF FOURS, MARCH.— The leading 
right hand four continues to move forward followed by its 
rear-rank ; the leading left hand four halts until its right is 
disengaged when it obliques to the right, followed by its rear- 
rank, and covers in column by the left. All the other fours 
execute the same movement, as they arrive in succession on 
the same ground. 

From sections of Fours to Twos. 
BY TWOS, MARCH.— The leading right hand two fol- 
lowed by its rear-rank, continues to move forward ; the lead- 
ing left hand two, halts until its right is disengaged, when it 
obliques to the right, followed by its rear-rank, and covers 
in column by the left. All the other twos execute the same 
movement as they successively arrive on the same ground. 

From Twos to Files. 
BY FILES, MARCH.— The leading right hand file con- 
tinues to move forward, followed by its left hand file, which 
obliques to the right for the purpose. All the other files 
make the same movements as each arrives at the same point. 

Increase. From Files to Twos. 
FORM TWOS, MARCH.— The leading file continues to 

147 



20 PART II. CAVALRY, 

move forward ; the remainder move on at a trot, numbers 
two and four, forming on the left of one and three, as they 
successively arrive at those last formed, and then dropping 
into a walk. 

From Twos to sections of Fours* 

FORM SECTIONS OF FOURS, MARCH.— The lead- 
ing twos move steadily forward ; the remainder move on at 
a trot, numbers three and four forming on the left of one and 
two, as they successively arrive at those last formed, and 
then dropping into a walk. 

From sections of Fours to Platoons. 
FORM PLATOONS, MARCH.— The leading section 
moves steadily forward, the others move on at a trot, the 
left sections forming on the left of the right sections of pla- 
toons, as they successively arrive at those last formed, and 
then dropping into a walk. 

From Platoons to Companies. 
FORM COMPANIES, MARCJf.— The first platoon 
moves steadily forward ; the others move on at a trot, the 
second platoon forming on the left of the first, and the fourth 
on the left of the third, as they successively arrive at the 
same point, and then dropping into a walk. 

From Companies to Squadron. 

FORM SQUADRON, MARCH.— The right company 
moves steadily forward ; the left company moves at a trot, 
obliques to the left, forms on the left of the right company 
and then drops into a walk. 

In the foregoing movements, the column is supposed to be 
marching right in front. If the column should be marching 
with the left in front, the movements would be executed by 
inverse means. 

Formation of the Company. 

Each company forms on its own parade, in single rank, 
according to size from right to left, the tallest men and horses 
on the right. 

The company is next divided into two equal parts, those 
on the right to compose the front-rank, those on the left, f he 
rear-rank. 

IN TWO RANKS FORM COMPANY— The men com- 

148 



PART II. CAVALRY. 21 

posing the front-rank advance four paces dressing by the 
right. The men of the rear-rank turn their horses' heads to 
the right. 

MARCH. — The men of the rear-rank file off to the right 
in rear of the front-rank : and as each arrives opposite his 
file-leader, he turns to the left and covers at the distance of 
one yard. 

The company is then divided into two platoons, the first 
platoon on the right, the second on the left ; each consisting 
of eight files. 

The non-commissioned officers are next posted as follows : 
the first sergeant, on the right of the company, in the rank 
of file-closers, (one yard from the rear-rank,) the second, 
third, fourth and fifth sergeants, in the front-rank on the 
right and left of each platoon, each covered by a corporal. 
The company thus formed will present thirty-two men, in- 
cluding sergeants and corporals in the ranks, or bixteen files. 

The captain is in front of the centre of the company, one 
yard from the front-rank : the first lieutenant commands the 
first platoon, and the second lieutenant commands the second 
platoon, each taking post in front of the centre of his platoon 
in a line with the captain. 

The saddler and farrier are in rear of the left of the com- 
pany, eight yards in rear of the rank of file-closers ; and the 
trumpets twenty yards in rear of the centre. 

The company being formed, the men, including the non- 
commissioned officers in the ranks are told off by fours, be- 
ginning on the right of each rank. 

It is recommended to the militia to form and exercise in 
single rank, both as a simpler formation and as more useful 
and effective on many occasions in which they may be re- 
quired to act. 

Formation of the Squadron, 

Two companies constitute a squadron, and when united 
for that purpose, the platoons are numbered from right to 
left, first, second, third, fourth. 

The officers are posted as follows : 

The senior captain commands the squadron and is in front 
of the centre, one yard from the front-rank. The junior 
captain three yards in rear of the centre. The first lieu- 
tenants in front of the centre of their respective companies on 

N2 149 



22 PAHT II. CAVALRY. 

aline with the senior captain, each commanding his own 
company : the second lieutenants in rear of the centre of 
their respective companies in the rank of file-closers. 

The first sergeants of companies are, one on the right and 
one on the left of the squadron, in the rank of file-closers, 
to be employed as markers. The other non-commissioned 
officers retain their places in line. 

The saddlers and farriers retain their places in their re- 
spective companies : the trumpets are twenty yards in rear 
of the centre of the squadron. 

When a single company of militia acts in one rank, it 
should, unless very weak in number, be told off and formed 
as a squadron. 

Formation of the Regiment. (Fig. 14.) 

Three squadrons ordinarily constitute a regiment: the 
squadrons are numbered from right to left, firsts second, 
third. 

The intervals between the squadrons are ten yards. The 
colonel is eight yards in advance of the centre of the regi- 
ment, and attended by an officer and a trumpeter. 

The lieutenant-colonel opposite the centre of the first and 
second squadrons : the major in advance of the interval be- 
tween the third and fourth squadrons : both on a line with 
the colonel. The adjutant on a line with the front-rank, 
two yards from the right : the sergeant-major on the same 
line two yards from the left of the regiment. 

The duties of the field officers, adjutant and sergeant-ma- 
jor are the same as prescribed in the infantry tactics. 

The quartermaster, surgeon, and assistant-surgeon, post- 
ed from right to left in the order they are mentioned, are in 
the rear of the centre of the regiment, four yards from the 
rank of file-closers : the veterinary surgeon six yards on their 
left. The quartermaster-sergeant, in rear of the right of 
the second squadron, six yards behind the rank of file- 
closers. 

The trumpets twenty yards in rear of the centre of the 
regiment. 

The sergeant on the left of the right company of the cen- 
tre squadron, carries the standard ; and the sergeants on 
the left of the right platoons of companies, carry each a 
guidon. 

150 



PART II. CAVALRY. 



23 



To Open and Close Ranks. 

The ranks being closed, the commanding officer gives the 
words prepare to open ranks, when the markers of squad- 
rons place themselves on the flanks of their squadrons in the 
rear- rank. The commanding officer then adds, to the rear 
open order ; at which, the markers rein back five yards 
and are aligned by the right, by the lieutenant-colonel. The 
commanding officer then gives the word march, when the 
rear-rank reins back and is aligned by the lieutenant-colonel 
on the markers, the whole dressing by the right. The file- 
closers rein back at the word march, and place themselves 
one yard in rear of the rear-rank. The rear-rank being 
aligned, the commanding officer gives the word front. 

When the ranks are to close, the commanding officer gives 
the words close order, march. At the word march, the 
rear- rank closes to the front, each man covering his file- 
leader at the prescribed distance, and the markers take their 
places as file-closers. 

Posts of officers and others in column. 
Column of Twos or Fours, (Right in Front.) 

The colonel, abreast with the centre of the regiment, eight 
yards from the left flank of the column. 

The lieutenant-colonel and major on the same flank, the 
first abreast with the centre of the two first squadrons, and 
the last abreast with the centre of the two last squadrons. 

The adjutant on the same flank, abreast with the leading 
files ; the sergeant-major in rear of the column, except when 
the left is in front, when he is on the right flank, abreast with 
the leading files. 

The chiefs of squadrons on the left flank opposite to the 
centre of their squadrons ; the junior captains in the same 
relative position, on the right flank. The chiefs of the lead- 
ing companies of squadrons, in front of their companies, the 
chiefs of the other companies on the left of their leading 
files. 

The file-closers on the right flank of the column, abreast 
with the files they cover when in line. The trumpets six 
yards in advance of the officers at the head of the column. 

Column of Platoons. 
The field officers, adjutant and sergeant-major, as in co- 
lumn of fours. 151 



24 PART II. CAVALRY. 

The chiefs of squadrons on the left flank, abreast with 
their second platoons. The junior captains on the right 
flank, abreast with the third platoons. The chiefs of pla- 
toons on the left of their platoons. The file-closers on the 
right of their platoons. 

The trumpets, as in column of fours. 

Column of Companies. 

The field officers, adjutant, and sergeant-major, as in co- 
lumn of platoons. 

The chiefs of squadrons, junior captains of squadrons, 
and trumpets, as in column of platoons, all the other officers, 
and non-commissioned officers as in line. 

Close Column. Of Squadrons. 

The field officers, adjutant, sergeant-major, and trumpets, 
as in column of companies. All the other officers and non- 
commissioned officers, as in line, except chiefs of squadrons, 
who are on their left flanks. 

The distance from one squadron to another, in close co- 
lumn, is ten yards. 

In all movements in column, the officers not herein pro- 
vided for, march in rear of the regiment. 

Of the Charge or Attack. 

The charge is regulated by the principles of the direct 
march, but is more animated and impetuous. The enemy 
is the point of direction, and his overthrow the object. It 
commences with a brisk trot, then a gallop, constantly in- 
creasing in velocity in proportion to the approach to the 
enem}'-, and finally assumes the character of an attack. 
There are three modes of charging. In a line parallel or 
oblique to the front of the enemy, by echellon, and in co- 
lumn. 

When at a suitable distance from the enemy to make a 
charge, say about 250 yards, the commanding officer com- 
mands, REGIMENT, (SQUADRON Or COMPANY )-DRAW-SWORDS 

— trot — march. The regiment continues at a trot for 150 
paces, when the commanding officer gives the word, gallop, 
which is repeated by the field officers and chiefs of squad- 
rons. He then commands march, which in like manner is 
repeated ; and after passing about 100 paces at a gallop, the 
commanding officer causes the charge to be sounded by all 

152 



PART II. CAVALRY. 25 

the trumpets, at which signal the gallop is increased in 
speed. The men rise in their stirrups, lowering the bridle 
hand, but keeping the command of their horses, as well as 
preserving their dressing, and thus dash upon the enemy ; 
the front-rank with the sword pointed forward, immediately 
before the shock, and the rear-rank with the sword to the 
raise. The enemy being routed, the commanding officer 
orders the trumpeters to sound the rally, when each man 
pulls up and joins his standard. But as it is important that 
the enemy should not have time to rally, the flank platoons 
of each squadron or some others, are sent in pursuit, and 
to recall them the rally is sounded, when they return to 
their respective places in their squadrons. 

The charge ought always, if possible, to be anticipated, as 
there is great danger of being overthrown by receiving a 
charge at a halt. 

At the signal to charge, officers in the front of the line, 
cause the file in rear of them to fall back so as to admit the 
croup of their horses into the rank. Chiefs of squadrons 
charge at the head of their respective squadrons. The colo- 
nel at the head of such squadrons as he may think his pre- 
sence most necessary. The lieutenant-colonel and major at 
the head of other squadrons of their wing. Adjutants, ser- 
geants major, and general guides, keep their places as in 
line. The trumpets in rear of the centre, with the trumpet- 
major at their head, unless the colonel shall see fit to have 
him near his person. 

Rules for Guides and Markers. 

The guides are the non-commissioned officers on the right 
and left of platoons, told off in the ranks. 

Guides should be instructed to march with precision, to 
cover correctly, and to judge of distances by the eye ; as on 
them depend, in a great measure, the accuracy with which 
the movements are performed. 

It may sometimes happen that the proper guides are not 
on the directing flank of a column, as in the marches by 
fours, and twos ; in such cases, the men on that flank serve 
as guides for the time being. 

The markers to be employed for regimental movements 
are the first sergeants of companies. There are two for 

153 



26 PART IT. CAVALRY. 

each squadron, and their duties are to mark the line on 
which their squadrons are to rest in the different formations. 

The markers of the squadron to which the base com- 
pany belongs, mark the base of the intended line, and are 
placed by a field officer, or the adjutant, at points where the 
right and left files of the base company are to rest. Upon 
the caution being given for a movement, the base is instant- 
ly placed. 

The right markers of squadrons which are to form on the 
right of the base, mark the points where the right of their 
squadrons are to rest ; and the left markers of squadrons 
which are to form on the left of the base, mark the points 
where the left of their squadrons are to rest. Each moves 
out from his squadron and faces towards the base markers 
just time enough to take his dressing from them, before his 
squadron arrives on the line. 

In marking lines, the markers raise their swords to the 
height of the cheek, keeping the blade, the edge to the front, 
perfectly upright. They remain posted until the command- 
ing officer gives the word front, (which should succeed 
each formation,) when they retire to their places in line. 

In aligning their squadrons, the chiefs place themselves 
on that flank towards which the men are to dress, and give 
the word front, when their squadrons are aligned. 

In forming close column, the base for the covering, con- 
sists of the markers of that squadron on which the forma- 
tion takes place; who are placed by the lieutenant-colonel, 
immediately upon the caution, facing to the pivot flank of 
the intended column. 

In deployments, and all other movements from close co- 
lumn, the base consists of the markers of that squadron upon 
which the deployment or movement takes place ; who are 
posted by a field officer, or the adjutant, immediately upon 
the caution, at points where the flanks of that squadron are 
to rest. 

When a column changes direction in marching, one of 
the markers of the leading squadron is placed at the point 
where such change is made. This marker remains posted 
until the head of the next succeeding squadron is abreast 
with him, when his place is supplied by the marker of that 
squadron, who in like manner is relieved by the marker of 
the next squadron { and so in succession. 

154 



PART II. CAVALRY. 27 

The markers are rectified in their positions by a field of- 
ficer, or the adjutant. 

Movements. 

The following movements are arranged throughout as for 
three squadrons; but they are applicable to any number. 
They are detailed as performed from the right, but they may 
be performed from the left, by substituting in the cautions 
and commands, left for right, and right for left. 

Movements from Line. No. 1. 
To change front forward on first Squadron. (Fig. 15.) 

Commanding officer, ) CHANGE FRONT FORWARD 
repeated by chiefs of VON RIGHT COMPANY OF 
squadrons. ) FIRST SQUADRON.* 

Chief of base company — Company, right-wheel. 

Chief of company next the base — Company forward. 

Chiefs of 2d & 3d squadrons — By company, right half- 
wheel. 

Commanding officer, repeat- i WALK or > MARCH 
ed by same chiefs. ( TROT- \ 

On the word march, the whole move as follows : 

The base company wheels to the right and is aligned on 
the markers, receiving from its chief the words halt, right- 
dress. 

The company next the base advances until its right un- 
covers the left of the right company ; it then receives from 
its chief the words right-wheel, followed by forward, halt, 
right-dress. 

The other companies wheel half right, and then receiving 
the words, forward, guide-right, from the chiefs of squad- 
rons, advance in echellon towards the new line. Each com- 
pany on approaching its place, receives from its chief right- 
wheel, followed by forward, and on arriving on a line with 
the rear-rank of the preceding company, halt, right-dress. 

* The base is given by the markers of the first squadron, placed on the 
new line in front of the right and left files of the base company, facing to 
the right 

155 



28 PART II. CAVALRY. 

Movement No. 2, from Line. 

To change front to the rear on the left Squadron, 

(FiG-'lG.) 

Commanding officer, C CHANGE FRONT TO THE 
repeated by chiefs of 7 REAR ON LEFT COMPANY 
squadrons. ( OF THIRD SQUADRON * 

Chief of base company — Company, right-wheel. 

Chief of company next the base — Company, fours, right- 
about, followed by company, right-wheel, as soon as fours 
have gone about. 

Chiefs of 1st & 2d squadrons — Fours, right-about, fol- 
lowed by — By company, right half-wheel, as soon as fours 
have gone about. 

Commanding officer, re- $ WALK or > map ptu 
peated by same chiefs, \ TROT- $ MA±tun * 

On the word march, the base company wheels to the righty 
and is aligned on the markers, receiving from its chief, the 
words halt, left-dress. The company next the base having 
wheeled to the right, receives from its chief the word forward, 
passes the line a horse's length, leaving sufficient interval be- 
tween it and the left company, to enable it to wheel about by 
fours, and receives from its chief, halt, fours, right-about y 
left-dress. The other companies wheel half right, and re- 
ceiving from the chief of squadrons, the words forward, 
guide-right, retire in echellon towards the new line ; each 
company, on approaching its place, receives from its chief 
right— wheel, followed by forward, and when it has passed 
the line a horse's length, taking care to leave sufficient ground 
on its right to wheel about, receives from its chief halt, 
fours, right— about, left-dress. 

Movement No. 3, from Line. 

To change front on central Squadron. (Fig. 17.) 

n A . ffi r CHANGE FRONT ON RIGHT 

Commanding officer, COMPANY OF SECOND 

repeated by chiefs of ^ SQUADRON. LEFT-WING 

squadrons. [ FORWARD.f 

*The base is given by the markers of the third squadron, placed on the 
new line in front of the left and right files of the base company, facing to 
the left. 

t The base is given by the markers of the second squadron, placed on the 
new line in front of the right and left files of the base company, facing to 
the right. 

156 



PART II. CAVALRY. 29 

Chief of base company — Company, right-wheel. 

Chief of company next the base — Company, forward. 

C Fours, right-about, followed by 

Chief of 1st squadron, < By company, right half-wheel, 
( as soon as fours have gone about. 

Chief of 3d squadron — By company, right half-wheels 

Commanding officer, re- > WALK or ) «, adoij 
peated by same chiefs. $ TROT- $ 

On the word march, the companies of the second squad- 
ron execute what has been prescribed in No. 1, for the com- 
panies of the first squadron. The companies of the third 
squadron conform to what is prescribed in the same No. for 
the companies of the second and third squadrons ; and the 
companies of the first squadron to what is prescribed in No. 
2, for the companies of the first and second squadrons. 

Movement No. 4, from line. 
'To break to the right into column. (Fig. 18.) 

Commanding officer, re- ) BY COMPANY, RIGHT- 
peated by chiefs of squad- } WHEEL, WALK (or TROT) 
rons, ) -MARCH. 

On the word march, the companies wheel to the right, 
and receive from their chiefs the words, halt, left-dress, 
followed by front. 

Should it be intended to move the column forward, the 
commanding officer gives the words, column forward, 
guide-left, walk (or trot)-march, and the whole move 
forward at the pace indicated. 

If, while the column is in march, it be intended to change 
direction by the head, the commanding officer gives the words, 
head of column to the right, (or left,) when the chief 
of the leading company adds, company, right (or left) 
wheel-march. The company having wheeled into the new 
direction, its chief gives the word forward, and the compa- 
ny resumes the direct march. Each company, on arriving 
on the ground where the first wheeled, executes the same 
movement, receiving from its chief the same command. 

Movement No. 5, from line. 
To break to the right, to march to the left. (Fig. 19.) 

n j. «. t ( BY COMPANY, BREAK 

Commanding officer, repeat- N TQ • TQ 

ed by chiefs of squadrons, } MARCII TO THE L ' EFT . 
O 157 



30 PART II. CAVALRY. 

Chief of Right Company, 1st Squadron — Company, for- 
ward, guide-left. 

Commanding officer, i WALK or ) tu ApptT 
repeated by same chief, ( TROT- } 

On the word search, the right company of the first squad- 
ron advances ten paces, wheels to the left by command of 
its chief, and marches forward. The other companies do 
the same, in succession ; their chiefs giving the command in 
time to enable them to take their proper distances in column. 

Movement No. 6, from Line. 

To break by the right, to the rear, to march to the left. 
(Fig. 20.) 

f BY COMPANY, BY 

Commanding officer, repeat- j THE RIGHT, BREAK 
ed by chiefs of squadrons, 1 TO THE REAR, TO 

I MARCH TO THE LEFT. 

Chief of Right Company, 1st Squadron — Company, right 
about-wheel. 

Commanding officer, re- i WALK or > MA rpij 
peated by same chief, £ TROT- ] MAKUil - 

On the word march, the right company of the first squad- 
ron wheels about, receives the words forward, guide left, 
from its chief, marches ten paces to the rear ; wheels again 
to the right by command of its chief, and again receiving the 
word forward, continues its march. The other companies 
are, in succession, wheeled to the right-about by their chiefs, 
and moving to the rear in like manner, follow in column. 

The movements in this and the preceding number, are in- 
tended for the passage of defiles in front and rear of the left. 

Movement No. 7, from Line. 
To ploy into close column, on second squadron. (Fig. 21.) 

n a- m ♦ ( CLOSE COLUMN ON 

Commanding officer, repeat- \ SEC0ND SQUADRON, 
ed by chiefs of squadrons, ^ RIGHT IN FRONT.* 
Chief of 1st squadron — Squadron, fours left. 
Chief of 3d squadron — Squadron, fours right. 

* The base for the covering of the pivots is given by the markers of the 
second squadron, placed in front of the left flank of the leading squadron, 
facing to the rear. 

158 



PART II. CAVALRY. 31 

Commanding officer, repeated ( WALK or > at a pen 
by chiefs of 1st & 3d squadrons, ( TROT- $ 

On the word march, the second squadron stands fast, its 
chief giving the words guide left. The first squadron hav- 
ing wheeled fours left, is conducted by its chief (on the right 
flank of the leading fours) along the front of the second 
squadron ; when abreast of the fourth file from the left of 
the second squadron, the chief of the first squadron gives the 
words halt, fours right, left-dress, and front. The third 
squadron having wheeled fours right, is conducted by its 
chief (on the left flank of the leading fours) towards its place 
in rear of the second squadron ; he himself halts where its 
left will cover on the second squadron, allows his squadron 
to pass him, and as soon as the left is up with him, gives the 
words halt, fours left, followed by left-dress and front. 

The above instructions are applicable to the formation of 
close column on a flank squadron, by naming it in the cau- 
tion, with either the right or left in front ; the chiefs of squad- 
rons giving their commands accordingly. 

Movement No. 8, from Line. 
To advance in echellon of squadrons. (Fig. 22.) 

n A . *. . ( ADVANCE IN ECHEL- 

Commandingomcer, repeat- N L0N op SQUADR0N s 
ed by chiefs of squadrons, ^ FROM THE RIGHT. 

Chief of 1st squadron — Squadron forward. 

Commanding officer, i WALK or > m appr 
repeated by same chief, $ TROT- \ 1V1AKUW - 

On the caution to advance, the squadron-markers place 
themselves on the right and left of the front-rank of their 
squadrons. On the word march, the first squadron ad- 
vances. The remaining squadrons receive the word march, 
from their chiefs, in succession, as soon as each has got a 
distance equal to its front and interval from the one which 
precedes it ; the right markers of squadrons taking care to 
preserve that distance and interval. During this march the 
guide is to the right. 

The retreat in echellon is exactly like the advance, each 
squadron wheeling to the right-about by fours, just"" in time 
not to lose its distance from the one before it. In the cau- 
tion, the word retire is substituted for advance. 

159 



32 PART II. CAVALRY. 

When squadrons, having advanced inechellon, are requir- 
ed to form line to the front, the squadron, on which the line 
is to be formed, is named ; those squadrons in front, if any, 
are wheeled about by fours to the right, and the whole move 
into line upon the named squadron. 

When a formation into line is required to the left, the 
squadrons wheel to that hand, and form line upon a named 
squadron. 

If, while advancing in echellon from the right, it be re- 
quired to form an oblique line to the left, the squadrons close 
to company distance, on the named squadron, and then half 
wheel to the left into line. 

Movement No. 9, from Line. 

Passage of lines to the front. (Fig. 23.) 

n ,. ~ t ( ADVANCE BY FOURS 

Commanding officer, repeat- } FR0M THE RIGHT OF 
ed by chiefs of squadrons. i SQUADRONS 

Chiefs of squadrons— -fours right — leading fours, left- 
wheel. 

Commanding officer, { WALK or > |\f ADpxj 
repeated by same chiefs, \ TROT- \ 

On the word march, each squadron wheeling fours right, 
and its leading fours again to the left, advances through the 
intervals of the line in front, each squadron passing on the 
right of the squadron in its front. 

When the line is to be formed again, the commanding of- 
ficer gives the words, front into line-march, (repeated by 
chiefs of squadrons,) when each squadron forms on its lead- 
ing fours ; the chiefs dress their squadrons by the right, and 
then resume their places. 

The intervals of heads of squadrons from each other, are 
preserved from the first squadron. 

Movement No. 10, from Line. 
Passage of lines to the rear. (Fig. 24.) 

Commanding officer, repeat- \ FRQM THE 
ed by chiefs of squadrons, i SQUADRONS. 

Chiefs of squadrons — Fours right — leading fours, right- 
wheel. 

160 



PART II. CAVALRY. 33 

Commanding officer, $ WALK or > mappr 
repeated by same chiefs, $ TROT- $ MAJ ^ n - 

On the word march, each squadron, wheeling fours right, 
and its leading fours again to the right, retires. The inter- 
vals of the heads of squadrons from each other are preserv- 
ed from the first squadron. Each squadron passes through 
the interval, on the left of the squadron in its rear. 

When the columns approach within fifty yards of the 
place where the commanding officer intends to reform his 
line, the lieutenant-colonel moves forward and establishes a 
marker at the point where the right of the first squadron is 
to rest. The left squadron markers then move out and mark 
the points where the left of their squadrons are to rest on the 
line, and each chief conducts his squadron, round his left 
marker, towards the point where the right of his squadron 
is to rest, and when there, gives the words halt, fours left, 
right-dress, followed by front, and resumes his place in 
line. 

Movement No. 1 1 , from Line. 

To march in Line. 

To cause the regiment to advance in line, the commanding 
officer gives the caution, regulate ox-squadron. Squad- 
rons forward, (repeated by chiefs of squadrons,) on which 
all the squadron markers move to the right and left of the 
front-rank of their respective squadrons. If the first, cen- 
tral, or any intermediate squadron is to be the regulating one, 
the lieutenant-colonel causes the right marker of that par- 
ticular squadron to place himself exactly in front of the right 
guide of his squadron, on a line with the officers, and desig- 
nates to him the point on which he is to march. If the re- 
gulating squadron is on the left of the centre, the left marker 
of that particular squadron is placed in like manner, in front 
of the left guide of his squadron. 

These dispositions being made, the commanding officer 
gives the word march, (repeated by chiefs of squadrons,) 
and the whole move forward. The officers in front of squad- 
rons maintain themselves on the alignment of the marker 
of the regulating squadron, without regarding the dressing 
of their men. Each squadron dresses towards the regulat- 
ing one, and the intervals are preserved in that direction. 

O '2 161 



34 PART II. CAVALRY. 

The squadrons should, if any thing, be rather behind, than 
in advance of the regulating squadron. 

If an obstacle present itself in front of a platoon, compa- 
ny, or squadron, its chief places it behind the platoon, com- 
pany, or squadron, to his right or left, according to circum- 
stances, by wheeling by platoons to the right or left ; and 
when the obstacle is passed, bringing it into line by a con- 
trary movement. 

If, while marching in line, it be intended to gain ground 
to the front and to a flank, the commanding officer gives the 

WOrds, BY COMPANY, RIGHT (or LEFT) HALF WHEEL-MARCH, 

and when sufficiently wheeled, he adds forward guide 
right (or left ;) the whole move in the direction indicated, 
in echellon of companies. To bring them again into line, 
and to continue the direct march, the commanding officer 
gives the words, by company, left (or right) half- 
wheel, march, and when wheeled into line, he adds for- 
ward, when the line moves forward, conforming to what 
has already been prescribed. The commands here given, 
are repeated by chiefs of squadrons. 

To halt the regiment, marching in line, the commanding 
officer gives the words, regiment, halt. At the word 
halt, repeated by chiefs of squadrons, each squadron halts. 
The markers of the regulating squadron place themselves 
facing to the right, in front of the right and left files of their 
squadron, a little in advance of the line of officers, so as not 
to be masked by them, and are rectified on the alignment by 
the lieutenant-colonel. The right markers of squadrons on 
the right of the regulating one, and the left markers of those 
on its left, step out, face towards the markers already es- 
tablished, and are rectified on them by the lieutenant-colonel. 
The commanding officer then gives the words, on — squad- 
ron-dress, when each squadron moves forward on the 
alignment, dressing towards the regulating squadron. The 
alignment being completed, the commanding officer gives 
the word front, and the markers retire. 

In the retreat in line, the same rules apply as in the ad 
vance, the squadrons wheeling about by fours, and the file- 
closers acting as leaders, except that they give no commands. 

The march in line being a difficult and important move- 
ment, should be frequently practised, in order to render it as 
familiar and as easy as possible. 

162 



PART II. CAVALRY. 35 

Movements from Close Column, No. 1. 
To deploy on second squadron. (Fig. 25.) 
Commandingofficer, \ DEPLOY ON SECOND SQUAD- 

Chief of 1st squadron — Fours right. 

Chief of 3d squadron — Fours left. 

Commanding officer, < WALK or \ MARP t 
repeated by same chiefs, \ TROT- \ MAUUJrl - 

On the word march, the first squadron leads out to the 
right, and the third squadron leads out to the left, each con- 
ducted by its chief. The chief of the first squadron, when 
opposite the ground on which the left of his squadron is to 
rest, halts, and lets his squadron march past him ; when the 
last rank of fours is abreast with him, he gives the words, 
first squadron, halt— fours left — left-dress, followed by 
front. In like manner, the chief of the third squadron, 
when opposite the point where the right of his squadron is 
to rest, halts, lets his squadron march past him, and when 
the last rank is abreast with him, gives the words, third 
squadron, fours right, forward, guide right, and when 
abreast with the rear-rank of the second squadron, halt, 
right-dress, followed by front. The chief of the base 
squadron, (the 2d,) the moment his front is unmasked, gives 
the words, second squadron, forward, guide left, and 
when within two paces of the line, he halts his squadron and 
aligns it by the right on the markers. 

The above example is applicable to the deployment of a 
close column on any named squadron. 

Movement No. 2, from Close Column. 

To wheel into line on the rear squadron. (Fig. 26.) 

Commanding officer— ON THIRD SQUADRON, LEFT 
INTO LINE.f 

Chief of 3d squadron — Third squadron, left-wheel. 

Chiefs of 1st & 2d squadrons — 'Squadron, forward. 

Commanding officer, repeat- i WALK or > iu a rcR 
ed by chiefs of squadrons, ( TROT- $ 

*On the caution, the base is given by the markers of the second squad- 
ron, placed at points where the flanks of that squadron are to rest in line ; 
they face to the right 

t On the caution, the base is given by the markers of the third squadron, 

f)laced at points where the flanks of that squadron are to rest, facing to the 
eft. 

1C3 



36 PART II. CAVALRY. 

On the word march, the first and second squadrons ad- 
vance ; each, as soon as it has got its proper distance from 
the one in its rear, receives from its chief the words left- 
wheel, followed by forward, and as it arrives on a line 
with the third squadron, halt, left-dress, front. The 
third squadron wheels to the left, receives from its chief the 
word forward, and when it has moved up three horses' 
lengths, halt, left-dress, front. 

If the column be required to form line to the right (re- 
verse) flank, the caution is given, by inversion, on third- 
squadron, right into line ; the movements and com- 
mands are the same, only substituting right for left. 

The column may also, in both cases, be opened from the 
front or centre, as well as from the rear ; the squadrons in 
the rear going about by fours, and fronting when they have 
got their proper distances, and those in front of the named 
one advancing. The formation is the same as already laid 
down. 

Movement No. 3, from Close Column. 
To change direction from a halt. (Fig. 27.) 

Commanding officer— CHANGE DIRECTION BY THE 
RIGHT FLANK.* 

Chiefs of squadrons — Fours right. 

Commanding officer, ( WALK or > ,j at? pit 
repeated by same chiefs, \ TROT- $ ~ 

On the word march, the front squadron, receiving from 
its chief left wheel, and then forward, moves straight in 
the new direction ; its chief halting himself at the point 
where its left is to rest, and permitting his squadron to march 
past him ; when the last rank comes abreast with him, he 
gives the words, halt, fours-left, left-dress, aligns his 
squadron on the markers, and adds, front. The second 
and third squadrons are conducted by their chiefs, who halt 
when arrived at the points where the left of their squadrons 
are to rest, let their squadrons march past them in the new 
direction, and when the last rank is abreast with them, they 
give the words, halt, fours-left, left-dress, followed by front. 

* On the caution, the base is given by the markers of the headmost squad- 
ron, placed at points where the"flanks of that squadron are to rest, facing to 
the right. 

164 



TART II. CAVALRY. 87 

In changing direction by the left flank, each chief con- 
ducts his squadron until its left flank arrives at the point 
where it is to rest. 

Movement No. 4, from Close Column. 
Countermarch. (Fig. 28.) 

Commanding officer— COLUMN, COUNTERMARCH. 

Chiefs of Squadrons — File to the right. 

Commanding officer, $ WALK or \ MA rpr 
repeated by same chiefs, \ TROT- $ MAK <- H - " 

On the word countermarch, the left markers place them- 
selves one yard beyond the left of their squadrons, facing to 
the rear, the croups of their horses six yards in rear of the 
rear-rank. The file-closers place themselves on the left of 
their squadrons ; those of the right companies, abreast with 
the front-rank ; the junior captains on their left ; those of 
the left companies abreast with the rear-rank. 

On the words, File to the Right, the right hand men of 
both ranks turn to the right-about, and the front-rank man 
moves up on the left of his rear-rank man ; the remainder 
turn their horses' heads towards the right. 

On the word march, the leading file of each squadron 
wheels to the right, passes near the rear-rank, and when 
nearly opposite the left marker, each man, on a caution from 
his chief of squadron, turns to the left, halts, and dresses to 
the right, the front-rank man placing himself on the left of 
the marker. The other files move off their ground in suc- 
cession, front and rear-rank men together, as it comes to 
their turn, wheel at the same point where the leading file 
wheeled, and when arrived opposite to their places in line, 
each man turns to the left, and forms up to the rank to which 
he belongs, dressing to the right. The officers and file- 
closers follow the movement of the men, and take their 
places successively as they reach them. 

Movements from Open Column. No. 1. 
To form line to the left. (Fig. 29.) 

n A . n, . C LEFT INTO LINE- 

Commanding officer, repeat- > WHEEL># WALR 

ed by chiefs of squadrons, J TROT)-MARCH. 

* The base is given by the markers of the first squadron, placed at points 
where the flanks of the right company are to rest, feeing each other, and 
covered by the left markers of the other squadrons, at points where the left 
of their squadrons are to rest 

105 



38 PART II. CAVALRY. 

On the word march, the companies wheel left into line, 
receiving from their chiefs the words halt, right-dress, as 
soon as the wheel is completed. The chiefs of squadrons 
align their squadrons by the right, and then give the word 
front* 

Movement No. 2, from Open Column. 

To form line to the right by inversion. 

Commanding officer, ( BY INVERSION, RIGHT INTO 
repeated by chiefs of { LINE-WHEEL.* WALK (or 
squadrons, ( TROT)-MARCH. 

On the word march, the companies wheel right into line, 
receiving from their chiefs the words, halt, left— dress, as 
soon as the wheel is completed. The chiefs of squadrons 
align their squadrons by the left, and then give the word 
Front. 

Movement No. 3, from Open Column. 
To form line to the front. (Fig. 30.) 

Commanding officer, repeat- ) FRQNT INTQ LINE . 
ed by chiefs of squadrons, ) ' 

Chief of base company — Company, forward. 

Chief of company next the base — Company, left, half- 
wheel. 

Chiefs of 2d & 3d squadrons — By company, left, half- 
wheel. 



MARCH. 



Commanding officer, i WALK or > 
repeated by same chiefs, { TROT- $ 

On the word march, the base company advances three 
horses' lengths, and then receives from its chief the words, 
halt, right-dress. The other companies make a half 
wheel to the left, and then, receiving from the chiefs of 
squadrons the words, forward, guide— right, advance in 
echellon towards their places in line. Each, as it approaches, 
receives from its chief, right-wheel, followed by forward, 
and on arriving on a line with the rear-rank of the preced- 

*The base is given by the markers of the third squadron, placed at poinls 
where the flanks of the right company of that squadron are to rest, facing 
each other, and covered by the left markers of the other squadrons, at points 
where the left of their squadrons are to rest. 

t The base is given by the markers of the first squadron, placed at points 
where the flanks of the base company are to rest, facing to the rieht. 

16G 



PART II. CAVALRY. 31) 

mg company, halt, right-dress. Each chief of squadron 
aligns his squadron by the right, and then gives the word 
front. 

If the column be required to form line to the front by in- 
version, the caution is given, by inversion, front into 
line. The movement is performed according to the same 
principles, but by inverse means and commands ; the lead- 
ing company is established on the markers ; the other com- 
panies half- wheel to the right, and advance in echellon to- 
wards the line, each forming on the right of the one which 
precedes it. 

Movement No. 4, from Open Column. 

To form line to the front on rear company. (Fig. 31.) 

Commanding officer, repeat- \ ON REAR COMPANY, 
ed by chiefs of squadrons, \ FRONT INTO LINE.* 

Chief of company next the base — -Company, left half- 
wheel. 

Chiefs of 1st & 2d squadrons — By company, left half- 
wheel. 

Commanding officer, i WALK or > madou 
repeated by same chiefs, } TROT- $ MAKUJrl - 

On the word march, the whole, except the base company, 
(which stands fast,) move as follows : 

The companies make a half wheel to the left, -and receiv- 
ing from the chiefs of squadrons, the words, halt, fours 
right-about, followed by forward, guide-right, retire in 
echellon towards their places in line. Each, on approach- 
ing the line (taking care to leave sufficient space on its right 
to wheel fours about) receives from its chief the words, 
right— wheel, followed by forward, and when it has pass- 
ed the line a horse's length, halt, fours right— about, left- 
dress. 

Movement No. 5, from Open Column. 
To form line faced to the rear. (Fig. 32.) 
Commanding officer, repeat- \ INTO LINE, FACED 
ed by chiefs of squadrons, \ TO THE REAR.f 

* The base is given by the markers of the third squadron, placed in front 
of the right and left files of the left company, facing to the left. 

t The base is given by the markers of the first squadron, placed on the 
new line, at points where the flanks of the right company are to rest, and 
facing towards the right flank. 

107 



40 PART II. CAVALEY. 

Chief of base company — Company, left about-wheeL 

Chiefs of 2d & 3d squadrons, ) ^ . , 

and company next the base, } ° 

Commanding officer r i WALK or > at a -Rptr 
repeated by same chiefs, { TROT- $ 

On the word march, the base company wheels left about 
and receives from its chief the words, halt, right-dress. — 
The other companies move off together, and are conducted 
by their chiefs to the points where their left will stand on the 
new line, being marked by squadron markers ; each chief 
conducts his company round the marker, and when the head 
of the company arrives near its point of formation, leaving 
space sufficient to wheel by fours, he gives the words, halt, 
fours-left, right-dress. 

Movement No-. 6, from Open Column. 

To form line faced to the rear on rear company. (Fig. 33.) 

r ,. ~ . ( ON REAR COMPANY, 

Commanding officer, repeat. > INTQ LmE ^ 

ed by chiefs oi squadrons, i THF RFAR * 

Chief of base company — Company, left-ab out— wheel. 
Chiefs of 1st & 2d squadrons — By company, left-wheel- 
Commanding officer, i WALK or > M . pnn 
repeated by same chiefs, \ TROT- ] MAKUil - 

On the word march, the base company wheels left about 
receives from its chief the word forward, and after advanc 
ing three horses' lengths, halt, left-dress. The othei 
companies wheel three-quarters left, and receiving from their 
chiefs of squadrons the words, forward, guide-left, ad- 
vance in echellon towards their places in line ; each, on ap- 
proaching the line, receives from its chief the words, left- 
wheel, followed by forward, and on arriving on a line with 
the rear-rank of the preceding company, halt, left-dress. 

Movement No. 7, from Open Column. 

To form line by two movements. (Fig. 34.) 

A column having changed direction to the right, or re- 
verse flank, may form line to its former front, as follows : 

* The base is given by the markers of the third squadron, placed on the 
new line, at points where the flanks of the left company are to lest, and 
facing towards the left flank 

16S 



PART II. CAVALRY. 41 

( LEFT INTO LINE-WHEEL, 
Commanding officer, 7 REAR SQUADRON, FRONT 

( INTO LINE.* 
Chiefs of 1st & 2d squadrons — Left into line-wheel* 
Chief of 3d squadron — Front into line* 
Commanding officer, ( WALK or > jyr a dqjj 
repeated by same chiefs, } TROT- $ 

On the word march, the companies of the first and se- 
cond squadrons wheel into line, as prescribed in movement 
No. 1, from open column; and the companies of the third 
squadron form to the front into line, as prescribed in move- 
ment No. 2, from open column. 

Movement No* 8, from Open Column* 
To form line by two movements* (Fig. 35.) 

A column having changed direction to the left, or pivot 

flank, may form line to its former rear, as follows : 

( LEFT INTO LINE-WHEEL. 

Commanding officer, { REAR SQUADRON INTO 

( LINE FACED TO THE REAR.* 

Chiefs of 1st & 2d squadrons — Left into line-wheel* 

nu- c c oa j $ Into line, faced to the rear* 

Chief of 3d squadron, < r ,, j, ^ • l4 

^ ' l followed by fours-right. 

Commanding officer, i WALK or 1 « . rpr 
repeated by same chiefs, \ TROT- $ 

On the word march, the companies of the first and se- 
cond squadrons wheel into line, as prescribed in movement 
No. 1, from open column ; and the companies of the 3d 
squadron form line faced to the rear, as in movement No. 5, 
from open column. 

Movement No. 9, from Open Column. 

To form on right into line. (Fig. 36.) 

Commanding officer, re- C ON RIGHT INTO LINE- 
peated by chiefs of squadrons J GUIDE RIGHT, f 

* The base in these two movements is given by the markers of the first 
squadron, placed on the new line, at points where the flanks of the right 
company are to rest, facing each other. 

t The base is given by the markers of the first squadron, placed on the 
new line, at points where the flanks of the right company are to rest, facing 
to the right. 

P 169 



42 FART II. CAVALRY. 

Chief of base company — Company, right-wheel. 

Commanding officer, repeat- i WALK or > ]yr ARCH 
ed by chief of base company, } TROT- $ 

On the word march, the leading company wheels to the 
right, receives from its chief the word forward, and when 
it has advanced a distance equal to its front, halt, right- 
dress. The other companies pass along the rear of the 
leading company ; each in succession, as soon as it arrives 
opposite its place in line, receives from its chief the words, 
right-wheel, followed by forward, and when on a line 
with the rear-rank of the preceding company, halt, right- 
dress. 

Movement No. 10, from Open Column. 
To form close column. 

Commanding officer, repeat- ) FORM CLOSE CO- 
ed by chiefs of squadrons, $ LUMN. 

Chiefs of right companies of squadrons — Company, for- 
ward. 

Chiefs of left companies of squadrons — Company, left- 
oblique. 

Commanding officer, i WALK or > marph 
repeated by same chiefs, \ TROT- \ MA * un - 

On the word march, the leading company advances three 
horses' lengths, and receives from its chief the word halt. 
The other right companies move straight forward. The let! 
companies oblique to the left, at double the pace, till their 
right flanks are uncovered ; they then receive the word for- 
ward, from their chiefs, followed by walk, when in line 
with their right companies. Each squadron, as soon as 
formed, receives the words, guide-left, from its chief, and 
when moved up to its proper place in column, halt, left- 
dress, followed by front. 

Skirmishing. 

Skirmishers are usually employed to gain time, to watch 
the movements of the enemy, to keep him in check, and to 
prevent him from approaching so close to the main body as 
to annoy the line of march. On service, regularity in skir- 
mishing and correctness of distance cannot always be main- 
tained, on account of the movements of the enemy and the 
nature of the ground. It is, nevertheless, essential, that some 

170 



PART II. CA.VALRY. 43 

general rules should be laid down, which may be easily con- 
formed to and applied, according to circumstances. 

On ordinary occasions a few mounted men may be suffi- 
cient for this duty ; yet it is frequently necessary on service 
to employ whole squadrons as skirmishers. The following 
example embraces a company, which is deemed sufficient to 
cover the front and flanks of a regiment composed of three 
squadrons. One of the flank companies is usually employed 
for this purpose. 

LEFT COMPANY OF THIRD SQUADRON, > At 

SKIRMISH TO THE FRONT-MARCH. ] the 

word march, the company named moves forward ten paces, 
and the men deploy as skirmishers, extending so as to cover 
the whole front of the squadron, as well as its flanks ; for 
this purpose, the man on the right of the front-rank moves 
in an oblique direction, towards a point sixty paces in ad- 
vance, and beyond the right flank of the regiment ; the man 
on the right of the rear-rank follows his file-leader, and then 
moves to his left on the same alignment ; the other files con- 
form themselves to this movement, placing themselves at 
equal intervals from each other. 

In advancing, the skirmishers draw the left pistol, the 
sword hanging to the wrist. When the regiment is advanc- 
ing, the forward march is sounded, when the skirmishers 
move forward, and afthe sound commence firing, they be- 
gin the fire. When the halt is sounded, the skirmishers 
halt, and observe the movement of the regiment, to which 
they conform. If it turn to the right, or left, they do the 
same singly, to cover the front ; if the regiment retire, the 
march in retreat is sounded, when the skirmishers retire 
by a checquered movement, as follows : — All the skirmishers 
who belong to the front-rank wheel about singly to the left, 
march fifty paces to the rear, and then resume their front by 
wheeling about singly to the right. The same movements 
are made by the rear-rank men, who place themselves fifty 
paces in rear of the others, and so on as long as the regi- 
ment continues in retreat. 

When the regiment resumes its front, the halt is sounded, 
at which the skirmishers halt and form again on the same 
line. Cease firing is then sounded, and afterwards the 
rally, when they return by the shortest way to their places 
•n the regiment. 

171 



44 PART II. CAVALRY. 

Skirmishers always move out and return at a gallop : they 
never draw their pistols until they are deployed ; they never 
fire until within reach of the enemy, unless by order, and 
they should always keep their horses in motion, even when 
loading, to avoid becoming a mark to the enemy. They re- 
tire by wheeling about to the left, and resume their front by 
wheeling about to the right. When they reform again in 
company, they return pistol and carry sword. 

172 



Fig. 1. 



PART II. CAVALRY. 

Fig. 2. Fig. 3. 



Fig. 4. 



00000000 



- 



Fig. 5. 



Fig. 6. 



Fig. 7. 



CO 
CO 



Fig. a 



Fig. 9. 



0000 



Fig 10. 



00 
C9 
00 



Fig. 11. 



Fig. 12. 



Fig. 13. 



^ «ft 



to 
to 
to 

to 

to 



P2 



173 





TART II. 


CAVALRY. 




Fig 


. 14. 


Adjutant. ^^ ^Marker. 




<r> «o 






<r> <o 






<i> -<r> 






«n> <r> 






<x> *^> 




First Lieutenant. 


^-^ «> ^^ ^-5 Second Lieutenant. 




<r> <3> 






<r> <i> 






<x> -<r> 




Chief of Squ adron . <i> <5? 
ieut. Colonel. < ^ > <^ ^ ^ 


«r» Saddler. 
^-^ «=> Farrier. 




<3> <z> 


Junior Captain. 




-cr> -e=> 






<3> ■<=► 






<J^> <z> 




First Lieutenant. 


«=> ^ 5§> °> Second Lieutenant. 




•G> <3> 






<j> <r> 






<x> <r> 






<r> -cz> 






3=g 2B <r> Saddler. 
<s> -gz><^> <=> Farrier. 






Marker. 



:> <^=> Quarter-Master Sergeant. 

Marker. 



First Lieutenant. < _ > g ^| ^^ g^^ Lieutenant. 





5=5 2=5 


.^^. 


Chief of Squadron. 




V<=> ^P* ^^ 








S? «2^ 


^r> Veterinary Surgeon. 


irst Lieutenant. <=> | | §g <=> Second Lieutenant. 




■CO -«=» 






<r> <^> 






g§ < - > Saddler. 
«as> o <r> <^> Farrier. 



Marker. 



Marker. 



„■ . T • * „„„» <--> "C^ ^ <=> Second Lieutenant. 
First Lieutenant. <-> c> «== VJC "- 

<x> <^> 

Chief of Squadron. «g <S> <=> g 

Major. o=> <=> ^ ^ <=> ^ F irrkr - 

2g> ^ Junior Captain. 
<r> ■«=> 

<x> <^> 
<r> -<^> 

First Lieutenant. <r> ^ <E5 <=> Second Lieutenant. 



5E>2=? <=> Saddler. 

<=►<=><=> <=> Farrier. 

Sergeant Major. <;> Markor . 

174 



PART II. CAVALRY. 



Fig. 15. 



WP 



/ / 

/ / 



// / 



\J 



Fig. 17. 



\>(/f 



1/^f 1 



/ 



Fio. 1G. 



* mtrifl riniiif Atniilj |T7TnnTT7fi7ni 

/-ycyy> 



/ 



m / / 
/ / 



Fig. 18. 



Fig. 19. 



p mTTnrPTTTTTl fnTTTTTTTm 1"1 H fTTIU 11 Htt iJrflll 

Fig. 20. 



rc 



Fig. 21. 




Fig. 23. ^_^ 



ifiiunirniTifl nniinrmiiiH' "nrtni 



Fig. 22. 



ti ■ . . i .it 

[ =■- ■ - ■ ■ - -ill 
I 



I 

m *k*. ■,, i ,<■!,., i H v"""i r mTTT i rTTT n 

Fig. 24. 



rn tiiiriTriniTiin niumviinim 



/ / / 

/ / / 



175 



PART II. CAVALRY. 

2 1 



{"■■"■■■. : ■<■■■-■■■ < 



Fig. 25. 



Fig. 27. 






Fig. 26. 



|IL 






IS 



Fig. 28. 

liM.i.a.lftllflh*, 

IwiiiiiiiiwillililliiiiiiiliL * 



% 



Sjas, 



Fig 31 ^j\\ 

6^3 \\ \ 



Fig. 32. 

(llllllllllllllllllllJlA I.lillil l lMHilliillll -, Millld.n.lallKlillli 

rH / / // 

// //' 

E!3-' / / / 

// 

ifrrrrrn / / 

Fig. 36. 



176 



Fig. 29. 



Fig. 30. 

o-- o- a-' %■ 

!j ' . ■I ;,,,.| i: mi^l, ■ -J!" [ L^hJ,:_..j[ 

\\ \ \ S 

\/\ 

Fig. 33. 






Fig. 34. 



.:.: : r r-J i :i -. 




\ iiliL-' 

Fig. 35. 


l i. -'ill -^* 

jprp r^-^r 


*" ** 


|fc»tttu', J 






/ 



PART III. 



ARTILLERY TACTICS. 



CONTENTS OF PART THIRD. 



Page 
OF THE PIECE. 

Position of the men at the gun 5 

To unlimber the gun C 

Position of the men in battery 7 

To load and fire 7 

To limber the gun to move to the rear 10 

To limber the gun to move to the front 10 

To manoeuvre with bricoles 10 

To manoeuvre with horses 12 

OP THE BATTERY. 

In line 18 

In battery 19 

Parade 19 

In column of pieces 19 

In column of sections 20 

Movements 20 

Movements from line 21 

No. 1. To break into column to the front 21 

2. To break into column to the right, 21 

3. To break from the right to march to the left 22 

4. To break into column in retreat 22 

5. Marching in line to close intervals 23 

6. Marching in line to open intervals 23 

7. Being in line at closed intervals, to march in retreat _ . . 23 

8. Marching in line to pass obstacles 23 

9. Passing a defile 24 

10. To march by a flank -.24 

11. To change front forward on first section 24 

12. To change front to the rear on first section 25 

13. To change front on centre section 26 

Movements from column . . '. 26 

No. 1. To march in column, change direction and to halt 26 

2. To form line to the front 27 

3. To form line to the left 27 

4. To form line on the right 28 

5. To form line faced to the rear 28 

Increase and diminution of front 29 

To increase from column of pieces to column of sections 29 

To increase from column of sections to line 29 

To diminish from line to column of sections 30 

To diminish from column of sections, to column of pieces 30 

Exercise of casemate guns 30 

179 



4 

PRELIMINARY REMARK. 

Officers of ArtnleT^l^ewe" ^«f Jf d ^ 

the Infantry Tactics as well as those of the Cavalrj, 

rTr hat they may be capable of manoeuvring their 

a£t £ W» as to" conform thereto wtthou, 

eSrassing the movements of the other arms. ^ 



PART III. 



ARTILLERY. 



OF THE PIECE. 

The right and left of the piece, as relates to the station of 
the men, is determined by the position of the man placed in 
rear of the gun, and looking towards the muzzle. The re- 
verse is the case with the limber, the right and left of which 
is always determined by the right and left of the driver. 

The squad for the service of a field-piece, is formed in 
two ranks in close order, from right to left, as follows : — 
Chief of the piece, covered by the non-commissioned officer; 
No. 5, covered by No. 6 ; the gunner of the right, covered 
by the gunner of the left ; No. 3, covered by No. 4 ; No. 
1, covered by No. 2. 

If the squad, marching in line, halt in rear of the gun, it 
will take post in the following manner : 

SQUAD— BY LEFT FLANK, BY FILE RIGHT- 
POSTS-MARCH. — At the word maech, the squad faces to 
the left and wheels by file to the right; when within ten 
paces of the gun, the ranks oblique to the right and left on 
each side of the gun, and the men post themselves as fol- 
lows : (Fig. 1.) 

The chief of the piece, on a line with the end of the pole, 
one pace to the right, and facing the piece ; the norr-com- 
missioned officer on the left, opposite the swing-tree bar. If 
there be a caisson, he places himself near it; No.'s 5 & 6, 
abreast the naves of the small wheels ; the gunners abreast 
the cascable ; No.'s 3 & 4 abreast the naves of the large 
wheels, and No.'s 1 & 2 abreast the muzzle. The whole 
facing the gun, on lines eighteen inches from the ends of the 
axletrees, and dressing on No.'s 1 & 2. 

Q 181 



6 PART III. OF THE PIECE. 

No.'s 1 & 2 distribute the implements thus :— To No. 1, 

^"."and portlre-case. To No. 4 the = ^,re 
tube-box and ammunition-pouch. To the gunner or in, 
eft the Cer-stall. To No.'s 5 & 6, each an 
nouch The matrosses attached to the piece have also long 
Cots, wh\ch are hung from right to left over the ammo- 

ni 7T^ trive in front of the gun the men take their 
posts by inverse means, at the command, squad, by right 

FLANK, BY FILE LEFT-FOSTS-3IAKCII. 

To Unlimber. (Fig. 2.) 
ATTENTION-UNL1MBER— No. 5 moves to the mid- 
dle of the pole and raises it ; the gunner of the nght unhooks 
the Lhing'-chain, and aided by the gunner of the lef, ra.ses 
the trail. With twelve pounders, No. s 3 & 4 assist tne 

SU Wh r en the trail is disengaged from .the ""^r.No/sS&fi 
advance the limber three paces, and the trad . , le down 
the gunners place the ammunition-box on the limber bet een 
the hounds ; the gunner of the right then gives he word 
narct at which No.'s 5 & 6 move the limber tweWe paces 
to the rear, inclining to the right, and then wheel it left- 
about, the pole towards the gu» and covering , it. IV, 4 
unhooks the handspikes, gives one to No. 3, and thej hx 
them in the pointing-rings. No. 3 fixes the portfire to the 
stock, and No. 1 takes the sponge from Us hook. 

If the piece arrive on the ground m rear of the line which 
it is to occupy in battery, the word is given is battebl, 
immediately after the word rairainffl. The limber is , v . ith- 
drawn as above, and as soon as the ammunition-box is placed 
on it, it is wheeled left-about, and passing through the inter- 
val on the right of its piece, is moved twelve paces to the 
rear, and again wheeled left about. As soon as he hmfaei 
has passed the piece the gunners go to the pointing hand- 
spikes, and No.'s 1, 2, 3 and 4, to the wheels. The traiU, 
then turned right-about, and the men take their posts as be- 
'ore. 182 



PART III. OF THE PIECE. 



Position of the Gunners and Matrosses in Battery. 



(Fig 
On the Left* 

No. 2. On a line with the 
muzzle eighteen inehes, with- 
out the rim of the wheels, fac- 
ing the piece, with an ammu- 
nition-pouch slung from right 
to left. 



No. 4. On a line with the 
cascable, dressing on No. 2, 
holding the priming-wire in 
the right hand, the thumb 
through the ring ; the tube- 
box buckled round the waist, 
and an ammunition-pouch 
hanging on the left side. 

The gunner on a line with 
the middle of the trail hand- 
spikes, dressing by the left, 
and wearing the finger-stall 
on the middle finger of the 
left hand. 

No. 6, carrying an ammu- 
nition-pouch, is with the am- 
munition-box, and supplies 
No. 2 with ammunition. 



The non-commissioned offi- 
cer is with the caisson, forty- 
five paces in rear of the lim- 
ber ; or at, and in rear of, the 
ammunition-box, if there be 
no caisson. 



2.) 

On the Right. 

No. 1. On a line with the 
muzzle, eighteen inches with- 
out the rim of the wheel, fac- 
ing the piece, holding the 
sponge-staff horizontally with 
both hands ; the right hand, 
nails downwards, near the 
rammer head ; the left hand, 
nails upwards, about two feet 
from the sponge. 

No. 3. On a line with the 
cascable, dressing on No. 1, 
holding the lint-stock in his 
left hand, and the portfire- 
stock in his right ; the port- 
fire-case hanging on the left 
side. 

The gunner on a line with 
the middle of the trail-hand- 
spikes, dressing, by the right. 



No. 5, carrying an ammu- 
nition-pouch, is with the cais- 
son, near the non-commission- 
ed officer, or with the ammu- 
nition-box, if there be no cais- 
son. 

The chief of the piece is 
midway between the limber 
and the trail-handspikes, ob- 
serving all that passes at the 
gun, the limber and the cais- 
son. 



To Load and Fire. 

ATTENtlON-TO ACTION.— No. 1 steps to the left 

183 



8 PART III. OF THE PIECE. 

with the left foot eighteen inches, throwing the weight of the 
body on the left leg ; left knee bent ; right leg extended ; 
heels on a line parallel to the piece ; feet equally turned out 
and forming something less than a right angle ; sponge 
staff held horizontally in both hands, the right above, the 
left below the staff; the body steady; the arms hanging 
without contraint. 

No. 2 makes a similar movement to the right, throwing 
the weight of the body on the right foot. 

No. 3 unhooks the water-bucket, places it under the end 
of the axletree ; half faces to the left : plants his lint-stock 
in the ground ; lights his portfire, holding the stock in the 
right hand, fire downwards, and about four inches from the 
ground ; arms without constraint. 

No. 4 takes off the apron. 

The gunner of the right steps off with the right foot, 
places himself between the trail-handspikes, directs the piece 
and resumes his position, stepping off with the left foot. 

The gunner of the left stands fast. 

No. 5 advances briskly with ammunition from the cais- 
son, to replace No. 6. 

No. 6 moves quickly with ammunition in rear of No. 2 ; 
hands him a cartridge, and returns to the caisson to replace 
No. 5. 

LOAD. — The gunner of the left, stepping off with the 
right foot, advances to the breech of the gun, placing the 
left foot opposite the vent, inside the wheel, throwing the 
weight of the body forward on the left leg, the knee bent ; 
the right leg extended to the rear of the piece. He stops the 
vent with the middle finger of the left hand, at the moment 
the sponge reaches the bottom of the bore; presses hard 
upon the vent till the sponge is withdrawn, and removes his 
finger when the cartridge is inserted ; seizes the elevating 
screw with the right hand, and gives the proper elevation ; 
then raises himself erect on the right foot, steps back with 
the left, and resumes his position. 

No. 1 rises erect on his right leg ; raises the sponge-staff 
horizontally as high as the chin, extending the right arm the 
whole length, to pass the sponge over the wheel ; makes a 
long step with the left foot, which he places on a line with 
the swell of the muzzle ; throws out the right foot eighteen 
Inches to the right of the left heel, and on a line with it, the 

1S4 



PART III. OF THE PIECE. 9 

feet equally turned out, the body inclined to the right ; in- 
troduces the sponge, with the left hand, into the bore of the 
gun, pushes it to the bottom with the right, the left hand 
sliding along the staff, raising the body erect on the left leg, 
parallel with the piece ; casts his eye on the vent, to see that 
it is stopped; turns the sponge two or three times at the bot- 
tom of the bore, and then withdraws it by a uniform motion 
with the right hand, the body again inclined to the right, 
keeping his eye on the range of the sights of the piece ; re- 
ceives the staff near the sponge, on the palm of the left hand, 
with which he throws the sponge end over his right, letting 
the staff slide, through his right hand, until it comes near 
the sponge-head, and while it is thus sliding, drops the staff 
near the rammer-head, into the hollow of the left hand, be- 
tween the thumb and fingers, ready to enter the rammer- 
head into the bore. The cartridge being placed in the bore 
by No. 2, No. 1 pushes it home with one stroke, throwing 
the weight of his body on his right arm, to force the car- 
tridge to the bottom of the bore, and dropping the left arm. 
He withdraws the rammer by a smart impulse of the right 
hand, seizing the staff with the same hand, near the ram- 
mer-head, throwing over the sponge-head, and letting that 
end of the staff fall into his left hand in a horizontal posi- 
tion, at the same time resuming the position of to action, by 
stepping back with the right foot, and bringing the left on a 
line with the axle. 

No. 2 rises on the left leg, advances the right foot even 
with the swell of the muzzle, brings up the left, places the 
cartridge in the bore with the left hand, and resumes the 
position of to action, by stepping back with the left foot. 

No. 4 advances with the left foot, bringing up the right, 
pricks with the right hand, places the tube with the left, re- 
sumes his position by stepping back with the right foot, and 
makes the signal to No. 3, to fire, by raising his right hand 
above his head ; at which 

No. 3 raises the right arm, without bending the wrist, and 
applies the flame of the portfire to the tube, taking care not 
to hold it directly over the vent. 

The piece being fired, is again loaded in the same man- 
ner, by the command load. 

The fire ceases by a roll of the drum, or by the command 
to posts, at which No. 3 extinguishes the portfire, and all 
resume the position in halting. 

Q2 185 



10 PART III. OF THE PIECE. 

To limber the piece to move to the rear. 

ATTENTION-ADVANCE LIMBER-MARCH. — No. 

1 places the sponge in the sponge-hooks. No. 3 hooks the 
water-bucket. The gunners unfix the handspikes, and pass 
them to No. 4, who, with the aid of No. 2, secures them in 
the square ring and upon the hooks. No.'s 5 & 6 advance 
with the limber, obliquing to the right, so that in wheeling 
left-about, the limber may be three paces in rear of the trail. 
The gunners take the ammunition-box from the limber and 
place it between the flasks of the carriage, and then raise the 
trail so that the carriage can be placed on the pintle. No.'s 
5 & 6 back the limber, to bring the pintle under the lunette. 
The gunner of the right hooks the lashing-chain, and all re- 
sume their posts. 

To limber the piece to move to the front. 

ATTENTION-LIMBER TO THE FRONT-MARCH.- 
No.'s 5 & 6 advance the limber three paces in front of the 
muzzle, in such manner as that the left wheel of the limber 
shall be on a line with the right wheel of the piece, passing 
on the right, the gunners and matrosses stepping near the 
flasks, to let the limber pass. As soon as it has passed, the 
gunners step to the trail-handspikes ; the matrosses to the 
wheels. The muzzle is then turned right-about on the right 
wheel, No. 2 placing his feet on the lower felloes of the right 
wheel, and supporting himself by the upper spokes. The 
trail is fixed upon the limber as before. 

To manozuvre with Bricoles. 

In manoeuvring with bricoles, it is necessary to increase 
the number of men for each piece. Two are therefore ad- 
ded to a six-pounder, four to a howitzer, and six to a twelve- 
pounder. These auxiliaries are numbered 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 
12. 

The piece being on its limber, the auxiliaries are stationed 
on each side of it, after the matrosses and towards the pole, 
one pace distant from each other, and provided with short- 
ened bricoles. The matrosses have their bricoles at full 
length. 

FORWARD.— (Fig. 3.)— The gunner of the left detach- 
es a handspike, and takes it to the end of the pole, where, 

186 



PART III. OF THE PIECE. 11 

assisted by the gunner of the right, he forms two loops with 
the breast-chains, through which he introduces the hand- 
spike across the pole horizontally. Both gunners place them- 
selves behind this handspike, and are assisted by No.'s 5 & 
G, who are stationed outside of them, to propel the piece. 
No.'s 1 & 2 hook their bricoles to the washer-hooks, 3 & 4 
to the retreat-hooks. The non-commissioned officer, when 
there is no caisson, is on the left of the chase. The auxil- 
iaries, No.'s 7 & 8, form on, and in rear of 1 & 2 — 9 & 10 
on 3 & 4. No.'s 11 & 12 are on each side of the chase. 
Those on the right, hook with the right hand — those on the 
left, with the left hand. 

MARCH. — All press forward, holding the bricole in the 
hand next the piece. 

HALT. — All stand fast, keeping the bricoles stretched. 

TO POSTS.— The men on the right turn to the left, and 
unhook with the left hand ; those on the left perform the 
same movement in an inverse manner ; the gunner of the 
left replaces the handspike, and all resume their posts. 

The commands unlmber and in battery, are executed 
in the manner already prescribed. The auxiliaries follow 
the limber, and take post on each side of the pole, one pace 
from each other. 

Being in battery, to advance and retreat. 

FORWARD.— (Fig. 4.)— The gunners seize the trail- 
handspikes with both hands : they are assisted by the non- 
commissioned officer, who is between them. No.'s 1 & 2 
hook their bricoles to the advancing hooks — 3 & 4 to the 
washer-hooks : those on the right, with the left hand — those 
on the left, with the right hand. No. 1 carries the sponge- 
staff horizontally in the right hand, the sponge-head forward. 
No.'s 5 & 6 are posted at the end of the pole of the limber, 
and with it follow the movements of the piece. No.'s 7 & 
8 double on 1 & 2, and 9 & 10 on 3 & 4. No.'s 11 & 12 
are at the supporting handspikes. 

MARCH. — The men at the handspikes raise the trail ; 
those with bricoles draw with spirit, holding the trace with 
the hand next the piece. No.'s 5 & 6 conduct the limber, 
preserving the prescribed distance from the piece. 

HALT. — The trail is lowered to the ground, and the bri- 
coles extended. 

187 



12 " PART III. OP THE PIECE. 

TO POSTS. — The men face outward from the piece, and 
unhook bricoles ; those on the right, with the right hand — 
those on the left, with the left hand, and all resume their 
posts. 

RETREAT.— (Fig. 5.)— The gunners seize the trail- 
handspikes with one hand, facing to the rear. The non- 
commissioned officer is on the left of the muzzle. No.'s 1 
& 2 hook to the washer-hooks, 3 & 4 to the retreat-hooks, 
those on the right, with the right hand — those on the left 
with the left hand. No.'s 5 & 6 wheel the limber left-about, 
to precede the piece. No.'s 7 & 8 double on 1 & 2, and 9 
& 10 on 3 & 4. No.'s 11 & 12 are at the supporting hand- 
spikes. 

TO POSTS.— The men face outwards: those on the 
right unhook with the left hand — those on the left, with the 
right hand. No.'s 5 & 6 wheel the limber left-about, the 
pole towards the piece, and all resume their posts. 

FRONT-FACE.— All face to the front, No.'s 1 & 2 
abreast the muzzle, 3 & 4 abreast the naves, the gunners 
abreast the cascable, 5 & 6 abreast the end of the pole, the 
auxiliaries in their rear, one pace from each other ; the non- 
commissioned officer in rear of the ammunition-box. No. 1 
carries the sponge horizontally in the right hand. 

If the piece be on the limber, the word rear-face is sub- 
stituted for FRONT-FACE. 

In descending a hill, it may be necessary to support the 
piece in retreat, to prevent a too rapid descent ; in such case 
the chief of the piece gives the words, No.'s 1 and 2, (or as 
many as necessary) support— in retreat. Those desig- 
nated take the bricoie from the shoulder. No.'s 1 & 2 hook 
to the advance-hooks, the others 'at the washer-hooks, hold- 
ing the straps of the bricoles in the hand. 

To manmuvre with Horses. 

Four horses are required for the piece, and the same num- 
ber for the caisson. In the movement of the piece with horses, 
the right and left implies that side as relates to the drivers. 

The piece is supposed to be on its limber, with its caisson 
in rear, and to be served by a squad either on horse or foot. 

The men on foot take post in the manner already pre- 
scribed, except the chief of the piece and the non-comrnission- 
ed officer, the former is on the left of the drivers of the 

188 



PART III. OF THE PIECE. 13 

leading horses of the gun, the latter in a corresponding po- 
sition at the caisson. 

If the squad be mounted, it is formed in two ranks in rear 
of the piece. At the word to posts-march it moves up to 
within one pace of the muzzle ; the chief of the piece takes 
post on the left of the driver of the leaders and the non- 
commissioned officer at the caisson, as above. Two auxili- 
aries are added to the squad in horse artillery, to hold the 
horses ; their position is in the centre of each rank of the 
squad. 

FORWARD-MARCH.— The drivers urge their horses, 
and the piece advances followed by its caisson, the leading 
horses of which are one pace from the muzzle of the piece ; 
or, in horse artillery, one pace from the rear-rank of the 
squad. 

To prepare for manoeuvring* (Fig. 6.) 

HALT-UNUMBER-F1X-PROLONGE.— The limber 
being withdrawn the giinners uncoil the prolonge : the gun- 
ner of the left passes the pointed end downwards through the 
right staple-ring of the limber, then under the guides, and 
upwards through the left staple-ring, drawing it so that the 
ring of the prolonge, twenty-four feet from the key, may be 
under the centre of the sweep-bar, and securing it under the 
guides with the prolonge knot. The gunner of the right 
passes the key (or T) through the lashing ring in the trail- 
transom, draws it up, and secures it in the prolonge ring 
under the sweep-bar. The prolonge is then double, or twelve 
feet long, which is the proper length for firing in retreat or 
advance. 

In horse artillery, at the word unlimber, the gunner of 
the right gives the word dismount, when all, except the two 
auxiliaries, dismount ; each man draws the curb-reins through 
the loop of the martingale, passing the end under the cloak- 
strap near the left knee, gives the snaffle-reins to the auxili- 
aries, and takes his post as in foot artillery. When the chief 
of the piece and the non-commissioned officer dismount, the 
former gives his horse to one of the drivers of the piece and 
the latter to one of the drivers of the caisson. 

The prolonge being fixed, the gunner of the right gives 
the word mount, when all mount and take post in rear of 
the piece. 

189 



14 PART III. OF THE PIECE. 

If the prolonge is to be fixed for crossing a ditch, the com- 
mand is given-Fix prolonge for passing a ditch — The 
key is secured in the lashing-ring, and the prolonge is at its 
full length, twenty-four feet. 

To coil the prolonge, the command is given-uNFix and 
coil prolonge— advance limber. — The gunner of the right 
disengages the key from the lashing-ring ; the gunner of the 
.left coils the prolonge round the end of the hounds; the 
drivers rein back their horses, the chief of the piece directing 
so that the trail may pass over the pintle, and the piece is 
limbered. 

The prolonge must be always uncoiled and fixed before 
the piece arrives in line. 

To change direction. 

A piece manoeuvring with the prolonge may be wheel- 
ed on either a moveable or fixed pivot. In the first case, the 
prolonge is stretched and the piece is turned advancing. In 
the second, the prolonge is slackened by backing the wheel 
horses, which are then turned short to enter the new direction. 

PIECE-LEFT WHEEL-MARCH.— The driver of the 
leading horses takes the new direction, and when the wheel 
is completed, the chief gives the word forward-march*^ 

The caisson wheels at the same point where its piece had 
wheeled, the non-commissioned officer giving the words 
caisson-left u-h eel— march. 

Wheeling to the right is performed on the same principle. 

All wheels of the half circle are made to the left when 
practicable. 

PIECE-LEFT-ABOUT WHEEL-MARCH.— The lead- 
ing horses are wheeled left-about. The wheel-horses back 
the limber, and wheel left-about, the wheel of the limber 
passing over the prolonge. At the word wheel, the men 
on the right of the piece, face to the right, and passing the 
muzzle, move round and form in rear of the men on the 
left. — The wheel being completed, the men on the left, face 
to the left, pass the muzzle, and resume their posts on the 
left of the piece. 

To wheel the caisson left-about, it is first wheeled to the 
left, advances twelve paces, then wheels again to the left and 
obliques in the new direction. A piece on its limber wheels 
in the same manner. 

190 



PART III. OF THE PIECE. 15 

Iii Line and in Battery. 

A piece is in line, when the horses' heads are towards the 
enemy, and the leading horses of the caisson are forty-five 
paces from the muzzle of the gun. A piece is in battery 
when its muzzle is towards the enemy, the horses' heads to 
the rear, the leading horses of the piece forty-five paces from 
the caisson. 

Being in Line, to form in Battery. 

PIECE-LEFT- ABOUT WHEEL-MARCH.— The piece 
is wheeled left-about on a fixed pivot, and the men take their 
posts as in to action. 

In horse-artillery, at the word wheel, the gunner of the 
right gives the word dismount, and the horses are led six 
paces in rear of the leaders of the piece, facing the enemy. 

If, when marching in column of route, it become necessary 
to form battery, the caisson immediately wheels left-about, 
and moves to its proper distance in rear, where it again wheels 
left-about. 

If the piece were on its limber, it would oblique to the 
right before wheeling, so as not to lose its direction. 

To advance, from Battery. 

Forward-piece, left- \ The piece wheels left. 

ABOUT WHEEL-MARCH. \ about ; the caisson closes 
on its piece and both move forward. 

In horse-artillery the words trot-march are given, and if 
the distance to advance be considerable, the gunner of the 
right gives the word mount. 

Being in Battery to fire to the Rear. 

FIRE TO THE REAR— PIECE, LEFT-ABOUT 
WHEEL-MARCH.— The piece is wheeled rapidly left- 
about ; the caisson advances at a trot, passes the piece four 
paces to the right, obliques to the left, and takes its position. 
As soon as it has passed the firing commences. 

In horse-artillery, the men having charge of the horses 
move round with them, rapidly, in front of the horses of the 
piece. 

Being in March, to fire to the Rear. 

FIRE TO THE REAR— PIECE HALT-TO ACTION. 
—The piece halts, and the men take their posts as in to ac- 

191 



16 PART III. OP THE PIECE. 

tion. The caisson, passing four paces on the right of the 
piece, advances at a trot to its proper distance. 

In horse-artiilery, at the word halt, the gunner of the 
right gives the words-squad, forward, trot-march. — The 
squad moves six paces in front of the leaders of the piece, 
and the gunner adds halt-dismount, when the men take their 
posts at the gun. 

Being in March to form line to the Left. 

LEFT INTO LINE— PIECE, LEFT-CAISSON RIGHT 
— WHEEL-MARCH. — At the word march, the piece 
wheels to the left on a fixed pivot ; the caisson wheels to the 
right, moves sixty paces in rear of the piece, then wheels to 
the left, moves on until on a line with the piece, and wheels 
again to the left, covering the piece at forty-five paces. 

The formation to the right is made by inverse means. 

Being in March, to form Battery to the Left. 

BY INVERSION-LEFT INTO BATTERY. ) The piece 

PIECE, RIGHT WHEEL-CAISSON, } wheels to 

RIGHT OBLIQUE-MARCH.-= ) the right 

on a fixed pivot ; the caisson obliques to the right, and moves 
forty-five paces in rear of the piece. 

In horse-artillery, the gunner of the right gives the words 
squad, left-half wheel, followed by right-half wheel, and 
when clear of the piece, forward, right-wheel, to take post 
in front of the leaders ; when there he adds, right about 
wheel, halt, dismount. 

If there be not sufficient space on the right for this move- 
ment, or if manoeuvring with a corps, twenty paces in rear 
of the line on which the piece is to form battery, the com- 
mand is given-LEFT ixto batteky-piece, left— caisson, 
right wheel-march. — The piece wheels to the left, and 
advances in that direction Lintil it has passed ten paces beyond 
the line, when the chief gives the woi'ds-piece-left-about 
wheel-march — the piece wheels left-about and halts when 
the middle of the prolonge is on the line of formation. The 
caisson after wheeling to the right, moves to its proper dis- 
tance in rear, obliquing to the right and wheeling left-about. 

In horse-artillery, the squad halts and dismounts when the 
piece wheels to the left. 

Battery may be formed to the right by similar movement, 

192 



PART III. OF THE BATTERY. 17 

To March in Retreat. 

This differs from the march to the front only by the caisson 
preceding, instead of following the piece. If it be necessary 
to fire while retreating, the command is given, halt-to ac- 
tion, and the fire commences. In horse-artillery, the sqnad 
dismounts, and the horses are led round in front of the leaders. 



OF THE BATTERY. 



Six pieces, each with its caisson, are here supposed to con- 
stitute a battery. The pieces may be six or twelve-pounders, 
or twenty-four-pounder howitzers ; or they may be mixed. 
The pieces and caissons are numbered from right to left, and 
they should not, except in extraordinary cases, be inverted. 
Each chief, in giving the word for a movement, designates 
his piece by its number. 

The battery is divided into three sections, each section 
consisting of two pieces with their caissons, numbered from 
right to left. 

The battery is served by a company consisting of a cap- 
tain, four subalterns, and a certain number of non-commis- 
sioned officers and privates. The captain commands the bat- 
tery. Three subalterns (or in case of deficiency, senior 
sergeants) command sections — the senior the first section, 
the next the third section, and the next the second section. 
The junior subaltern commands the line of caissons, and is 
called officer of the train. 

A non-commissioned officer has charge of each piece and 
of each caisson, and directs their movements ; the senior 
non-commissioned officer of each section of caissons, is the 
chief of that section. Two non-commissioned officers act 
as guides or markers. 

The right and left of the battery, whether in line or in 

battery, is always the same, and is determined by standing 

in front of the battery, with the back towards the pieces ; in 

manoeuvring the right and left is determined by the position 

R 193 



18 PART III. OF THE BATTERY. 

of the drivers. Wheeling-about is always to the left, by 
pieces. 

Alignments are made on the drivers of the wheel-horses ; 
for parade, on the axletrees of the pieces. 

In line, the horses of the caissons front, as those of the 
pieces ; in battery, the reverse, except when formed in retreat 
or firing to the rear. 

In advancing, each piece precedes its caisson ; in retreat, 
each caisson precedes its piece ; and what is executed by the 
piece in the first case, applies to the caisson in the second. 
In either case, the right or left may be in front. 

The movements of the caissons are regulated by those of 
the piece, and by the orders of the officer of the train. 

For manoeuvring, the battery is formed either in line or 
in column of sections. Column of pieces is never used, but 
in passing a defile, or on a march, or moving into or out of 
park. 

A piece, or caisson, passing another, always moves to the 
right of the one passed. 

The prolonge is always used when manoeuvring in the 
presence of an enemy, and in the firings ; but when it is not 
necessary to form in battery, the pieces should be limbered. 
The words of command are the same in both cases. 

A piece with four horses, and its prolonge extended, occu- 
pies forty-four feet, and this interval must be preserved be- 
tween the pieces in line. 

When the right is in front, the guide is on the left ; the 
reverse is the case when the left is in front. 

In Line. (Fig. 7.) 

The pieces are aligned with intervals between them equal 
to the length of the piece, which vary according to the cali- 
bers, the number of horses, and as the pieces are limbered, 
or have their prolonges fixed. 

The caissons are aligned in rear of their pieces, the horses' 
heads towards the pieces ; the distance between the two lines 
being twice the length of the piece, reckoning from the heads 
of the leaders of the caissons to the muzzles of the pieces. 

The captain is in the centre, twelve paces in front of the 
leading horses ; the chiefs of sections between the pieces of 
their sections, six paces in front of the leading horses ; the 
chiefs of pieces one pace in front of the leaders of their 

194 



PART III. OF THE BATTERY. 19 

pieces ; the gunners and matrosses at their posts on the right 
and left of their pieces ; — in horse-artillery they are mount- 
ed and formed in two ranks, four paces in rear of the muz- 
zles of their pieces : the officer of the train, in the centre of the 
line of caissons, twelve paces in front of the leading horses ; 
the chiefs of caissons, one pace in front of their caissons ; 
the music four paces on the right, and in rear of, the muzzle 
of the first piece. 

The formation in line in retreat, is the same as in line to 
the front, except that, in horse-artillery, the mounted squads 
are four paces in front of the chiefs of their pieces. 

In Battery. (Fig. 8.) 

The heads of the horses of the pieces are to the rear, the 
leaders forty-five paces from the caissons. 

The captain is in centre of the battery, eight paces in front 
of the leading horses ; the chiefs of sections, in centre of 
their sections, on a line with the limbers ; the chiefs of pieces, 
midway between the limbers and the trails of their pieces ; 
the gunners and matrosses, (foot and horse,) at their posts, 
on the right and left of their pieces ; the horses of the squads, 
opposite their pieces, midway between the pieces and the 
caissons ; the officer of the train, opposite the centre of the 
caissons, eight paces in front of the leading horses ; the 
chiefs of caissons, at their caissons ; the music, four paces 
beyond the right flank of the battery, and midway between 
the pieces and caissons. 

Parade. 

The battery is drawn up in line, generally with the pieces 
on their limbers. 

The captain and chiefs of sections are at their posts in line. 
The gunners and matrosses, whether foot or horse, are form- 
ed in squads twelve paces in rear of the muzzles of the 
guns ; the chief of each piece on the right of his squad. The 
music are on a line with the squads, four paces beyond the 
right flank of the battery. 

In Column {right in front.) 

Column of pieces. 

Each caisson follows its piece, the leaders of the former, 
one pace from the muzzle of the latter. In horse-artillery, 

195 



20 PART III. OP THE BATTERY. 

the mounted squads are one pace from the muzzles of 
their pieces, and the leaders of the caissons one pace in their 
rear. 

The captain is on the left, abreast the centre of the co- 
lumn ; the officer of the train on the right of the column, 
abreast the captain ; the chief of the first section, at the 
head of the column, one pace in front of the leaders ; the 
chiefs of other sections, four paces from the left of the cen- 
tre of their sections ; the chiefs of pieces, by the side of the 
drivers of the leading horses of their pieces ; the chiefs of 
caissons, on the right of the column, by the side of their 
caissons ; the guides, one by the side of the driver of the 
leaders of the first piece, the other in rear of the last caisson ; 
the music six paces in front of the head of the column. 

Column of Sections, 

In foot-artillery, each carriage is six paces from the one 
which precedes it, measuring from the leaders to the muzzle 
of the gun, or rear of the caisson ; in horse-artillery, the 
same distance as in column of pieces. 

The chief of the first section, is two paces in advance of 
the centre of his section ; the chiefs of the other sections, in 
the centre of their sections, abreast the drivers of the leaders 
of their pieces; the chiefs of pieces of the first section, in 
front of their leaders ; the chiefs of caissons on the right of 
the drivers of their leaders ; the guides abreast of the chiefs 
of the leading pieces, two paces outside the horses ; the one 
on the left is charged with the direction of the column, the 
other preserves the proper distance between the files of pieces. 
All the other officers, non-commissioned officers, matrosses, 
and music, are placed as in column of pieces. 

In marching in retreat, the chiefs of sections and the 
guides take the same positions relatively to the caissons, 
which they occupy in regard to the pieces advancing. 

Movements. 

The following movements are laid down as performed from 
the right ; but they may be performed from the left, accord 
ing to the same principles. 

196 



TART III. OP THE BATTERY. 21 

Movements from Line. No. 1. 

To break into column to the front. (Fig. 9.) 

n ,. „• < ON FIRST SECTION, FRONT 

Commanding officer, | INTQ C0LUM ^ 

C Caissons forward, trot, march, the 

Officer of train, < caissons, and in horse-artillery, the 
( squads, close on their pieces.* 

Chief of 1st section — Section forward, guide left. 

Chiefs of other sections — Section right oblique. 

Commanding officer, re- > tvj appr 
peated by chiefs of sections, $ x 

On the word march, the first section, followed by its 
caissons, moves to the front ; the other sections oblique to 
the right and enter the column, each in rear of the one which 
precedes it ; as soon as they are in column, each chief gives 
the words forward, guide left. 

To break into column of pieces, the same means and com- 
mands are observed, substituting the word piece for section. 

Movement No. 2, from Line (Fig. 10.) 

To break into column to the right* 

' ,. ~ < BY SECTIONS, RIGHT INTO 

Commanding officer, J COLUMN. 

Officer of train — Caissons, forward, trot, march 

Chiefs of sections — Section, right wheel. 

Commanding officer, re- t MARCH< 
peated by chiefs of sections, ^ 

On the word march, the sections wheel to the right on 
fixed pivots, and move forward, receiving from the command- 
ing officer the words forward, guide left ; the caissons 
wheel a little before arrriving at the points where the pieces 
wheeled, and arrange themselves in column. 

To break into column of pieces, the same commands are 
used, substituting pieces for sections ; the pieces wheel on 
moveable pivots, in succession, as each has its distance from 
the one which precedes it. 

* This movement for caissons and squads is the same for all formations in 
column. 

R2 197 



22 PART III. OP THE BATTERY. 

Movement No. 3, from Line. 
To break from the right to march to the left. (Fig. 11.) 

) BY SECTIONS, BREAK FROM 
Commanding officer, V THE RIGHT TO MARCH TO 
) THE LEFT. 

Officer of train — Caissons forward, trot, march. 

Chief of 1st section — Section forward, guide left. 

Commanding officer, repeat- > tm APpu 
ed by chief of 1st section, $ 

On the word march, the first section, followed by its 
caissons, moves forward thirty paces, then wheels to the left 
and prolongs its direction : the other sections execute the 
same movement in succession, as each has its distance from 
the one which precedes it. 

The movement is executed by pieces, in the same manner 
and by the same commands, substituting the word pieces 
for sections. 

Movement No. 4, from Line. 

To break into column in retreat. (Fig. 12.) 

Commanding officer-PIECES AND CAISSONS, LEFT 
ABOUT WHEEL, MARCH. The pieces and caissons, and 
in horse-artillery, the squads, wheel left-about. 

n a- « S ON THIRD SECTION, IN 

Commanding officer, ^ RETREAT INTO COLUMN. 

Chiefs of sections — Pieces, forward, trot, march. The 
pieces, and in horse-artillery, the squads, close on the caissons. 

Chief of 3d section — Third section, in retreat, guide right. 

Chief of other sections — Section, right oblique. 

Commanding officer, re- > , , . -n qtt 
peated by chiefs of sections, $ 

On the word march, the caissons of the third section 
followed by their pieces, move forward ; the caissons of the 
other sections, followed by their pieces, form into column by 
commands and movements similar to those used in forming 
to the front into column. 

This movement is executed by pieces in the same manner 
and by the same commands, substituting the words on sixth 

PIECE, for ON THIRD SECTION. 

198 



TART III. OF THE BATTERY. 23 

Movement No. 5, from Line. 

Marching in line, to close intervals. 

( ON ( ) PIECE, TO ( ) 

Commanding officer, 2 PACES CLOSE INTER VALS- 

( MARCH. 
On the word marcii, the pieces oblique towards the one 
named, to the distance ordered, when they resume the direct 
march, by commands of their chiefs. 

Movement No. 6, from Line. 

To open intervals. 

n , , j ON (— ) PIECE-OPEN IN- 

Commanding officer, | TERV i L S-MARCH. 

On the word march, each piece obliques from the one 
named, to resume its proper interval : the caissons execute 
the same movement, when they arrive at the same place. 

Movement No. 7, from Line. 

Being in line at closed intervals, to march in retreat. 

n ,. ~ < IN RETREAT, EVEN PIECES 

Commanding officer, J AND CAISS0 NS, FORWARD. 

The even pieces and caissons move forward until they 
have unmasked the odd pieces and caissons ; the command- 
ing officer then gives the words— pieces and caissons, left 
-about wheel-march, when the whole wheel left-about, 
and the even numbers resume their places in line. 

Movement No. 8, from Line. 

Marching in line, to pass obstacles. (Fig. 13.) 

n A . ~ < (Such) PIECE (or SECTION) 

Commanding officer, j QggTACLE 

If it be a piece, the chief of the section of the piece na^ned, 
halts the piece, and its caisson closes on it ; when the line 
of caissons arrives abreast of the piece, the chief of the sec- 
tion gives the words — (such) piece, right (or left) oblique- 
march, and the piece, followed by its caisson, obliques in 
rear of the other piece of its section. 

If the obstacle present itself before a section, the chief of 
the named section causes his section to halt until the line of 
caissons is abreast with his pieces ; he then obliques his sec- 

199 



24 PART III. OP THE BATTERY. 

tion in rear of the centre section, if it be one of the wings ; 
or in rear of the right section, if it be the centre one. 

The obstacle being passed, the commanding officer orders, 
(such) piece (or section) into line ; on which the chief 
of the section gives the words — (such) piece (or section) left 
(or right) oblique-march, and the piece or section, quicken- 
ing its pace, moves into line. 

Movement No. 9, from Line. 
Passing a defile. 
This is done in either advancing or retreating, by a co- 
lumn of sections or pieces, according to the width of the 
defile, and either by the right or left flank ; the command 
being given — by sections (or pieces) from the right (or 
left) flank, pass the defile-march. 

The defile being passed, the battery or line is reformed by 
one of the means prescribed in movements from column. 

Movement No. 10, from Line. 
To march by a flank. 

C PIECES AND CAISSONS, 
Commanding officer, ? RIGHT (or LEFT) WHEEL- 

( MARCH-FORWARD. 
On the word march, each piece and caisson wheels to the 
right, (or left,) on a fixed pivot ; in horse-artillery, the squads 
also wheel to the right, (or left,) and form a third column be- 
tween the pieces and caissons, abreast of the muzzles of their 
pieces. On the word forward, the whole move forward to- 
gether, the pieces close on each other, and the caissons march 
abreast of their pieces. The chiefs of sections and of caissons 
march on the flank of the column, except the chief of the 
leading section, who is at its head ; the chief of the leading 
piece in front of the leading horses of his piece. 

To resume the line, the command is given — pieces and 

CAISSONS LEFT (or RIGHT) WHEEL-MARCH. 

Movement No. 11, from Line. 

To change front forward on first section. (Fig. 14.) 

r. mmn n^;n„.ffi^ S CHANGE FRONT FORWARD 
Commanding officer, ^ QN FIRgT SECTI0N . 

Chief of 1st section — Section, right-wheel. 
Chiefs of other sections — Pieces, right-oblique. 

200 



TART III. OF THE BATTERY. 25 

Officer of train — Caissons, left-wheel. 

Coinmanding officer, repeated by chiefs of sections and 
officer of train— MARCH. 

On the word march, the first section wheels to the right 
on a fixed pivot, and is established by its chief on the new 
line; the other pieces arrive in succession on the line, und 
are dressed by the chiefs of sections on the first section. 
The caissons, except the sixth, wheel to the left ; the sixth 
moves to the front, and the others wheel to the right, in suc- 
cession, as they arrive on the ground which the sixth occu- 
pied ; when each arrives opposite its piece, the officer of the 
train gives the words, caissons, right-wheel-march, for- 
ward, guide-right halt, right-dress. 

The change of front forward on the third section is exe- 
cuted in the same manner, substituting in the commands — 
left for right, and reciprocally. 

Movement No. 12, from Line. 

To change front to the rear on first section. (Fig. 15.) 

n A . ~ <s CHANGE FRONT TO THE 

Commanding officer, | REAR QN pTRST SECTI0N . 

Chief of 1st section — Section, left— wheel. 

Chiefs of other sections — Pieces, left-about-wheel. 

Officer of train — Caissons, left-about-wheel. 

Commanding officer, repeated by chiefs of sections and 
officer of train — MARCH. 

On the word march, the first section wheels to the left on 
a fixed pivot, and is established by its chief on the new align- 
ment ; the other pieces having wheeled about, oblique to the 
left, pass the new line a few paces, wheel left-about, and are 
aligned on the first section, by commands of their chiefs of 
sections. The caissons having wheeled about, march to the 
rear twice the length of a piece, when the officer of train 
gives the words — caissons, left wheel— march; when the head 
of the column has marched the length of a piece, he adds, 
head of column—left ; and when each caisson is opposite its 
piece, caissons, left wheel-march, followed by halt, right- 
dress. 

The change of front to the rear on the third section, is 
executed according to the same principles. 

201 



26 PART III. OF THE BATTERY. 

Movement No. 1 3, from Line. 
To change front on centre section. (Fig. 16.) 

( CHANGE FRONT ON SECOND 

Commanding officer, 2 SECTION— RIGHT WING- 
( FORWARD. 

Chief of 2d section — Section, left-wheel. 

Chief of 1st section — Pieces, left-oblique. 

Chief of 3d section — Pieces, left-about-wheel. 

Officer of train — Caissons, right-wheel. 

Commanding officer, repeated by chiefs of sections and 
officer of train— MARCH. 

On the word march, the second section wheels to the left 
on a fixed pivot, and is established by its chief on the new 
alignment ; the first section arranges itself on the line of the 
second ; the pieces of the third section having wheeled about, 
oblique to the left, pass the new line a few paces, wheel left- 
about, and are aligned on the second section, by command 
of their chief of section. All the caissons, except the first, 
wheel to the right ; the first moves forward, the others wheel 
to the left in succession, as they arrive on the ground which 
the first occupied, and as each arrives opposite its piece, the 
officer of the train gives the words, caissons, left wheel- 
march, followed by halt, right-dress. 

The change of front to the right on the second section, is 
executed by similar means and commands. 

Movements from Column. No. 1. 

To march in column, change direction in marching, and 
to halt the column. 

To put the column in march, the commanding officer gives 
the words — column, forward, guide left (or right)- 
march. On the word march, repeated by the chiefs of sec- 
tions, the column moves forward. In column of pieces, the 
guide is not mentioned in the command. 

If while in march, the column is to change direction by 
the head, the commanding officer gives the words — head of 
column, right (or left), and the chief of the leading sec- 
tion adds, section, right (or left)-icheel. The section wheels 
to the right (or left) on a moveable pivot, the pivot-piece de- 
scribing an arc of a circle in such manner as to clear the 
wheeling point. In foot-artillery, the pivot-piece slackens 

202 



TART III. OF THE BATTERY. 27 

its pace ; in horse-artillery, the wheeling flank trots. The 
wheel being completed, the chief of the leading section gives 
the word forward, and the section resumes the direct march. 
The following sections wheel on the same ground at which 
the first wheeled, by command of their chiefs. A column 
by pieces is wheeled in the same manner. 

To halt the column, the commanding officer gives the 
words, column-halt, the word halt being repeated by the 
chiefs of sections. 

Movement No. 2, from Column. 
To form line to the front. (Fig. 17.) 

Commanding officer— FRONT INTO LINE. 

Chief of 1st section — Section-forward. 

Chiefs of other sections — Section, left-oblique. 

Commanding officer, repeated by same chiefs — MARCH. 

On the word march, the first section moves forward and 
is established on the line. The other sections oblique to the 
left, until they have gained their respective intervals, when 
they move to the front and are aligned on the first section. 

A column by pieces forms line to the front by similar 
commands and means. 

Movement No. 3, from Column. 
To form line to the left. (Fig. 18.) 

Commanding officer— LEFT INTO LINE. 

Officer of train — Caissons, right wheel. 

Chiefs of sections— Section, left wheel. 

Commanding officer, repeated by ) TMAT?pfj 
chiefs of sections and officer of train, $ 

On the word march, each section wheels to the left on a 
fixed pivot, and, when the wheel is completed, each chief 
gives the words, section, halt, right dress; the caissons 
wheel to the right by caissons, and march in separate and 
parallel columns ; when the head of each has marched twenty 
paces, the officer of the train gives the words, heads of 
columns, left, and when each caisson is opposite its piece, 
he adds, caissons, left wheel, halt, right dress. 

A column by pieces forms line to the left by similar com- 
mands and means : the pieces wheeling in succession, as 
each arrives opposite the place it is to occupy in line. 

203 



28 PART III. OF THE BATTERY. 

Movement No. 4, from Column. 
To form line on the right. (Fig. 19.) 

Commanding officer— ON RIGHT INTO LINE, GUIDE 
RIGHT-MARCH, 

On the word march, the chief of first section gives the 
words-se ctio?i, right icheel, followed by forward, guide 
right, and when his section has marched twenty paces, he 
adds-section, halt, right dress. The chief of first section 
of caissons, gives the words, caissons, left wheel, trot, march ; 
and each caisson wheels to the left ; when the leading one 
has marched twenty paces, the chief gives the words, head 
of column-right, and when the caissons are opposite their 
pieces, caissons, right wheel, march, followed by halt, right- 
dress. 

The second section continues to move forward until 
abreast of the point it is to occupy in line, when it wheels 
to the right in the manner prescribed for the first section, and 
is aligned on that section ; the caissons perform the same 
movement prescribed for me caissons of the first section. 
The third section executes what is prescribed for the second. 

In column by pieces, this movement is executed by simi- 
lar commands and means. 

Movement No. 5 from Column. 
To form line, faced to the rear. (Fig. 20.) 

Commanding officer— INTO LINE, FACED TO THE 
REAR-ODD PIECES FORWARD. Each odd piece moves 
up abreast of the even piece of the section immediately be- 
fore it. 

Commanding officer, re- ) PIECES RIGHT OBLIQUE 
peated by chiefs of sections, \ -MARCH. 

On the word march, the first piece followed by its caisson, 
moves forward to the line ; the piece then wheels left-about, 
and its caisson, passing to the right, marches to the prescribed 
distance in rear, where it wheels left-about and covers its 
piece. Each of the other pieces obliquing to the right, 
marches direct to the point it is to occupy in line, and when 
there, wheels left-about, and is aligned on those already es- 
tablished. The caissons follow their pieces, pass them on the 
right, move to their places in line, and then wheel left-about. 

204 



TART III. OF THE BATTERY. 29 

In column by pieces this movement is executed by similar 
means and commands. 



INCREASE AND DIMINUTION OF FRONT. 

TO INCREASE. 

From, column of pieces, to column of sections. 

Commanding officer, repeat- $ FORM > marph 
ed by chief of 1st section, \ SECTIONS- ] MAKUrt * 

On the word march, the second piece, followed by its 
caisson, moves up abreast of the first piece, the length of a 
piece on its left ; when the third piece arrives on the ground 
where the first section was formed, the chief of the second 
section, forms his section in the same manner, and by the 
same commands; and so with the third section. In foot- 
artillery the even pieces lengthen the step, and the head of 
the column slackens the pace : in horse-artillery, the chiefs 
of the second and third sections give the word trot, and the 
head of the column does not alter its pace. 

The sections being formed, the commanding officer gives 
the words guide left, and the whole resume the ordinarv 
pace. 

From Column of Sections to Line. 

Commanding officer— FRONT INTO LINE. 

Chief of 1st section — Section, forward, guide right. 

Chiefs of other sections — Section-left oblique. 

Commanding officer, re- > tuarph 
peated by chiefs of sections, $ 

On the word march, the first section continues to move 
forward, the other sections oblique to the left until opposite 
their intervals, when their chiefs give the word forward, and 
they move up abreast of the first section ; the caissons follow 
their pieces ; those of the first section slacken the pace, until 
at the proper distance : the caissons of the other sections 
align themselves on those of the first. The line being form- 
ed, the commanding officer gives the words guide left (or 
right), and the whole resume the ordinary pace. 

If a column by pieces, or by sections, be at a halt, it will 
form line to the front, by the same commands and means; 
the leading piece, or section, moves forward on the word 

S 205 



30 PART III. CASEMATE GUNS. 

march, and is established on the lines ; the others oblique 
until opposite their intervals, then move forward, and are 
aligned on those already established. 

TO DIMINISH. 

From line, to column of sections. 

Commanding officer— BY SECTIONS-BREAK OFF. 

Chief of 1st section — Section forward , guide left. 

Chiefs of other sections — Section, right oblique. 

Officer of train — Caissons forward, trot, march. 

Commanding officer, re- > ;u\r>rH 
peated by chiefs of sections, \ A 

On the word march, the first section continues to move 
forward; in foot-artillery, it quickens its pace: in horse- 
artillery, it moves at a trot : the other sections oblique to the 
right, each entering the column in rear of the one which pre- 
cedes it. The column being formed, the commanding officer 
gives the words guide left, and all resume th-j ordinary pace. 

From column of sections, to column of pieces. 
Commanding officer— PIECES-BREAK OFF. 

Chief of 1st section, I }f ( P^e forwarded piece right 
^ oblique. 

Commanding officer, repeat- > ,,, R pn 
ed by chief of 1st section, \ 

On the word march, the first piece continues to move for- 
ward, the second piece obliques to the right and enters the 
column ; the other sections break off on the same ground 
where the first had broke. 



EXERCISE OF CASEMATE GUNS. 

Implements. 

The rammer and sponge (on different staves) in a rack 
over the embrazure. 

The ladle in a rack on the left of the gun, over the arch. 

The worm in a rack on the right of the gun and opposite 
the ladle. 

The lantern on a hook immediately over the worm. 

The trail-handspikes on the elevating transom. 

The crowbars (two) on each side of the gun, leaning 
against the front wall, and four feet from the carriage. 

206 



PART III. CASEMATE GUNS. 31 

A water-bucket on the right of the gun in the front angle 
of the casemate. 

A pouch for priming caps hung on the cascable, a priming 
wire attached to it. 

The shot and wads on the left of the gun in the front 
angle of the casemate. 

Position of the men at the gun. 

One non-commissioned officer and six privates are neces- 
sary for the service of each gun. They should be told off 
before marched to the battery, where they are posted as fol- 
lows : 

No.'s 1 and 3 on the right of, and three feet from the car- 
riage, facing the gun, No. 1 opposite the chase, and No. 3 
opposite the elevating screw. 

No.'s 2 and 4 on the left of, and three feet from the car- 
riage, facing the gun, No. 2 opposite No. 1, and No. 4 op- 
posite No. 3. 

No.'s 5 and 6 in the room in rear of the gun, and near 
the left door, provided with a budge-barrel and pass-box. 

The non-commissioned officer is on either side of the gun, 
according to the position of the lock, and near to the cas- 
cable. He tends vent, points, fires, and commands at the gun. 

When the gun is not loaded, it should be run " from bat- 
tery," that is, run as far back as the counter-hurter, and 
secured by quoins at each wheel. 

To load and fire* 

PREPARE BATTERY.— The non-commissioned officer 
straps the pouch round his waist. No. 1 takes the rammer 
and sponge from the rack and places them against the wall, 
in the angle of the casemate on his right, the sponge up, the 
rammer-head downwards. No. 2 takes out the tompion and 
places jt by the pile of shot, and loosens the wads. No. 3 
uncoils the lanyard of the lock and throws it loosely over the 
cascable. No. 4 enters the trail-handspikes in the rings. 
Nos. 5 and 6 prepare the budge-barrels ; and all resume their 
posts. 

LOAD. — The non-commissioned officer steps on the car- 
riage to tend vent. No. 1 seizes the sponge-staff, steps on 
the carriage, enters the sponge, and sponges the gun : he is 
assisted by No. 2, who also steps on the carriage. No. 3 

207 



32 PART III. CASEMATE GUNS. 

seizes the rammer-staff, and passes the small end through 
the embrazure — No. 1 receives the staff in his left hand and 
passes the sponge-staff behind him with his right hand, to 
No. 3, who places it in its position against the wall. No. 5 
hands a cartridge to No. 4, who hands it to No. 2. No. 4 
also hands the shot and wads to No. 2, who enters them and 
assists No. 1 in ramming down. As soon as the shot is 
rammed home, No.'s 1 and 2 step down from the carriage, 
and the former places the rammer-staff against the wall. 

TO BATTERY.— No.'s 3 and 4 take out the checking 
quoins, and all, except 5 and 6, assist in running the gun 
out. Care should be taken in running the gun " to battery," 
not to let the carriage strike the hurter too hard, lest the jar 
should throw the charge forward and prevent its ignition. 
The gun should also be run out as far as the carriage will 
permit, to prevent injury being done to the embrazure from 
the discharge. 

As soon as the gun is run out, the non-commissioned officer 
steps on the chasses, cocks the lock, and places the percus- 
sion cap, keeping his left hand over it to prevent the concus- 
sion of other guns from jarring it out of place. Nos. 3 
and 4 at the trail-handspikes, and No. 1 at the elevating 
screw, give the proper direction and elevation by a motion 
of the hand from the non-commissioned officer. As soon 
as these are obtained, the non-commissioned officer steps 
down quickly from the chasses on either side (according to 
the position of the lock) and by a smart pull of the lanyard, 
fires the piece. 

No.'s 1 and 2 should be ready with checking quoins, to 
prevent the gun running " to battery." If the gun should 
not sufficiently recoil, No.'s 1 and 2 enter the crowbars in 
the truck wheels, and assisted by the other men, heave the 
gun back at the command heave. The same would be the 
case if the gun were " to battery." 

When practicable, a commissioned officer should be placed 
in charge of four guns, to see that all the duties are properly 
performed, and silence observed. 



The foregoing exercise will answer with trifling alteration, 
for barbette guns. 

208 



PART III. OP THE ARTILLERY. 






•2 8 I S e 

xgScg 




©J 







O «cj> ko 




N «i» •«* o «a 



S2 



209 



PART III. OF THE ARTILLERY. 



Fig. 7. 



#4 



's 



Fi s .9 

JJ$'A 

f^mmm mm 

■ ■ 1 1 : ! 

Jit jbfjif jbjiij jtfct 



Fig. 11. 

^ at- 



.Jft If 3j* }jf ; 



Fig. 8. 

t+t +++ -4+ -Hk 1-I-1- l4r 

.;/«//« r»»«» iwi/n 4/»;« j/,th« i'm//fl yir. 

%% 

>>** $? 

I "-JS- g: 

Hmr u 

I '■--£& u 

^- a £$ sr 



4m 



t$t$m 



WW/ 

IS 



Fiy.12 



210 



PART III. OF THE ARTILLERY. 
Fig. 13. Fig. 14. 



6 6 4 8 

JJj iLij LLiJJ lllU 



m 

JJi $ ft ft ft ft 




-If- ^iSi« 

-je / X -^S : 

- iK'^/yH' 

7^4|C f / •3KE - 



6f- 5/ 4.^' 3.-' 2/' a? 

lLj Lij l£j ljIi uli (iLi 

il l ll ill} iLlIj iLlII JjJj ill li 



A A iU ft ft ffM'ITi 



Fig. 15. 



[WtB;|fli!^ft B -IC-j 



Fig. 16. 

^ IE"-, 

a s- N \ se-J 



•X. 



•sis 



211 



PART III. OF THE ARTILLERY. 



Fig. 11 



6 5 4 



ili lLj Uj i I I ilt ilj 

i*.li ilili iliij ili'i ilali tUli 
rpi lyl rji **p ryi rji 



ft Jiil 



Fig. 18. 
-H- < Br- 

'Hill* 

$ S 



Fig. 19. 

-» ^ -33-' 

--JE f' /- — H" 

--JE ? r~ K-' 
-IE j ^j- — 15- ■ 

u 

$ $ 
K SB 



Fig. 20. 



MM 



& 



ft 



v 



ft 



ft 



ItM'.r/A; 



14! 



i 

A] 



f / 



WW j 

ft 



212 



PART 


i 

IV. 


REGULATIONS. 



CONTENTS OF PART FOURTH. 



Page 

Precedence of regiments and corps 5 

Duties in garrison and camp, comprising— m 

Beats and signals ' 5, 6 

The Roster 30 

Roll calls 31 

Daily details and duties 31 

Dress parade 34 

Guard mounting 36 

Relieving guards and sentinels 38 

Method of going and receiving the grand rounds * 40 

Guards, their use and duty 42 

Order of encampment for Infantry 50 

Cavalry 52 

Artillery 53 

Honours to be paid by the troops 56 

Salutes 58 

Escorts of Honour 58 

« Funeral Honours 59 

Colour escort 60 

Review 61 

Inspection 65 

Calling out the Militia for the service of the U. S 68 

Manner of issuing and distributing orders 69 

215 



PART IV. 



REGULATIONS 



PRECEDENCE OF REGIMENTS AND CORPS. 

The precedence of regiments and corps is as follows : — 
1st. The Light Artillery— 2d. The Light Dragoons— 3d. 
Other Regular Cavalry— 4th. The Artillery— 5th. The In- 
fantry — 6th. The Marine Corps — 7th. The Riflemen — 8th. 
Volunteer Corps — 9th. The Militia. 

Regiments of the regular army will take precedence in 
their particular arm, according to numerical order — in the 
volunteers and militia, by lot. 

This order of precedence refers to parades. On all other 
occasions, the several regiments and corps are to be distri- 
buted and drawn up as the commanding officer may judge 
best adapted to the purposes of the service. 

DUTIES IN GARRISON AND CAMP. 

The duties in garrison and camp are to be conducted, as 
far as practicable, in the same manner, and on the same prin- 
ciples. 

The Reveille is to sound or beat at day-break, and is the 
signal for the men to rise, and the sentinels to leave off chal- 
lenging. 

The Troop is to sound or beat at — o'clock in the morn- 
ing, for the purpose of assembling the men for duty and in- 
spection at guard-mounting. 

The Retreat is to sound or beat at sunset, for the purpose 
of warning the officers and men for duty, and reading the 
orders of the day. 

The Tattoo is to be beat at — o'clock, after which no sol- 
dier is to be out of his tent or quarters. 

Peas-upon-a-trencher, the signal for breakfast, is to sound 
or beat at — o'clock in the morning. 

Roast-beef, the signal for dinner, is to sound or beat at — 
o'clock ; at other times, it is the signal to draw provisions. 

T 217 



6 PART IV. REGULATIONS. 

The Surgeon's Call is to sound or beat at — o'clock, 
when the sick, able to go out, will be conducted to the hos- 
pital by the First Sergeants of companies, who will hand to 
the Surgeon a report of all the sick in the company, other 
than those in hospital. 

The General is to beat only when the whole army is to 
march, and is the signal to strike the tents, and prepare for 
the march. 

The Assembly is the signal to form by company. 

To the Colour is the signal to form by battalion. 

The March, for the whole to move. 

The Long-roll is the signal for getting under arms, in case 
of alarm, or the sudden approach of the enemy. 

The Parley is to desire a conference -with the enemy. 

The Stable-call, in cavalry corps, will be sounded imme- 
diately after reveille, forty minutes before noon ; and again, 
immediately after retreat, for watering, feeding, and attend- 
ing to the horses. 

Signals. 

To go for fuel — poing stroke and ten stroke roll. 

To go for water — two strokes and a jlam. 

For fatigue party — pioneer's march. 

Adjutant's call — -first part of the troop. 

First Sergeant's call — one roll and four taps 

Sergeant's call — one roll and three taps. 

Corporal's call — one roll and two taps. 

For the drummers — the drummer's call 

The different daily beats shall be given on the right, and 
be immediately followed by the whole army ; to facilitate 
which, the drummer's call shall be beat by the drums of the 
police a quarter of an hour before the time of beating, when 
the drummers will assemble before the colours of their re- 
spective regiments ; and as soon as the beat begins on the 
right, it will be immediately taken up by the whole armv, 
the drummers beating along the front of their respective re- 
giments, from the centre to the right, thence to the left, and 
back again to the centre, where they finish. Where the 
hours for the different beats and signals am not fixed, the 
commanding officer will establish them, havi g regard to cli- 
mate and circumstances. 

218 



^ 



REGULATIONS. 



BEATS OF THE DRUM 



EXPLANATION OF THE SIGNS. 



A Tap 



A Flam 



Rolls of 



A Drag 



A Roll 



r r r r r 

J J J J J 

3 4 5 7 9 

Strokes. 






Common Time. 



90=o- 



or 90 steps I 
minute. 



Time for the Retreat. 
H0=# fed: or 110 steps to a minute. 

Quick Step. 
110=0 fffig or 110 steps to a minute. 

Double Quick Step. 
140=J ETC? or 140 steps t0 a minute - 

Time for the Troop. 
80^=# An or 80 bars to a minute. 



219 



REGULATIONS. 



LENGTH AND PROPORTION OF NOTES AND RESTS. 



Seinibreve 
equal 



m 



Common Time. 



to 2 Minims. 



— P 1 P _ Z1 



2 steps to a bar, 
and 90 to a minute. 



or 4 Crotchets, 



Rests. 



^EE?E$ 



^£ 



or 8 Quavers, 



il§i£gil 



3=3: 



or 16 Semi- 
quavers. 



^ 



A Dotted Minim 
equal 



P 



Time for the Retreat 



to 3 Crotchets, 



-r — r- 



m 



3 steps to a bar, and 



or 6 Quavers. 



^rr-rr~r - 



w~r 



110 to a minute. 



220 



REGULATIONS. 



A Dotted Crotchet 
equal 



Time for the Troop, $c. 



to 3 Quavers, 



-P P 



^ ^ pr 



f ; One step to a bar, and 



or 6 Semiquavers. - - 



#1 



g^tttf: 



5T 



80 to a minute. 



Dotted Crotchets 
equal 



te 



£==*=: 



Quick Time. 



to 6 Quavers. f ~f~f~ ~f ~f ~f 



2 steps to a bar, and 
110 to a minute. 



A Minim 
equal 




^ 



- - Double Quick Time. 



to 2 Crotchets 



» -f ; 2 steps to a bar, and 



or 4 quavers. 



-f ' ' f f t ~\ 140 to a minute. 
t 2 



10 



REGULATIONS. 



No 1. The General. 



80=*» 



t dtttt rt rt rt rt 




80=»« 



f f f 



No. 2. The Assembly. 
f r f f f 



^ 



: T=F :z =F^ 



3=5: 



£=£ 



-p — p — p- 



ffffff rfffff f 



^^W W E m^ 



I 



No. 3. To Me Colour. 




Drum, f t 1 1 t t f t t f f 



f r 



f f f f 




iVb. 4. The Lone Roll. 



222 



REGULATIONS 



n 



No. 5. Common Time. 



90=d 



r f f f f 



f f f 



|gmkHS|iE§t^pp^ 



4 

r f f r f f 




EEE 



No. 6. QmcA; TVwe. 




ffffffffr rf 



-] pr-[— pi 1 pi 1 pi 1 pi 1 p. ( pi — j— ' 



No. 7. Tfte Reveille. 



140=#. Fife. 



H^^n^^n^ 



q Drum. t r r r r r 

X ■? T # » » r ? ' * • 


t r 


r r 

• • 


m \ i r r • ' ~ i ' 


•T r r [ 
1 5 


7 7 



223 



12 



REGULATIONS. 



P=F 



P-grv 



BE 



-!— f- 



S 



ai 



^^, 




? — ~~w 



i \ 



¥W5=¥=^ 



7 3 7 7 7 



7 7 7 3 7 



SI 



fht 



P3I 



^r=& 




r r r r • r r r 



mm 



I ^=F=F==P=e 



7 7 7 7 7 7 



I 



60=« 

# 



Slow Scotch. 



§^ 



I 



^Ur 



&c. 



fe-U^4 



4f5F= 



s? 



7' 



120=£3 Austrian. 



r -e-# — -r 



s^ 



acfe 



* » 



9~g- 



^ 



jrrzczz 



d d 



d dddddddd 



224 



^ 



FF^= 



W~0~WMIMIMZ9 



MS 



REGULATIONS. 



13 



140=* 

* 



Hessian. 



e 17 --^ 



riflc rirFtm 



Double Draj 



dd dd dd dd 



r\ u u u u u u __^i u 



Drum. 



T^rW 



60=*'. Dutch - 



^ ^Effi 



«££ 



:CC 



i 



r d 



4t^9- 



^g 



:^z 



^EjEE^ 



F^ 



Urum. 

r t r t 




r r r 






r#z=i=: 



J 



|^gO_0 Quick Scotch. 






&c. 



D. C. The first part of the Reveille. 

B 



225 



14 



REGULATIONS. 



■ Fife. 



No. 8. The Troop. 



*=?=¥> 



M±L 



_32 r^ 



-& p p 



Drum, r 



i 



80=#< 




m 



i^^p 



^F 



-f— T 



-|^ 



f t 



:»~p~f" 



laze: 



^~?" 



v-p 1- 



p * *» 



2V&. 9. 77*e iZefrea?. 



^H= 



SSI 



Drum. r 



I 



I 



1 

110=* 


i i 




• - 


\j -r — 


1 ' # 


• s m m 


1 ~ »*ff 1 


^_#*> r -p ■ 


i i # -* 


i i r i i 






i - 


1 i i 


— -^ [ 



m 



d t t Volti. 



g — Wl 



226 



REGULATIONS. 



15 



^^^^mm ^^m 



t d t t d t t d t t d d 



=P=F= 



£ehe?=?=?=; =Eeff : 



fcj =t-f-h-+i =a 



m 



rzncn 



I 



tfm^A^ 



■f-f-Pnr- 



=^rif-ri * ft 






d t t d t t d t t d 



d t t 



P^S^ 






SEEf 



£=£ 



d t t d t t d 



^ 



: F= r =! 



g^EE^ 



2=^ 



I 



227 



16 



REGULATIONS 



No. 10. The Tattoo. 



80=* Fife. 

# r- 



^gS^ff 



I 



Drum, dftdt d rf t d 



* F I 1 1 F 



^EE 



: F=¥ 



$± 



i 



s 



^=izij^=t=g=E 



m: 



m 



t d t 



m?m^ 



i 



Fine. 



UO=* Quici Time. 



I 



£ 



1 



f 



After the quick time begin the doubling 



228 



REGULATIONS. 



17 



90=0 



Common Time. 



After this repeat the doubling. 





Dutch. 






















L^8 














li — : 

















. . 




- 



14 0-* Double Quick Time. 



m 



wmwmm 



i 



After the three rolls repeat doubling to the fine. 

U 229 



18 



REGULATIONS. 



No. 11. To Recall Detachments. 



1^ 



B 



d t t_ t 



t t d t t t 






IS 



■5~ — p^p — w ?~? — >~? — ?~~? ?~s» — ?~?~ 



No. 12. Drummer's Call. 




No. 13. Come for Orders. 



First Sergeants. /Qk -P— f-f 



t t t t 



3 times over. 



¥ESTP 



~n r 



Sergeants. 



3 rimes over. 




Corporals. 
230 



3 times over. 



m^ 



REGULATIONS. 



10 



No. 14. '17ie Boll. 



? * * ^ — rr 



-> > 



No. 15. Double Quick Time. 



140=«! 

f f f f f f 



fe 



f r r r r 



iFHF 



SSfeL^ 



Plfefe 



ffff f fffff 



y>" 



^ 



# r 



1 



iVo. 1G. .Run. 



160= 



f f 



r r f 



isiii 



"i" 4 






231 



20 



REGULATIONS. 



No. 17. Halt. 



«*-*f f f f 


f f f r f f f f 


ffiMrtr^-E-H 


i : ■ I 1 1 ■ i ■ ' 1 i ■■■ r 



a f f f j-i 



¥=F 



2Vb. 18. 3£zrcA m Retreat. 



100=« 



te 



f f f 



f f f 



:p g g^^ 






• 



1 i ' 



E 



f f f 



f f f 



I 



1 i =F=F=F 



:» # =c 



j=^ 



:*_-_«zir: 



iVb. 19. Commence Firing. 



ioo=* 



I 



f f f f f 



f f f f f 



f f f 



^ ~f r f g E= 



ZMZSZK. 



V — P — P — P" 
232 



~w-w~rnr 



REGULATIONS. 



21 



SOUNDS FOR THE BUGLE, 

APPLICABLE TO INFANTRY'S MARCH. 



No. 1. The General. 



140=0 Presto 



llPigpSSlSlii 




mm ^m^m mmm 



I 



S& 



S=? 



g§i 



ffig^§Ei 



333E3=s: 



iVo. 2. 7%e Assembly. 



80=# 


o 

i r 


-f-f+H~- 


cT i I 1 1 m \ 1 j 1 1 


i i . 


—i i-lll — 



SEPEEEF 1 



gS 



:^=c 



-rsrm-mo- 



-(— P- 



^=C 



^M ^B 



U2 



233 



22 



REGULATIONS 



SO=S 



m 



lEHEc 



■-p-r- 



No. 3. To rte Colour. 



.»_«_«_#- 



+-F 



-^t-FFF^ 



fe^S^I^^B^S 



i^P^ii^^^ 



DC. 



iVb. 4. Common Tiine. 



90-d 



*T^ 




fy— *= 


-f-^ 


f--r 


-fff-W- 


r/V- 


fc^tJ 


L i |T « | H 


1 L^ 


^F 


^ 


y^h 


-^r 



S3 1 



# 



-f^T^ 



isa: 



ss 



li :-fct 



=ES= 



s^s- 



s 



r^3 



I 



^ 



w 



E^ 



FT-^- 



?w+-c- 



^m 



i — — — I 

234 



REGULATIONS. 



23 



No. 5. Quick Time. 






S-H 



— i — i— i— i— i— 1-t: 



J»_ 3 P3 



EEFFF^-HE^i 



ttS3# 






£^-» 



H=H 



F4=P= 



EFgEFEf^B 



"rn 1 — r 



"GET 



* — r~i — rr 



ZZOL 



sa 1 ; 



iiii^= 



M. G. 77/fi Reveille. 



HO- 



^^^S^gj^ 



[? GET^ 



=F=^ 






^^SE 3 



S 



=^=^ 



i^H 



^ttq^B^i 



DC. 



235 



24 



REGULATIONS. 



No. 7. The Retreat. 



7G-* 



r ~*Y — !"^— 1 T ~7=i 



■9=1- 



EE^z 



S"^=^3=P=I 



U'-i- u 



:«. ^_ 



iVo. 8. 7%e Tattoo. 



90=0 



: f z i=F=T 



-r-^- 



BEES 

3— — t^Fr-F 



i 






^e:e^^3 



4-^- 



^ •? »3 



^ 



» — r# r 



Bf agff 



teH^S 



SHtf 



:33? 



^-#-»- 



i^E 



10 3 C 



3tttt3EizfaL 



S3E 



» •;* p - 



Hi 



^^ >rs ^? <t\ 



■sr-7^ 



zETfc 



i — p-j — - *, — E=z fg--F 




P^^IP 



236 



REGULATIONS, 



25 



No. 9. To Recall Detachments. 



100=o 



ggB ! !S E g gg teggS 



Sgp 



No. 10. Buglers' Call. 



160-* 



^g^PS 



iVo. 11. Come for Orders. 



First Sergeants. 



ZIZtZZZPCE 



~ »~y 



m 



Sergeants. 



^mr jrrr^m 



Corporals. 



Ilililplf^li 



237 



26 



REGULATIONS. 



140= 




No. 12. Double Quick March. 



rn— «- .lj=£ J-3=3=3- ^tt-tt-s 



: f=^f 



m 




"i-i ]^n I I 1 gg 



sispim 



-r-mn=i 



iliNSfe 



ifi 



I 



D.a 



aVo. 13. Run. 



160=-# 


■ # f f 


-# | jT" 


a ^ 


9 




1 " 1 1 
1 P 1 

9~9 * . 


-M— , L -' 

* * # » 


> 


r r ■ 




1 * ' / 


1 1* 1 1* 


* # 


1 II 1 
-i-^I 


g=KT-H^ 


M— IpH- 


=M - b 


' ^ 


-P— <* 



238 



REGULATIONS. 



27 



No. 14. Forward March. 



160=#. 










< 






*_ 


-f— 


*=^h- 


1 



g^PH^^Hl^iligiy 



"I pr 



No. 15. .Haft 






iVb. 16. March in Retreat. 



ioo=J. 



S 



^ 



t=#i 



i 



y-jr-g- 



d£ 



gp^i^ss 



No. 17. Commence Firms;. 



too=<=>» 



t-t— i — sj — i — r— i — s^r-t- hTH rr^j — r~ tt 



No. 18. Cease Firing 



ioo=#. 



lf=EE 



i i i n 



K 



239 



28 



REGULATIONS. 



No. 19. March by the Right Flunk. 






S^ 



"I — w 



= E-FF 



^=^ 



£gzjzj-j^ 



=ETP x F?i 



a 



1G0=<? 

~r~ . 



iVo. 20. March by the Left Flan*. 



^ 



_^| ^ ( ? ! ■_■_ 

I 5 



■^ 



iVy. 21. jRa% on Me Reserve. 



I 



90=«. 



V J 






1 



i^ 



I 



iVb. 22. Rally on the Battalion 




240 



REGULATIONS. 



29 



No. 23. Boots and Saddles. 



p, Allfgro. _| 






Prestissimo. 






No. 24. To Horse. 



-H=r- 



^ 



3-33- 



upsp 



iV r o. 25. 7%« Charge. 



Vivace. 



I 



~i — — ~r~r~T~ i i~i — — ! i — r 



No. 26. Stable Call. 



Allegro. 



f 3 » 



i^Sp^^i^^i 



=&. 



-± 



» 3 » 



isnifppilip 



241 



30 PART IV. REGULATIONS. 

The Roster, 

In all duties, whether with or without arms, the tour of 
duty shall be from the eldest downwards. 

Of duties — 

The first is, detachments of the army or outposts. 

The second, general officers' guards, according to rank. 

The third, the ordinary guards, in camp or garrison. 

The fourth, the pickets. 

The fifth, general courts martial, and duty without arms 
or of fatigue. 

Officers on the inlying picket are to be considered as lia 
ble to be relieved and employed upon other duties. If an 
officer's tour of duty happen when he is on the inlying picket, 
he shall immediately be relieved and go upon that duty, and 
his tour upon the picket credited to him. 

If an officer's tour of duty for the picket, general court 
martial, or fatigue, happen when he is upon any other duty, 
he shall not make good that picket, court martial, or duty of 
fatigue, when he comes off, but his tour shall pass ; and, in 
like manner, if he should be upon a general court martial, 
or duty of fatigue, and his tour of guard or detachment hap- 
pen, such tour shall be passed to his credit. 

After the adjournment sine die, of a court martial, the 
members will return to their respective corps and duties, un- 
less otherwise ordered. 

The session of a general court martial, the members of 
which have been sworn, shall be reckoned a tour of duty, 
though it shall have been adjourned without trying any per- 
son. The same rule will apply to courts of inquiry. 

When an officer is designated in orders from head quar- 
ters for one duty, he is not to be put on any other duty with- 
out previous permission from head quarters. 

An officer is not to exchange duties with another, without 
leave of the commanding officer of his regiment or post. 

A regiment is not to receive credit for a tour of duty, un- 
less it has marched off the place of parade. 

In like manner a guard or detachment which has not 
marched off the place of parade or rendezvous, is not to be 
reckoned as having performed a tour of duty; but if it shal. 
have marched off, it shall have credit for a tour, though dis 
missed immediately afterwards. 

242 



TART IV. REGULATIONS. 31 

When a picket is ordered to march to any parade, it is 
not to be accounted as having performed a tour of duty, un- 
less it shall have marched off that parade. 

Roll Calls. 

There shall be daily at least five stated roll calls. 

The first , immediately after reveille. 

The second, immediately before breakfast. 

The third, immediately before dinner. 

The fourth, immediately before retreat* 

The fifth, immediately after tattoo. 

The fir st, fourth, and fifth roll calls will be made on the 
company parades by the First. Sergeants, superintended by 
an officer ; the second and third roll calls will be made by 
the First Sergeant, or by the non-commissioned officers of 
squads, at their respective messes, and reported by them to 
the First Sergeants, who will immediately report the result 
to the Captains, and if at any of the roll calls men are ab- 
sent without leave, or cannot be found, the Captains will re- 
port the names of the absentees to the Adjutant, for the in- 
formation of the Colonel or commanding officer. 

Immediately after reveille roll call, the tents or quarters 
and the space around them, will be put in complete order by 
the men of the companies, superintended by the chiefs of 
squads. The same rule will be observed at the guard-house 
or guard-tent, by the guard or prisoners. 

The morning reports of companies, signed by the Captains 
and First Sergeants, will be handed to the Adjutant before 
eight o'clock in the morning, and will be consolidated by the 
Adjutant within the next hour, for the information of the 
Colonel ; and if the consolidation is to be sent to higher au- 
thority, it will be signed by the Colonel and the Adjutant. 

Daily Details and Duties. 

The daily duty must be announced in orders, and the offi- 
cers to perform it are to be detailed according to the rules of 
the roster. 

The number and rank of the officers for daily duty, are 
to be regulated by the strength and circumstances of the 
camp or garrison. 

Independently of the officers detailed for guard duty, the 
officers for daily duty will be as follows : 

243 



32 PART IV. REGULATIONS. 

In large camps there will be a general officer of the day 
for each division ; a field officer of the day for each brigade ; 
a captain of the day for each regiment ; and such general 
and regimental staff off cers of the day as may be necessary 
to attend to the various details, and to receive and execute 
orders according to their respective stations. In every regi- 
ment and garrison, besides the officer of the day, there will 
be detailed daily, if the strength of the garrison will permit, 
a subaltern, fov r non-commissioned officers, a drummer, and 
such fatigue parties as circumstances may require, for the 
police of the regiment or garrison. In small commands, 
subalterns may be detailed for duty as officers of the day, 
and they will also discharge the duties of officers of police. 
The officers thus detailed are to remain in camp or garrison 
during their tours of duty. 

The General of the day is to superintend the regularity 
and discipline of the camp in every particular ; he is to visit 
the guards of the camp and the outposts ; he is to call out 
and inspect the inlying pickets as often and at such times as 
he thinks proper; he is to receive all reports in camp, and 
make immediate communication of any extraordinary cir- 
cumstance to the General-in-Chief. 

The field officer of the day has the immediate superin- 
tendence of the camp of the brigade ; he is to be present at 
the mounting and dismounting of all the brigade guards, 
particularly of the inlying pickets, which are always con- 
sidered under his command ; he is to call them out to inspect 
them, to order such patroles from them as he may judge ne- 
cessary to insure the regularity and order of the camp, and 
in the event of the inlying pickets being ordered to march, 
he is to march with them. 

The Captain or subaltern of the day of each regiment, 
superintends the cleanliness and regularity of the camp or 
quarters of the regiment ; he attends the parading of all re- 
gimental guards, and orders the roll to be called frequently 
and at unexpected periods, and reports every thing extraor- 
dinary to the commanding officer; he is to visit the hospital 
at various hours, and make a report of its state to the com- 
manding officer of the regiment or garrison. 

The Adjutant of the day of the brigade, is to assist the 
general staff officer of the day, in the various details of it, 

244 



PAET IV. REGULATIONS. 33 

and, in his absence, to perform his duty as such, and attend 
for orders at head quarters. 

The officer of police, under the direction of the officer of 
the day, is to make a general inspection into the cleanliness 
of the camp or garrison ; to suffer no fires to be made in 
camp, except in the kitchens; to cause all dirt or filth to be 
immediately removed, and cither burnt or buried ; to be pre- 
sent at all distributions of the regiment, and to form and 
send off all detachments for necessaries. In case the Adju- 
tant is obliged to be absent, the officer of police is to do his 
duty until his return ; for which purpose he must attend at 
the Adjutant's tent or office, to be ready to receive and dis- 
tribute any orders that may come for the regiment. The 
drummer of the police must attend constantly at the Adju- 
tant's tent or office, to be ready at all times to communicate 
the necessary signals ; nor must he absent himself on any 
account, during the twenty-four hours, without leaving an- 
other drummer to supply his place until his return ; nor then 
without leave from the Adjutant. In camp, when water is 
required by the men, application must be made to the officer 
of police, who will order the drummer to beat the necessary 
signal, on which, all who want water, must immediately pa- 
rade with their canteens before the colours, where the officer 
of police will form and send them off under the care of ftvo 
non-commissioned officers of the police, who are to be an- 
swerable that, the whole party is brought back, and that no 
excesses are committed while it is out. Wood and other ne- 
cessaries must be sent for and brought to camp in the same 
manner. Except in cases of necessity, not more than one 
detachment is to be absent at a time. 

Every such party not conducted by a non-commissioned 
officer shall have a written permission from a field officer, or 
officer commanding a regiment, or the officer of police, with- 
out which it is not to be permitted to pass the chain. 

No non-commissioned officer or soldier is to quit camp or 
garrison without a pass signed by the commanding officer of 
the regiment or garrison, or by the Adjutant, under the au- 
thority of the commanding officer. 

No officer is on any account to sleep out of camp or gar- 
rison, without permission. 

V 2 245 



34 PART IV. REGULATIONS. 

Dress Parade. 

There shall be daily at least one dress parade, which may 
be at troop or retreat, as thecommanding officer may direct ; 
or at both beats, should he think proper so to order. The 
parade at troop will be termed the morning par -ade, and that 
at retreat the evening parade. In either case it will be con- 
ducted as follows : 

A signal will be beat or sounded half an hour before troop 
or retreat, for the music to assemble on the regimental pa- 
rade. At the same time each company will turn out under 
arms, on its own parade, for roll call and inspection by its 
own officers. 

Ten minutes after that signal, the Adjutant's call will be 
given, when the companies will be marched (the band play- 
ing) to the regimental parade, where they will be formed in 
their relative positions in the order of battle, arms ordered 
and at rest : the officers at their post with swords drawn, the 
Adjutant on the right of the line. The music will be form- 
ed in two ranks on the right of the Adjutant, and from the 
Adjutants call to troop or retreat, the band will play. The 
senior officer present will take the command of the parade, 
and will take post at a suitable distance in front opposite the 
centre, facing the line. 

Ten minutes after the Adjutant's call, the Adjutant will 
order the music to beat off, when it wili commence on the 
right, beat in front of the line to the left, and back to its place 
on the right. 

When the music has ceased, the Adjutant will step two 
paces to the front, face the line, and command — Attention. 
■Shoulder-arms. Prepare to open ?'anks. To the rear 3 
open order. March. Right— dress. 

The ranks will be opened according to the system laid 
down in the Infantry Tactics, the commissioned officers 
marching to the front, the company officers four paces, field 
officers six paces, opposite to their positions in the order of 
battle, where they will halt and dress. The Adjutant seeing 
the ranks aligned, will command/ro/tf, and march along the 
front to the centre, face to the right, and pass the line "of 
company officers eight or ten paces, where he will come to 
the right-about and give the words, present-arms, when 
arms will be presented, officers saluting. 

246 



PART IV. REGULATIONS. 35 

Seeing this executed, ho will face about to the command- 
ing* officer, salute, and report u the parade is formed." The 
Adjutant will then, on intimation to that effect, take his sta- 
tion on the left of the commanding officer, one pace retired, 
passing round his rear. 

The commanding officer having acknowledged the salute 
of the line, by touching his hat, will, after the Adjutant has 
taken his post, draw his sword and command — siioulder- 
AR>rs ; and add such exercises as he may think proper, con- 
cluding with ORDER— ARMS. 

The Adjutant will now pass round the right of the com- 
manding officer, advance upon the line, halt midway between 
him and the line of company officers, and command — First 
Sergeants, to the front and centre. March. At the words 
front and centre, the sergeants named will shoulder arms as 
sergeants, march two paces to the front, and face inwards. 
At the word march, they will inarch to the centre and halt. 
The Adjutant will then order — Front-face. Report. At 
the last word, each in succession, beginning on the right, 
will report the result of the roll call previously made on the 
company parade. 

The Adjutant again commands — First Sergeants, out- 
ward-face. To your posts-march ; when they will resume 
their places and order arms. The Adjutant will now face 
to the commanding officer, salute, and give the result of the 
first sergeants' reports. The commanding officer then di- 
rects the orders to be read, when the Adjutant will face about, 
give the words, attention to orders — and then read the orders. 

The orders having been read, the Adjutant will face to the 
commanding officer, salute, and report, when, on an intima- 
tion from the commander, he will face again to the line, and 
announce, the parade is dismissed. All the officers will 
now return their swords, face inwards, and close on the Ad- 
jutant, the field officers on the flanks. The Adjutant gives 
the words — Front-face. Forward-march ; when they will 
march forward, the music playing, and when within six 
paces of the commander, the Adjutant will give the word 
halt. The officers will then salute the commanding officer, 
by raising the hand to the cap, and there remain until he 
shall have communicated to them such instructions as he 
may have to give, or intimates that the ceremony is finished. 
As the officers disperse, the First Sergeants will close the 

247 



36 PART IV. REGULATION:?. 

ranks of their respective companies, and march them to the 
company parades, where they will be dismissed, the band 
continuing to play until the companies clear the regimental 
parade. 

All company officers and men will be present at dress 
parades, unless especially excused, or on some duty incom 
patible with such attendance. 

Guard Mounting. 

Thirty minutes before guard mounting, a call will be 
sounded for the men warned for duty, to turn out on their 
company parades for inspection by the First Sergeants, su- 
perintended by an officer of each company. Ten minutes 
after, a second call will be sounded for the duty men to re- 
pair to the regimental or garrison parade, conducted by the 
First Sergeants. Each detachment as it arrives, will take 
post on the left of the one that preceded it, under the direc- 
tion of the Adjutant, in open order, arms shouldered, and 
bayonets fixed ; the supernumeraries five paces in the rear 
of the men of their respective companies. If the guards are 
intended for the grand parade, they will be marched thithei 
by the senior officer of the details, where they will take post 
in the order prescribed above, under the direction of the 
general staff officer, or his assistant, the Adjutant of the 
day. 

The following regulations respecting mounting guards, 
are drawn up with reference to the grand parade ; with a 
few obvious variations, they will equally apply to regimental 
or garrison parade. 

The ranks being opened, the officers of guards will take 
post twelve paces in front of the centre, in one line, accord- 
ing to rank, and with swords drawn : the Sergeants in one 
rank, four paces in the rear of the officers, and the Corpo- 
rals in one rank, four paces in the rear of the Sergeants ; 
the whole facing to the front. 

The Adjutant of the day will dress the lines, count the 
files, verify the details by reference to the written orders, 
and tell off the guards, whilst the general staff officer ap- 
points the officers and non-commissioned officers to the seve- 
ral guards, and designates the posts which they are to 
occupy. 

The staff officer will then command — officers and non 

24S 



FA.RT IV. REGULATIONS. 37 

commissioned officers. About-face. Inspect your guards. 
March. The commander of each guard then commands — 
Order-arms. Inspection of arms. The two highest in the 
rank of each guard will divide the ranks between them, ac- 
companied by the other officers, and inspect accordingly. 
During the inspection the band will play. 

The inspection ended, the officers and non-commissioned 
officers will take post in their respective guards, as though 
each guard were a company of a battalion, in open order, 
under review ; at which time, also, the officers of the day 
will take post in front of the centre of the guards : the old 
officer of the day on the right of the new officer of the day, 
one pace retired. 

The staff* officer will now command — rest, troop-beat off: 
when the music, beginning on the right, will beat down the 
line in front of the officers of the guards to the left, and back 
to its place on the right, where it will cease to play. 

The staff* officer continues, — Attention. Shoulder-arms. 
Close order-march. Prcsc?rt-arws : at which he will face 
to the new officer of the day, salute, and report " the guards 
are formed." The new officer of the day, after acknow- 
ledging the salute, will give the necessary instructions to the 
staff officer, who will cause the same to be executed, the staff* 
officer giving the word of command. 

The guard having shouldered arms and performed such 
exercises as may be required by the officer of the day, the 
staff* officer will again command, — By guards {or platoon.) 
Right wheel — march. Pass in review. Column-forward, 
guide right-march : when the whole will march past the 
officer of the day, according to the order of review, conducted 
by the staff* officer, marching on the left of the first division ; 
the Adjutant of the day on the left of the last division. 

When the column has passed the officer of the day, the 
guards will break off under their respective commanders, and 
take the route to the several posts assigned them, the staff* 
officers breaking off* at the same time ; the music will cease, 
and the old officer of the day salute, and give the old or 
standing orders to the new officer of the day. The super- 
numeraries at the same time, will be marched by the First 
Sergeants to their respective company parades and dismissed. 

Guards which are assigned to new posts will be conduct- 

249 



38 PART IV. REGULATIONS. 

ed to, and established in them by the officer of the day and 
the staff officer detached from head quarters for the purpose. 

The officer of the day will always be present at guard 
mounting. No other officer, except a general officer, will 
interfere with, or give any order on the parade to the staff 
officer on duty there. The commander of the troops or gar- 
rison, though under the rank of General, is of course an 
exception to this rule. 

The regiment that furnishes the Adjutant of the day will 
also furnish the music for the grand parade. 

Officers on all duties under arms are to have their swords 
drawn, without waiting for any words of command for that 
purpose. 

Relieving Guards and Sentinels. 

The guards in camp and garrison will be relieved every 
twenty-four hours. The guards at the outposts will ordinarily 
be relieved in the same manner; but this must depend on 
their distances from camp, or other circumstances which may 
sometimes require their continuing on duty several days. In 
such cases they must be previously notified to provide them- 
selves accordingly. 

The guards are to move in the greatest order to their 
respective posts, marching by platoon when the roads will 
permit. 

The officer of the old guard, having his guard paraded, 
on the approach of the new guard, commands — -present- 
arms. 

The new guard will march past the old guard, at slioul- 
dered arms, officers saluting, and take post three or four 
paces on its right, and in a line with it, where its officer will 
command — present-arms. The two officers will then ap- 
proach each other, and the relieving officer take his orders 
from the relieved. Both officers will then return to their re- 
spective guards, and command — shoulder-arms. 

The officer of the new guard will now direct his Sergeant 
to make a list of the guard, dividing them into three reliefs, 
and proceed himself to take possession of the guard-house, 
or guard-tent, and the articles and prisoners in charge of the 
guard ; he will note every new injury which may have been 
committed, and, on his report, the relieved officer will be held 
responsible, 

250 



PART IV. KKGULATIONS. 39 

The officer of the old guard will have prepared for the 
signature of the officer who relieves him, an inventory of 
the property or articles in charge of the guard, and also a 
roll of the prisoners with their offences annexed. 

The first relief having been designated, the officer of the 
new guard will order it two paces to the front, when the Cor- 
poral of the new guard will take charge of it»and go to re- 
lieve the sentinels, accompanied by the Corporal of the old 
guard, who will take command of the old sentinels when the 
whole are relieved. 

If the sentinels are numerous, the Sergeants are to be em- 
ployed as well as the Corporals, in relieving them. 

During the time of relieving the sentinels, and of calling 
in the small posts, the commanders of the two guards, will, 
when near the enemy, visit the avenues leading to the post ; 
the old commander giving to the new, all the information 
which he may possess relative to the position of the enemy. 
A relief, with arms supported and formed in two ranks, 
will march by a flank, conducted by the Corporal on the side 
of the leading front-rank man. 

The sentinels at the guard-house or guard-tent will be the 
first relieved and left behind ; the one most distant will be 
next relieved, and the others in succession, as the relief re- 
turns to the guard. 

When a sentinel sees the relief approach, he will face to it 
and halt. At six paces the Corporal will command — relief- 
halt : when the relief will halt and carry arms. The Cor- 
poral will then add « No. 1," or " No. 2," or " No. 3," ac- 
cording to 4 the designation of the sentinel — arms-port. At 
this word the two sentinels will arms port, and approach 
each other, when the old sentinel, under the direction of the 
Corporal, and in his hearing, will whisper the instructions 
to the new sentinel. 

This done, the two sentinels will shoulder arms, and the 
old sentinel will pass in quick time to his place in rear of the 
relief, the new sentinel facing the relief. The Corporal will 
then command — relief, support-arms. Forward— march : 
and the relief proceeds in the same manner until the whole 
are relieved. 

A relief is always to be marched in the greatest order, 
at support-arms ; and if an officer approach, the Corporal is 
to order his men to carry-arms, supporting them again when 

251 



40 PART IV. REGULATIONS. 

the officer has passed. The Corporals are to be answerable 
that the sentinels, when relieving, perform their motions in 
the greatest spirit -and exactness. 

The detachments and sentinels from the old guard having 
rejoined it, it will take up its march, the music of both guards 
beating a march, except at the out-posts, where the music is 
prohibited. The old guard will march along the front of the 
new guard with shouldered arms : the new guard at present- 
ed arms ; officers of both guards saluting. 

On arriving at the camp or post, the commander of the 
old guard will, if it consist of detachments of different regi- 
ments, send each detachment to its own regiment, under an 
officer or non-commissioned officer ; unless the officer of the 
day should be present to inspect the old guard, when he will 
the men to their several regiments, under their re- 
spective officers. In either case, the pieces of the men will 
be drawn or discharged at a target, before the men are dis- 
missed. 

When the old guard has marched off fifty paces, the officer 
of the new guard will order his guard to stack their arms, 
or to place them in the arm-racks. 

The commanding officer of the sruard will then make him- 
self acquainted with the written, general, and particular in- 
structions for his post ; next visit his sentinels, to ascertain 
if the instructions they have received be correct ; and ques- 
tion the officers and non-commissioned officers under him 
relative to the instructions they may respectively have re- 
ceived from the corresponding persons of the old guard. 

Method of going and receiving the-Grand Rounds. 

The General and other officers of the day, will visit the 
several guards during the day, as often and at such hours 
as they judge proper. 

When the sentry before the guard perceives the officer 
of the day approach, he wiil call the guard to turn out, when 
it will parade, and at the proper time salute him with pre- 
sented arms. 

The officer of the day will examine the guard ; see that 
none are absent ; that their arms and accoutrements are in 
order ; that the officers and non-commissioned officers are 
acquainted with their duty ; and that the sentinels are pro- 
perly posted and have received proper orders. 

252 



PART IV. REGULATIONS. 41 

The officer of the guard shall give the parole to the officer 
of the day if demanded. 

The officers of the day will go the grand rounds after 12 
o'clock at night. 

When the officer of the clay arrives at the guard whence 
he intends to begin his rounds, he will make himself known 
as such, by giving the officer of the guard the parole. He 
will then order the guard under arms, and having examined 
it, demand an escort of a Sergeant and two men to proceed 
to the next post. 

When the rounds are challenged by a sentinel, the Ser- 
geant will answer, grand rounds; and the sentinel will reply, 
stand grand rounds ; advance, Sergeant, with the counter- 
sign. Upon which the sergeant advances and gives the 
countersign. The sentinel will then cry, advance, rounds ; 
and present arms till they have passed. 

When the sentinel before the o;uard challenges and is an- 
swered, grand rounds ; he will reply, stand, grand rounds ; 
turn out the guard, grand rounds. Upon which the guard 
will be turned out and drawn up in good order, with shoul- 
dered arms, the officers taking their posts. The officer com- 
manding the guard, will then order a sergeant and two men 
to advance towards the rounds and challenge. When the 
Sergeant of the guard comes within ten paces of the rounds, 
he will halt and challenge briskly. The Sergeant of the 
rounds is to answer, grand rounds. The Sergeant of the 
guard replies, stand, grand rounds ; advance Sergeant, with 
the countersign ; and orders his men to present arms. The 
Sergeant of the rounds advances alone and giving the coun- 
tersign returns to his rounds; and the Sergeant of the guard 
calls to his officer, the countersign is right ; on which the 
officer of the guard calls, advance, rounds. The officer of 
the rounds then advances alone, and on his approach, the 
guard presents arms. The officer of the rounds passes along 
the front of the guard immediately to the officer, who keeps 
his post on the right, and gives him the parole. He then 
examines the guard, orders back his escort, and demanding 
a new one, proceeds in the same manner to other guards. 

All general officers, as well as the commander of the post 
or garrison, may visit the guards and go the grand rounds, 
and be received in the same manner as prescribed for the 
officer of the dav. 

W 253 



42 PART IV. REGULATIONS. 

Guards — their Use and Duty. 

The principal guards are, 

1. Outposts and picket guards. 

2. Camp and garrison guards. 

3. General officers' guards. 

The outposts and picket-guards are formed from the line, 
and composed of cavalry or infantry, or both, according to 
circumstances. They are posted on the avenues leading to 
the camp, and in such positions as are most eligible for its 
security. Their strength is regulated by a variety of con- 
siderations, such as proximity to the enemy, and the nature 
of the position to be guarded. 

The duties of the outposts are so various that they will 
usually require detailed instructions according to circum- 
stances ; the following directions will, however, apply gene- 
rally, and are most strictly to be observed. 

All out-guards march off without trumpets sounding or 
drums beating. They pay no compliment of any kind, 
neither do their sentries take any complimentary notice of 
officers passing near their posts. 

The men on advanced pickets are to carry their provisions 
with them, ready cooked, when circumstances permit. The 
cavalry to carry sufficient forage for the time they are to be 
out. 

Officers commanding out-guards are to send guides or 
orderly men to the field officer of the day, or to the staff 
officer of their own brigades, as circumstances may require, 
in order to conduct the new guards and to carry such com- 
munications as may be necessary. When the army is on a 
march, they must apprise the staff officer of the brigade of 
the situation of their posts, as soon as they arrive at them. 

Whenever detachments are composed of 200 men or up- 
wards, a Surgeon or Assistant Surgeon is to be sent with 
them. On particular duties the attendance of a Surgeon or 
Assistant Surgeon may be requisite with smaller detach- 
ments. Detachments of cavalry of fifty^or upwards must 
be attended by a Farrier. 

As soon as an officer commanding an outpost or advanced 
picket arrives on his ground, he must, by a careful recon- 
noisance, make himself acquainted with not only the space 
he actually occupies, but the heights within musket shot ; 

251 



PART IV. REGULATIONS. 43 

the roads and paths leading to or near the post, ascertaining 
their breadth and practicability for cavalry and cannon, and 
ensure a ready and constant communication with the adjoin- 
ing posts and videttes, by signals during the day — by patrols 
during the night. He should examine all ravines that might 
cover the approach of an enemy, and all the points from 
which he is most likely to be attacked. This will prevent 
all surprises, and should he be assailed during the night, en- 
able him to act with promptness and decision. 

An intelligent officer upon an outpost, even without in- 
trenching tools, may materially strengthen his post. A tree 
felled with judgment, brushwood cut to a certain distance, 
pointed stakes, about breast high, placed on the point most 
assailable, may be attended with the greatest advantages, 
and can be effected with the common hatchet, or axe, with 
which the soldiers are provided for the purpose of cutting 
fire-wood. 

Unexpected obstacles, within point-blank musket shot of 
the place attacked, embarrass and discourage an enemy ; and 
an officer who is on the defensive, should multiply them with- 
in that distance as much as possible. 

Guards are not to presume to molest any persons coming 
to camp with provisions, and are, on no account, to exact or 
receive any thing for their free passage. 

When a deserter comes in from the enemy, he is imme- 
diately to be sent, under a proper escort, to the officer com- 
manding the outposts, who, after ascertaining from him such 
facts as relate to his own post, will immediately forward him 
to head quarters. 

The videttes or sentinels on outposts are to be placed so 
as to best observe the approach of the enemy, and at tne 
same time, communicate by signal with each other and with 
their respective posts. At night, or in thick weather, they 
will be doubled. 

Officers, soldiers, and followers of the camp, are not, on 
any account, to be suffered to pass the outposts, unless they 
are on duty, or present a regular permit from head quarters. 

Persons bearing a fag of truce from the enemy, are to 
be treated with attention and civility ; but, as communica- 
tions of that nature are frequently designed to gain intelli- 
gence, and for reconnoisance, the most strict and efficacious 
means must be adopted to frustrate such consequences. 

255 



44 PART IV. REGULATIONS. 

The camp and quarter guards are for the better security 
of the camp, as well as for preserving good order and dis- 
cipline. 

Every regiment will furnish a camp and quarter guard. 
The camp guard to consist of one Lieutenant, one Sergeant, 
one Corporal, one drummer, and twenty-seven privates ; 
and the quarter guard, of one Corporal and nine privates. 

The camp guard of the front line will be posted four hun- 
dred and twelve feet in front of it, and that of the second 
line, the same distance in the rear of the second line, each 
opposite to the centre of the regiment. 

Each camp guard will post nine sentinels, viz. two before 
the guard, two on the right, and two on the left. These six 
sentinels, with those from the other regiments in the line, 
form a chain in the front and rear of the camp ; two sen- 
tinels before the colours and arms, and .one before the mar- 
quee of the commanding officer of the regiment. 

To complete the chain of sentinels around the camp, the 
Adjutant General or staff officer at head quarters, will order 
two flank guards to be detailed from the line, to consist of a 
commissioned officer and as many men as may be necessary 
for that purpose. 

The intention of the camp guards being to form a chain 
of sentinels around the camp, in order to prevent improper 
persons entering, or soldiers going out of camp, the com- 
manding officers of brigades will add to, or diminish them, 
so as to answer this purpose. 

The quarter guard is to be posted twelve feet in the rear 
of the line of wagons, and will furnish three sentinels, viz. 
one at the guard, and one behind the centre of each wing 
of the regiment. 

General officers' guards are to be furnished by their re- 
spective commands; that is, for the General commanding-in- 
chief, by the line, each brigade furnishing it by turns ; and 
will consist of such number and description of troops as shall 
be determined at head quarters. 

The guard of a Major General, is one subaltern, one Ser- 
geant, one Corporal, and twenty privates, to be furnished by 
his own division, each brigade furnishing it by turns. 

The guard of a Brigadier General, is one Sergeant, 
one Corpora], and twelve privates, to be furnished by his 
own brigade. 

256 



PART IV. IlKftULATlONS. 45 

Besides these guards, there shall be such others as may 
be found necessary for the protection of supplies in the Com- 
missariat's and Quartermaster's department, and also for 
the preservation of order at the hospitals. 

All guards are to mount at the same hour, which will be 
regulated by the commanding officer. 

The camp and quarter guards, are to parade before the 
centre of the regiment, where they will be formed by the 
Adjutant ; or, in his absence, by the officer of police, and 
sent off immediately to their respective posts. 

The guards of a Major General and a Brigadier General, 
are to be formed by the staff officer attached to the brigade, 
and sent from the brigade parade. 

The other guards, including that of the General-in-Chief, 
being composed of detachments from the line, by brigades, 
each detachment is formed on the brigade parade by the 
staff officer attached to the brigade, and sent with an Adju- 
tant or other commissioned officer, to the grand parade. 

All guards, except those which are honorary, should or- 
dinarily be of force proportioned to the number of sentinels 
required, allowing three reliefs to each post. 

In garrison, the number of guards depends on the extent 
of the fortress or post to be defended, and the strength of 
the garrison. 

The principal guard will be denominated the main guard ; 
and the lesser guards will take the names of the points to 
be guarded, as the arsenal guard, port guard, barrier guard. 

Officers commanding guards at the ports, are to cause the 
bridges to be drawn up or the barriers to be shut, on the ap- 
proach of any body of armed men, of which they are to 
give notice to the main guard, and are not to suffer any of 
them to enter the garrison without leave from the com- 
mandant. 

It is the duty of officers on all guards, to inspect all re- 
liefs of sentinels, both when they go on, and come off, their 
posts ; to call the rolls frequently, and, by every means in 
their power, to keep the men under their command in the 
most perfect state of vigilance and preparation. They will 
be responsible for the security of the prisoners and property 
committed to their charge ; and it will be their duty to sup- 
press all riots and disorders, and, in case of fire, to give the 
alarm and be instrumental in extinguishing it. They are 
W2 257 



46 PART IV. REGULATIONS. 

also watchfully to superintend the conduct of the non-com- 
missioned officers, taking care that they are correct in the 
performance of their duty : that they maintain a proper autho- 
rity, and prevent any species of irregularity among the men. 
They must particularly ascertain that 4he Corporals them- 
selves are well informed with respect to the orders they are 
to deliver to the several sentinels, whom they must frequently 
visit, to be assured that they know their duty, and have re- 
ceived the proper instructions. 

Officers commanding guards, when going to visit their 
sentinels, are to mention their intention, and the probable 
time of their absence, to the next officer in command. 

The officers are to remain constantly at their guards, ex- 
cept while visiting their sentinels ; nor are they to enter any 
house or place of public amusement. 

Neither officers nor soldiers are, on any account, to take 
ofT their clothing or accoutrements while they are on guard ; 
but are always to be in their uniform, fully equipped for the 
service. 

No non-commissioned officer or soldier is to quit his guard 
without leave, which is to be granted only upon particular 
occasions, and to very few at a time. If water or other 
necessaries are wanted for the guard, they must be sent for 
at a time when the sentinels are not relieving, by a non- 
commissioned officer and some men, with their arms, if at 
an outpost. 

At every relief, the guard must parade for roll call and 
inspection, and remain formed until the relief returns. 

A patrol, consisting of an officer, (if there be more than 
one on guard,) a non-commissioned officer, and a file of men, 
will be sent out as often as may be deemed necessary, to see 
that the sentinels understand their orders, to make observa- 
tions, gain information, and apprehend suspected persons. 

All reliefs and patrols will be conducted with the strictest 
silence, and on their return the non-commissioned officer will 
report to the officer of the guard every thing material that 
has transpired during their absence. 

During the day the men may be permitted to rest them- 
selves so much as is consistent with the safety of the guard ; 
but, in the night, no man must be suffered to lie down or 
sleep, on any account, but have his arms constantly in his 
hands, and be ready to fall in on the least alarm. 

258 



TART IV. BKOULATIONS. 47 

The officer who mounts the camp guard, must give orders 
to the sentinels not to suffer any person to pass in or out of 
camp, except by one of the guards ; nor then, till the officer 
of the guard has examined him. 

During the day the sentinels on the outposts must stop 
every party of men, whether armed or not, until they have 
been examined by the officer of the guard. 

No sentinel will be posted so distant as not to be heard by 
the guard, either directly or through other sentinels. 

A sentinel must take the greatest care not to be surprised. 
He must keep himself on the alert, observing every thing 
that takes place within his sight or hearing. He must never 
quit his arms, but move about briskly and without speaking. 
He must not suffer himself to be relieved, except by the Cor- 
poral of the guard, or some superior of his guard. If a dis- 
order take place, he must call out, the guard ; and if a fire 
break out, he must cry, fire. If, in either case, the danger 
be great, he must discharge his firelock before calling out. 

A sentinel, placed over the colours or arms, must suffer no 
person to touch them, except by order of some officer, or a 
non-commissioned officer of the guard. If placed over pri- 
soners, he must suffer no person, except an officer, or a non- 
commissioned officer of his guard, to converse with them : 
nor must he permit the prisoners to leave their places of con- 
finement. 

The sentinel at the guard-house or guard-tent, when he 
sees any body of troops, or an officer entitled to compliment, 
approach, must call, turn out the guard. 

The officer of the guard must see that the countersign is 

- duly communicated to the sentinels a little before twilight ; 

to enable him to do which, he must be furnished, by the 

officer of the day, with the parole and countersign before 

retreat. 

Immediately after receiving the countersign, and until re- 
veille, the sentinels must challenge all who approach them. 
No sentinel must suffer any person to advance nearer than 
the point of his bayonet until he has received the counter- 
sign, placing himself in the position of arms port for that 
purpose. 

A sentinel in challenging, will call out — who comes there? 
If answered— -friend, with the countersign, he will reply — 
advance friend, with the countersign. If answered — relief, 

259 



48 PART IV. REGULATIONS. 

patrol, or grand rounds ; he will reply — 'halt, advance, 
Sergeant, (or Corporal) and give the countersign, and 
satisfy himself that the party is what it represents itself to 
be. If he have no authority to pass persons with the counter- 
sign, or if the persons have not the countersign, he will call 
— Corporal of the guard. 

In case one of the guard desert, the officer must imme- 
diately change the countersign, and send notice thereof to 
the officer of the day, who is to communicate the same to 
the other guards and to head quarters. 

Though the regulations dispense with guards turning out 
as a matter of compliment, after sunset, this is by no means 
to prevent sentinels, when officers in uniform approach their 
post, paying them a proper attention, by standing steady, 
with carried arms, facing to their proper front ; nor is this 
to be discontinued until the evening is so far advanced that 
the sentinels begin challenging. 

When a fire breaks out, or any alarm is raised in a gar- 
rison, all guards are to be immediately under arms ; the 
barriers are to be shut, draw-bridges drawn up, and so con- 
tinue until the fire is extinguished, or the alarm ceases. 

The officer of the guard will send to the officer of the day, 
at guard-mounting, by a non-commissioned officer, a report 
of his tour of service, according to the form on the opposite 

260 



PART IV. REGULATIONS. 



49 



Report of a Guard, mounted at , on the , 

and relieved on the . 


Parole. 


CD 


1 

o 
o 


»3 

§ 

El 

c 
O 


| 
"8 


O 


7 

3 

c 


CD 

be 

& 

be 
< 


Articles in Charge. 


Countersign. 


















Detail - - 






1 










1 










List of the Guard. 


£ 


Reliefs, and when posted. 


Where 
Posted. 


Remarks. 


1st Relief, 

from 10 to 12, 

and 4 to 6. 


2d Relief, 
from 12 to 2, 
and 6 to 8. 


~M Relief, 
from 2 to 4 
& 8 to 10. 


i 

2 
3 
4 
5 










This column will con- 
tain the remarks of the 
officer of the guard ; such 
as— the time the guard 
was visited by the officer 
of the day ; and an ac- 
count of every material 
circumstance that has 
transpired during the tour. 


List of Prisoners. 


6 


Names 


S 

o 


o 


Confined. 


Charges. 


Sentences 


Remarks. 


When. 


By whom. 


1 
2 
3 
4 


















A. B. 


f 


! 

5 
















y 




Comman 


ding the 


Guard. 



201 



50 PART IV. REGULATIONS. 

The officer of the day, immediately after being relieved, 
will add to the guard report such remarks as circumstances 
require, and present the same at head quarters. 

An officer is not to be placed in charge of a guard, tiil 
he is sufficiently acquainted with his duty. For the purpose 
of instruction, young officers are to be put on duty as super- 
numeraries, with senior officers, from whose advice and ex- 
ample they may be expected to obtain a knowledge of their 
duty. 

ORDER OF ENCAMPMENT. 
Infantry. — (See Plate 1.) 

The troops are on all occasions to be encamped in the or- 
der of battle. 

The front of the camp will occupy the same extent of 
ground, as the troops when drawn up in line, according to 
their established formation. The intervals between the bat- 
talions will be forty-four feet. 

The companies will encamp in streets, perpendicularly to 
the line ; one-half of the tents on each side of the streets, 
facing inwards. The width of the streets will depend on 
the strength of the companies. The distance between each 
tent will be two feet ; the distance between the tents of one 
company and those of another, four feet. 

Thus, a regiment of six hundred men will occupy a front 
of six hundred feet each, allowing for each file two feet 
This front will be divided as follows: — First, deduct forty 
feet for the main street leading through the centre of the 
camp to the Colonel's or commanding officer's marquee ; 
there will then remain five hundred and sixty feet, to be di- 
vided among the companies on either side of the main street ; 
and if there be ten of them, each company will be allowed 
a front of fifty- six feet. 

The following will be the dimensions of a camp for a re- 
giment of six hundred men : 

Front, 600 feet. 

Depth, 810 feet. 

Feet. 
From the front of the line of company-tents to the 

chain-sentinels of the first line, 500 

262 



PART IV. REGULATIONS. 51 

This space to be subdivided as follows : Feet. 
From the front line of company-tents to the stacks 

« of arms, drums, and colours, 20 

Thence to the regimental parade, 60 

Thence to the sinks of the men, 320 

Thence to the front of the officer of guard's tent, . . 60 

Thence to the chain of sentinels, 40 

From the first line of company-tents to the front of 

the company officers' tents, 140 

This space to be subdivided as follows : 
From the front of the company officers' tents to the 

company kitchens, 30 

Thence to the front of the company-tents, 110 

From the front of the company officers' tents to the 

front of the tents of the field and staff, 40 

Thence to the kitchens of the officers and tents of 

sutlers, 40 

Thence to batmans' tents, 16 

Thence to horses and baggage- wagons, 20 

Thence to officers' sinks, 30 

Thence to the quarter-guard, 12 

Thence to the chain of sentinels, 12 



The tents of all the officers will face towards the front ; 
those of the Captains will be placed on a prolongation of the 
line of the right flanks of the companies, and those of the 
subalterns on a prolongation of the line of the left flanks ; 
the Colonel's or commanding officer's marquee in the centre 
of the main street ; the Lieutenant-Colonel's opposite to the 
centre of the right wing ; the Major's opposite to the centre 
of the left wing ; the Adjutant half-way between the Colonel 
and Lieutenant-Colonel ; the Surgeon half-way between the 
Colonel and Major ; the Quartermaster on the right of the 
Lieutenant-Colonel, half-way between his position and the 
flank ; the Assistant-Surgeon on the left of the Major, half- 
way between his position and the flank. 

The non-commissioned staff to be encamped on the pro- 
ongation of the lines of tents, and in a line with the compa- 

263 



52 PART IV. REGULATIONS. 

ny kitchens, on each side of the main street, facing from the 
street. 

The Sergeants of companies to occupy a tent on the right 
of their companies, In the front line. The Corporals to be 
distributed among their respective squads. 

The company kitchens will be placed, those of the right 
wing, on a line with the right of the companies ; those of 
the left wing, on a line with the left of the companies. 

The sinks will always be hid from public view, by encir- 
cling them with bushes or other blinds ; a portion of the 
earth dug out of them ought every day be thrown in to co- 
ver the filth, should the troops remain encamped on the same 
ground any length of time. 

When the army encamps in two lines, the second line will 
be formed eight hundred feet in rear of the first. 

The camp-guards of the second line will be the same dis- 
tance in the rear that they are in front, in the first line ; and 
also the sinks of the men. 

Cavalry. — (See Plate 2.) 

The cavalry will encamp by squadrons, each squadron 
occupying the same front that it does when drawn up in the 
order of battle, with the same intervals being preserved be- 
tween the squadrons. 

Two companies constitute a squffdron. Each company of 
a squadron pitches its tents in one row perpendicularly to the 
front, facing inwards. The horses of each company are 
picketed in a line parallel to the tents, with their heads to- 
wards them. Each horse, so picketed, will require about 
five feet ; the depth of the row will depend on the number 
of horses in the company. The tents will be pitched at 
equal distances from each other, so as to allow space between 
them respectively, for the forage of the horses belonging to 
the men of the respective tents. The tents of the Sergeants 
will always be pitched at the head of the row, and on the 
line of encampment. The distance between the Sergeant's 
tent and the adjacent tent, will be double the distance be- 
tween the" other tints, so as to allow for the forage for the 
Sergeants' horses, and those of the men in the next tent, 
and thus rendering it unnecessary to place the forage of the 
last tent in the row, on the side of the kitchens, where it 
might be exposed to fire. 

264 



TART IV. REGULATIONS. 53 

Each company of sixty mounted dragoons, will occupy a 
front of ninety feet, which will be divided as follows : 

* Feet. 

For pitching a horseman's tent, 9 

From front poll of tents to pickets, 12 

From pickets to the edge of the dung, 18 

Breadth of the dung, 6 

A squadron of two companies will occupy a front of 180 
feet, so that there will be between the dung of each compa- 
ny, a street of 90 feet. 

If a company encamp by itself, it will observe the same 
rule, except that it will be formed in two rows of tents, in- 
stead of one. 

If there be an odd company in a squadron, or with the 
regiment, it will encamp in the same manner as is directed 
for the other companies of the squadron ; that is, in one row, 
and facing towards the company next to it, whether it be on 
the right or the left, preserving a distance equal to its front 
when in line. 

The horses of the rear-rank are always to be picketed 
next to their file-leaders. 

The horses of company officers are to be picketed in a 
line with the company horses, on the flank towards the offi- 
cers' tents. 

The non-commissioned staff will encamp in a line with 
the field and staff. 

The horses of the field and staff are to be picketed in the 
rear of their respective tents. 

The remainder of the encampment, including guards, bag- 
gage, sutlers, kitchens, batmen, and sinks, will conform to 
that of the infantry. 

Artillery. — (See Plates 1 and 2.) 

The artillery will encamp in such positions as may be se- 
lected by the commander of the troops to which it may be 
attached, who will always take into consideration the pro- 
tection proper to be afforded from the line, as well as the 
facility with which it may get into position, in case of an at- 
tack : but batteries which form a part of the order of battle, 
will encamp upon the same line with the troops. Mounted 
artillery will encamp according to the order for the cavalry, 
and foot-artillery according to the order for the infantry. 

X 265 



PI. 1. 



PART IV 



REGULATIONS. 



ORDER OF ENCAMPMENT FOR A REGIMENT OF INFANTRY. 



Chain of Sentinels 



-id m~- 

Camp Guard. 

! 13 i 

O Men's Sinks, c 

! i 

i i 



'-.)<- — Line of Colours and - 



Regimental Parade Ground. • 



i*&. 



Front line of Company Tents. 



56 || 56 || 56 gg 56 g 40 | M gg 56 gg 56 gg 
gB II II 1 § i| BB BB 



IB 



Hi 



BB 

ea 



BB 

bb 



E3 

S3 



QB 

QQ 



Company Kitchens. 

Q] Q] B B O O 

fTon Commissioned Staff. 

Company Officers 

BB Sll D B EB EiS 

Field ! and 

D B ; B 

Officers' Kitchens 



SB 

BB 



ID 
DO 



8 8 



4 

o 

■ * 



Tents 
gWe.ns.g 



8 

Sinks, a 



266 



PART IV. REGULATIONS. pj ., 

our » noumvn fok _ TW o souadrons op oavalrt. 



►---•O-'-.-O- 



f E]- — 

j Camp Guard. • 

: b • 

***"•"■ *• Men's SiflJu.^.o—.-o. — . 

i : 

I 

• i 

i 



•-"O-™* 



Parade » „_ . 

m,mi~m ,„I _9£°. nn<1 ' 



B : j: 

Pj !: 

(i| j; 

L* 'I 

H° ii 

bfjj 

Nil 



Front Una or | 

IH 

;! id 



! E i 

j *EJ 



Company Tents. ' 



jiH 

IU.EJ 



"Jrj 

Hi; 

Hi 

N ! ,'j 

Ml 

; i i' 

i ! !| 

Li! 



•- u. 



.Jj^ 



PI Company (H 

El U "Company" "g] ^|J" 



Ql Kitchens. 



- H ^--S-^ B f---»^....s £ . 



•' ..... V 

P "U""6ffl c 'e"r;"""1]""^| ( 

u — -* 



, M Horses and 31 , 

— "-»o o /, T 1 i 



O I Offlcere.Sink 
"<Jua"rt"eF"i g] 



;« 



Guard." 



Wagons. TfjTg 



267 



g6 PART IV. KKGULATIOXS. 

HONOURS TO BE PAID BY THE TROOPS. 
The President is to be saluted with the highest honours— 
auTfandardfand colours dropping, officers saluting, drums 

mareh "ndaU the officers salutin g, s«an ards drop n ^ 
infantry, with drums beating the march, colours dropping 
officers saluting, and arms presented. 

A Maior-General is to be received— by ca^alrj.'nnu 

dropping, officers saluting, and arms presented. . 

A Britradier-General sto be received— by cav alp , v ,1111 

*tf»S5£3MK=S33i • jg t 

drawn, officers saluting-by infantrj r office, s salu tin 
arms presented. The same honours to be paid to anj 
officer, authorized to renew and inspec the trwpe. 

the inspecting officer is J"«™toop h . tweeted, 
parade, and in the command o "the tr °°P s ^°j d J& only 
no compliments will be paid ; he will be recenea , 

and^prestttms Mce a day; after which they turn out 

turn out with shouldered arms, once a day , at other 
Wi Whence command of a regiment devolves on a JJ-* 
ant-Colonel or Mnjor, the regimenta guarjyuU pa> 
the same compliment as is ordered for the Colonel. ^ 



PART IV. REGULATIONS. 57 

To the Secretary of State, Treasury, War, and Navy 
Departments, and other members of the Cabinet ; to the 
Chief Justice the President pro tempore of the Senate, and 
Speaker of the House of Representatives of the United 
States, and to Governors, xvithin their respective States and 
lerntories—the same honours will be paid as are specified 
lor a Major-General commanding in chief. 

The colours of a regiment passing a guard, are to be sa- 
luted with the utmost respect, the trumpets sounding, and the 
drums beating a march. 

When two regiments meet on their march, the regiment 
inferior in rank is to halt, and form in parade order, and sa- 
lute the other regiment, which proceeds on its march, with 
swords drawn and bayonets fixed, trumpets sounding or 
drums beating standards or colours flying, until it has clear- 
ed the front of the regiment which has halted. 

When guards present their arms, the officers, on all occa- 
sions, salute with their swords. 

When general officers, or persons entitled to a salute, pass 
in the rear of a guard, the officer is only to make his men 
stand shouldered, and not to face his guard about, or beat 
his drum. ' 

When general officers, or persons entitled to a salute, pass 
guards while in the act of relieving, both guards are Jo sa- 
lute, receiving the word of command from the senior officer 
or the whole. 

All guards are to be under arms when armed parties an- 
proach their posts ; and to parties commanded by commis- 
sioned officers, they are to present their arms, drums beating 
a march, and officers saluting. S 

Sentinels will present arms to all general and field officers 
and to the officer of the day ; to alf other officers they wil 
carry arms. y 

No compliments by guards or sentinels will be paid be- 
ZlTds Tetreat and r€Veille > exce ^ as Prescribed for -grand 

Sergeants, with swords drawn, will salute by bringing 
them to a recover-with muskets, by bringing the left hand 
across the body, so as to strike the musket°near the ri'ht 
shoulder. Corporals out of the ranks will carry their mus- 
kets at a shou der, as Sergeants, and salute in like manner. 

When a soldier without arms, or with side arms onlv 
X2 269 



58 PART IV. REGULATIONS. 

«««*« -,n officer he will continue to move on, but he is to 

a suitable acknowledgment to the compliment.thus received. 
Salutes. 
The President of the United States alone is to receive 

*S£Zti&* is defined by the number of States 

composing the Union, at the rate of one gun for each State. 

The Wee President is to receive a salute of twenty-one 

gU The Heads of the great Executive Departments of the 
N J£na7 Government f the Major-General command lng ^ 
army; the Governors of States and Terntor.es, within 
their respective jurisdictions— seventeen guns. 

A Major-General, fifteen guns. 

A Brisadier-General, thirteen guns. 

A general officer will be saluted but once ,n a year at each 
post and only when notice of his intention to v.s.t the post 

^Satoestlndividuals are to be fired on their arrival only. 
A national salute will be fired at meridian, on the anniver- 
sary of the Independence of the United States, at each mil.- 
tary post and camp. 

Escorts of Honour. 

aS SSS» 8 and escorting the personage is 
"Clscort will be drawn np in line, the centre opposite to 
J£££Z the personage J— «— *S^ £ 
terval between the wmgs to rece „e the perso „ a 

r tiDUe ' „ e n to hl hV a .E ra Whe. h hS Sen his place in 
iT^twiiotewdl 'be wheeled into platoons oreomp, 



PART TV. REGULATIONS. 59 

nieg, as the case may be, and take up the march. The same 
ceremony will be observed, and the same honours paid, on 
his leaving the escort. 

When the position of the escort is at a considerable dis- 
_ance from the point where the personage is expected to be 
received, as for instance, where a court-yard or wharf inter- 
venes, a double line of sentinels will be posted from that 
point to the escort, facing inwards, and the sentinels will suc- 
cessively salute as the personage passes. 

An officer will be appointed to attend the personage escort- 
ed, to bear such communications as he may have to make to 
the commander of the escort. 

Funeral Honours. 
On the receipt of official intelligence of the death of the 
President of the United States, at any post or camp, the 
commanding officer shall, on the following day, cause a gun 
to be fired at every half-hour, beginning at sunrise and end- 
ing at sunset. When posts are contiguous, the firing will 
officer Qt P ° St ° nly commanded b y. the superior 

On the day of the interment of a Major-General com- 
manding m chief, a gun will be fired at every half-hour 
unM the procession moves, beginning at sunrise. 

I he funeral escort of a Major- General commanding in 
chief shall consist of a regiment of infantry, a squadron of 
cavalry, and six pieces of artillery. 

That of * Major-General, a regiment of infantry, a squad- 
ron of cavalry, and four pieces of artillery. # 

That of a Brigadier-General, a regiment of infantry, one 
company of cavalry, and two pieces of artillery. 
That of a Colonel, a regiment. 
That of a Lieutenant. Colonel, six companies. 
That of a Major, four companies. 
That of a Captain, one company. 
That of a Subaltern, half a company. 
The funeral escort shall always be commanded by an of- 
ficer of the same rank with the deceased ; or if none such be 
present, by one of the next inferior grade. 

The funeral escort of a non-commissioned staff officer 
shall consist of sixteen rank and file, commanded by a Ser- 
geant. 

271 



60 TART IV. EEGULATIONS. 

That of a Sergeant, of fourteen rank and file, commanded 
by a Sergeant. 

That of a Corporal, of twelve rank and file, commanded 
by a Corporal ; and 

That of a Private, of eight rank and file, commanded b\ 
a Corporal. 

The escort will be formed in two ranks, opposite to the 
quarters or tent of the deceased, with shouldered arms and 
bayonets fixed ; the artillery and cavalry on the right of the 
infantry. 

On the appearance of the corpse, the officer commanding 
the escort will command — -present-arms ; when the honours 
due to the deceased will be paid- by the drums and trumpets. 
The music will then play an appropriate air, and the coffin 
will be taken to the right, where it will be halted. The com- 
mander will next order — Shoulder— arms. By company (or 
platoon)-left wheel-march. Column-forward, guide right- 
march. 

The column will be marched, in common time, to appro- 
priate music ; and, on reaching the grave, will take a direc- 
tion so as that the guides shall be next to the grave. When 
the centre of the column is opposite the grave, the com- 
mander will order — Column-halt. Right into line-wheel — 
march. 

The coffin is then brought along the front, and the com- 
mander then orders — Present— arms ; and when the coffin 
reaches the grave, he adds — Shoulder-arms. Order-arms. 
Rest. 

After the funeral service is performed, and the coffin is 
lowered into tile grave, the commander will order — Atten- 
tion. Shoulder- arms. Load in quickest time. Load ; — 
when three rounds of small arms will be fired by the escort, 
taking care to elevate the pieces. ' 

This being done, the commander will order — By company 
(or platoon), right wheel-march. Column forward, guide 
left, quick-march. 

The music will not begin to play until the escort is clear 
of the enclosure or burying-ground. 

COLOUR ESCORT. 

When a battalion turns out under arms, and the colour is 
wanted, one of the flank companies in its turn, or if hoth be 

272 



PART IV. REGULATIONS. 61 

absent, a battalion company, other than that of the colour 

will be put in march to receive and escort the colour. 

The march will be in the following order, in quick time, 
and without music :— the drum-major and field-music, fol- 
lowed by the band ; the escort in column, by platoon, right 
--1 front, with arms shifted to the right shoulder, and the co- 
lour-bearer between the platoons. 

Arrived in front of the tent or quarters of the Colonel 
the escort will form line, the field-music and band on the 
right, and arms will be carried. 

The moment the escort shall be in line, the colour-bearer 
preceded by the first lieutenant, and followed by a sergeant 
of the escort, will go to receive the colour. 

When the colour-bearer shall come out, followed by the 
lieutenant and sergeant, he will halt before the entrance • 
the escort will present arms, and the drums will beat to the 
colour for half a minute, when arms will be shouldered and 
the escort will break into column by platoon ; the colour- 
bearer will place himself between the platoons, and the lieu- 
tenant and sergeant will resume their posts. 

The escort will march back to the battalion to the sound 
of music, in quick time, and in the same order as above. 

Arrived at the distance of twenty paces from the battal- 
ion, the escort will halt, and the music cease; the Colonel 
will place himself six paces before the centre of the battalion 
the colour-bearer will approach the Colonel, by the front, in 
quick time ; when at the distance of ten paces, he will halt ; 
the Colonel will cause arms to be presented, and to the co- 
lour to be played, which being executed, the colour-bearer 
will take his place in the front-rank of the colour-o-uard, and 
the battalion, by command, will shoulder arms. 

The escort, field- music, and band, will return in quick 
time to their several places in the line of battle, marching bv 
the rear of the battalion. ° 

The colour will be escorted back to the ColonePs tent or 
quarters, in the above order. 

REVIEW. 

A battalion being in the order of battle, the Colonel will 
command— Battalion, prepare for review. To the 

REAR OPEN ORDER-MARCH 

273 



62 PART IV. REGULATIONS. 

At the word march, the field and staff officers dismount ; 
the company officers and the colour-rank advance four paces 
in front of the first rank, and place themselves opposite to 
their respective places in the order of battle ; the staff officers 
place themselves on the right of the rank of company offi- 
cers, according to their relative rank, one pace from each 
other ; the music advances through the centre, and forms in 
two ranks — the band, if there be one, in front, between the 
colours and the line ; the colour-guard replace the colour- 
rank ; the Quartermaster-Sergeant and the Sergeant-Major 
on the right of the front-rank of the battalion. 

When the ranks are aligned, the Colonel will command — 
front, and place himself eight paces, the Lieutenant-Colonel 
and Major two paces, in front of the rank of company offi- 
cers, and opposite to their respective places in the order of 
battle. 

A camp colour is to be originally placed eighty or one hun- 
dred paces in front of the centre of the battalion, where the re- 
viewing officer is supposed to take his station ; and although 
he may choose to quit that position, still the colour is to be 
considered as the point to which all movements and forma- 
tions are relative. 

When the reviewing officer presents himself before the 
centre, and is fifty or sixty paces distant, the Colonel will 
command — present-arsis. The men present arms, and 
the officers salute, so as to drop their swords with the last 
motion of presented arms ; the music will play, and all the 
drums will beat, according to the rank of the reviewing of- 
ficer. The colours only salute such persons as, from their 
rank and by regulation, are entitled to that honour. 

The Colonel will next command — shoulder— arms, when 
the men will shoulder, and the officers recover their swords 
with the last motion. 

The reviewing officer will then go towards the right, the 
whole remaining perfectly steady, without paying any fur- 
ther compliment, while he passes along the front of the bat- 
talion and proceeds round the left flank and along the rear 
to the right. When the reviewing officer is going round the 
battalion, the band will play, and will cease when he has 
returned to the right flank of the battalion. 

While the reviewing officer is proceeding to place him- 
self in the front, the Colonel will command — close order- 
s' i 



PART IV. REGULATIONS. 03 

march when all persons, except the Colonel, will resume 
their places in the order of battle ; the field and staff officers 
mounted. 

The reviewing officer having taken his position near the 
camp colour, the Colonel will command— by company 

RIGHT WHEEL-MARCH. PASS IN REVIEW. COLUMN, FOR-' 

ward, guide right-march. The battalion will break into 
column of companies, right in front, and the column will bo 
put in motion; the Colonel four paces in front of the Captain 
of the leading company; the Lieutenant-Colonel on a line 
with the leading company ; the Major on a line with the rear 
company ; the Adjutant on a line with the second company ; 
the Sergeant-Major on a line with the company next to the 
rear ; each six paces from the flank opposite to the review- 
ing officer; the staff officers in one rank, according to the 
order of precedency, four paces in rear of the column; the 
music, preceded by the principal musician, six paces before 
the Colonel ; the pioneers, preceded b V a Corporal, four 
paces before the principal musician ; and the Quartermaster- 
bergeant two paces from the side opposite to the guides, and 
in a line with the pioneers. 

All other officers and non-commissioned officers will march 
past in the places prescribed for them in the march of an 
open column. 

The guides and soldiers will keep their heads well to the 
tront in passing in review. 

an Jsa e iutfn7* bearer ^ ^^ '" the mnks whiIe P assi «S 
Points will be fixed by the Adjutant for the several wheel- 

3 l^'K T n ? '' S ° that , their ri § ht flanks > in niarching 
past, shall be only four paces distant from the camp colour 
where it is supposed the reviewing officer places himself to 
receive the salute. 

rank^ C ° 1Umn ^ ^^ P&St * COmmon time > with closed 

The music will begin to play just after the leading com- 
pany has made the second wheel ; it will M'heel to the left 
out of the column, and take a position opposite to, and fac- 
ing, the reviewing officer, and will continue to play until the 
rear of the column shall have passed him, when it will cease 
to play and follow in the rear of the battalion. 

The officers will salute the reviewing officer when they 



64 PART IV. REGULATIONS. 

arrive within six paces of him, and recover their swoids 
when ten paces past him, without in the least altering the 
rate of march. All officers in saluting, will cast their eyes 
towards the reviewing officer. The Colonel, when he has 
saluted at the head of the battalion, will place himself neai 
the reviewing officer, and will remain there until the rear 
has passed, when he will join the battalion. 

The colour will salute the reviewing officer when within 
six paces of him. When the colour salutes, the drums will 
pay the prescribed compliment. 

When the rear of the column has passed the reviewing 
officer, the Colonel will command— guide left. 

The column will proceed on the alignment until it shall 
have arrived at the point where its head or right is to be 
placed, when the Colonel will command— column, halt. 
Left into line wheel-march. It will then be wheeled 
into line, and placed in the order of battle. ' 

When the line shall have been formed, the Colonel will 
cause the battalion to perform such exercises and manoeu- 
vres as may be required by the reviewing officer. 

The review will terminate by bringing the troops into line 
opposite to the reviewing officer, ranks opened, and the whole 
saluting as at the beginning. 

When two or more battalions are to be reviewed, they 
will be formed in parade order, with the prescribed intervals, 
and will perform the same movements that are laid down ior 
a single battalion, observing the additional directions that are 
o-iven for such movements when applied to the line. 1 he 
Bricradier and his staff, on foot, will place themselves oppo- 
site* the centre of the brigade; the Brigadier two paces in 
front of the rank of Colonels ; his aid on his right, one pace 
retired; and the other brigade staff officers, those having the 
rank of field officers, in the rank of Lieutenant-Colonels and 
Majors : and those below that rank, in the rank of company 

° ^passing in review, a Major-General will be four paces 
in front of the Colonel of the leading battalion of his divi- 
sion ; and the Brigadiers will be on the right of the Colonels 
of the leading battalions of their brigades; staff officers on 
the left of their Generals. 

Upon occasions when the line exceeds two battalions, the 
reviewing officer may, at his option, cause them to^marcn 



PART IV. REGULATIONS. 05 

past in quick time, in order to save time. Upon these occa- 
sions the mounted officers only will salute. 

A number of companies less than a battalion, will be re- 
viewed as a battalion ; and a single company, as if it were 
with the battalion. In the latter case, the'company w i I pass 
in- offi^ P t0 ° nS ' accordin S t0 the order of the review! 

The review of cavalry or artillery, mounted, or with 

R;^ cond r ed on the same **«*■■* -^T g 

If d ' ff e«?ice of organization, and the words of com- 
mand appropriate to the respective arms 

INSPECTION. 

The inspection of the troops will generally be preceded by 

lntZ eW tk prGSent GXampIe embrace s a battalion of in- 
1 k ' r 6 , ms P ectin § omcer ™t the field and staff officers 
\viii oe on toot. 

WIlT™ batt f a ! ion u be ; n ? in the order of battle, the Colonel 

n Lnt uT b n eak ; nt °,° Pe I! C ° lLlmn 0f companies, right 
n fiont. He will next order the ranks to be opened, when 

fr^faZtrh an H d , C ° l0Ur " gUard WiU takG P° St * en P aces * 
front and the band ten paces in rear of the column. 

Ihe Colonel, seeing the ranks aligned, will command— 

OFFICERS AND NON-COMMISSIONED OFFICERS, TO THE FRONT 

of your companies-march. The officers will form them! 

^rl l L° tte ™ nk l el $ ht paC6S ' and the non-commissioned 
officers in one rank, six paces, in advance, along the whole 
ironts of their respective companies, from risht to left, in the 
order of seniority ; the pioneers and music <Tf each company 
in one rank, two paces behind the non-commissioned officers. 
Ihe Colonel will next command— field and staff. To 

nated FR °?. T "r MARC ?' ^ comm issioned officers thus desig- 
nated, will form themselves in one rank, six paces in from 
of the colours, from right to left, in the order of seniority: 
and the non-commissioned staff, in a similar manner, two 
paces in rear of the preceding rank. The Colonel, seeing 
Ihe movement executed, will take post on the right of the 
Wenant-Colonel, and wait the approach of thelnspecting 

The inspection will commence in front. After inspecting 
1 ono l 17 f neral ap P earance of the field and commis- 
sioned staff under arms, the Inspector, accompanied by these ' 

Y 277 



A- 

qq PART IV. REGULATIONS. 

officers, will pass down the open column, looking at every 
rank in front and rear. 

The Colonel will now command— obdek arms, kest , 
when the Inspector will proceed to make a minute inspection 
of the several ranks or divisions, in succession, commencing 

ln As"the Inspector approaches the non-commissioned staff, 
colour rank, the colour-guard, and the band, the Adjutant 
wilAve the necessary orders for the inspection of arms, 
tees and knapsacks. The colours will be P^fed firm in 
the ground, to enable the colour-bearers to display the con- 
tents of their knapsacks. The non-commissioned staff may 
be dismissed as soon as inspected ; but the colour-rank and 
colour guard will remain until the colours are to be escorted 
to the oiace from which they were taken. 

As theTnspector successively approaches the compames, 
the Captains will command— attention, inspection of arms 
The Inspector will go through the whole company com 
mencin/with the non-commissioned officers. The Captain 
wilUhen command-open-^; when they will also be 

'"TheCaptain will next command— Stack-arms. To the 
rear open order-march. Front-rank, about-face. Ln- 
^-fnapsacks. Open-knapsacks The .arms of the non- 
commissioned officers will be stacked in the centre of their 

ra The knapsacks will be placed at the feet of the men the 
flaps from them, with the great-coats on ^ flap* and £ 
knapsacks leaning on the great-coats. In thi ' P°»^» ™ 
Inspector will examine the contents of the whole or of as 
many as he may think necessary, commencmg with the non- 
commissioned officers. . ,, •„ ,__-_>. 
As the Inspector passes the companies, they will succes 
siveiv under the orders of their respective Captains, repack 
and reslinc knapsacks, resume their arms, and file off to 
their tents* or quarters; except the company that is to re 
escort the colours, which will wait the further orders of the 

C 1n n a e n extensive column, some of the rearmost companies 
may, after the inspection of dress and S^ral appearance 
be permitted to stack arms, until just before the Inspector 



PAKT IV. REGULATIONS. 6? 

EESZ&SR** wi " ta *— to '« fe «*»■ 

s J wiSir^Lvs bein , g end i d - the faM •*» 

gazine, arsenal, quarters 7 su, eTf '° ^ J^*"* ma " 
such other places as he mav 7h? nt P ' g uard " ho "^. and 
Captains an'd subaherns ^^IZVl "^ V? 
companies and sections respeSy ° H ' S V ' S " S t0,heir 

spector the word JE£ "ll te ^TT ° f - the '"- 
comm.ssioned officer present when ,t 7 u , Sen,or non - 
with the hand, withoufunco^rnr "" ""^ Wi " Sa,Ute 

.he'nLloToTthVSrter lh e e of P"?,^"-*"* ° f 
and table utensils,\nd SU ch other oh" :" d beddin S> «*** 
themselves,- and afterwards thetxter^r' 5 """'P"**" 

at the Adjutant office „!?'■ °' e '° gether ' generally 

not o«herwt a ;a S rt i°c^ e ri; n e m ; n oy P e T enCe ° f a " ,be ° ffic - 

tenants of sections oneZ/wXesLvT'^ " nd L J eU " 
regard to his company or section r^ZZ'"^ '" 
Will also make a thorough inspection^ f£ .7" ■ S , ur S eo "s 
Satin-day morning ° lns P ectlon of their hospitals every 

to !£5£rJf S2 o eque t nl visi lf wi " be ™ de d -'X 



69 PART IV. REGULATIONS. 

CALLING OUT THE MILITIA FOR THE SERVICE 
OF THE UNITED STATES. 
Whenever detachments of militia are called into the ser- 
vice of the United States, by any offieef authorized to make 
such call, the number of officers, non-commissioned officers-, 
and privates, will be stated in the requisition, and the pro- 
portions between them will be the same as is prescribed by 
the act of Congress. Requisitions will never be made tor 
companies, regiments, or brigades. 

Such detachments as are called or received into the ser- 
vice of the United States, will be mustered before they shall 
be considered in service, by an Inspector-General, or some 
other officer of the regular army, to be designated by the of- 
ficer requiring such militia aid. 

It shall be the duty of the officer designated, to muster and 
inspect militia detachments, to organize them into companies, 
battalions, and regiments, and to forward muster rolls of 
each company, and of the field and staff of each organized 
regiment, direct to the Adjutant-General of the army, Wash- 
in^ton ; and he will also immediately forward a consolidated 
return, by regiments and corps, of the force so received into 
service, for the information of the War Department. 

Officers charged with the duty of mustering militia, pro- 
perly ordered into the service of the United States, prepara- 
tory to payment, will take care that the muster rolls contain 
all the information that may in any way affect their pay : 
the distance from the places of residence to the place of ren- 
dezvous or organization, and the date of arrival, must be 
stated in each case ; the date and place of discharge, and the 
distance thence to the place of residence ; all stoppages for 
articles furnished by the government, must be noted on the 
rolls, and in cases of absence at the time of discharge of the 
company, the cause of absence must be stated. When the 
necessary information cannot be obtained, the mustering of- 
ficer will state the cause, otherwise he will be held accounta- 
ble for the defect. . . 

No general staff officers will be mustered or received into 
' service, except such general officers, with their aides-de- 
camp, as may be required to complete the organization ot 
brigades or divisions, where the strength of the detachments 
renders such organization necessary. 



PART IV. REGULATIONS. flO, 

All supernumerary officers will be rejected, and the or 
ganization of each detachment will correspond with the acts 
of Congress regulating the m j| itia# 

Payments will, in all cases, be made by the Paymasters 
of the regular army, and only upon rolls which shall have 
ZndhX ■ bee / 1 r^ 1 ^ t0 the ^y^ster-General, and 
ions nil Ta f m COnfbrmit y with law, and the regula- 
tions of the department. ° 

MANNER OF ISSUING AND DISTRIBUTING 
ORDERS. 

Orders are either general or special. Genera! orders is 

Orient h6 ^ d "TT ° CZ a ™^ are SdflSS 
£lr? Th other head quarters, they are simply styled 

aToften , 7 "V* ° rderS ° f the da y' and "e 'published 
as often as circumstances may render it necessary. Thev 

pres n o C f e f he e H°t r K ly t hOUr ? at head ( ' uarters ' ^.ime and 
march ? f ' he d' st "°""°n°f supplies; thetime and order of 

m™,^' i U u ° f the dlfferent beats and signals, of guard 

tTons of" 8 ' a " d th t assemblia g of detachments; the refula- 
ions of -police ; the strength and composition of guardsfand 
he periods of their relief; the number andgrade! of Order 
hes ; the appomting of general courts martitl, courts of in 
quiry, boards of officers, and their sentences and opinions 
he °Z meDdat, T'- ° r animad versions which the conductor 
ttcukr n P ^ may el ' C1 S aS weU as ex hortations suitable to par- 
ticular occasions; and m general, every occurrence proper 
to be communicated to the troops or others interested. 

Special orders, are such orders as do not relate to the 
serv.ee m general. They have reference to particular ob? 
jects and individual, only. They need not, therefore be 
[he office ° K he Wh ° le , army ' ° r to the wh ole' command of 
d»,l lf n V 'T 68 ] hem - Besides the P articul « indivi- 
eve tl SUCh ^^ may be Sent direct - 'hey are, how- 
ever to be communicated, as a matter of course, to Colonels, 
or other commanders whom they interest. 

Orders are to be numbered-^emZ orders, in one sc 
nes-speczal orders, in another. Each series fti „ n armv 
army corps division, or brigade, in the field, will commence 
and termmate with a campaign. In departments, regiment? 



281 



70 PART IV. REGULATIONS. 

companies, and garrisons, they will commence and terminate 
with the year. 

The parole, and countersign, or watchword, are issued 
from the head quarters of the highest in command. They 
are in the nature of orders, but are neither general nor 
special. 

The parole is imparted to such officers only, as have a 
right to visit the guards,' and to make the grand rounds; and 
to the officers commanding guards, by which they are ena- 
bled, at night, to recognise the grand rounds. No person 
under the rank of commissioned officer, is entitled to re- 
ceive it. 

The countersign, or watchword, is given to such persons 
as are entitled to pass and repass during the night, and to 
the officers, non-commissioned officers, and sentinels of the 
guards. The object of this word is to prevent improper per- 
sons, or those not authorized to pass the chain of sentinels, 
from either entering or going out of camp or garrison, and 
to guard against surprise. 

The head of the order will indicate the source from which 
it. emanates, as well as the place and date, and the foot of 
the order will cite the name of the commander who gives 
the order. 

The orderly hour having been fixed at each head quarters, 
the staff officers will either attend in person, or send their 
assistants to obtain the orders of the day : the chief of the 
staff for an army-corps, to general head quarters : the chief 
of the staff of a division, to army-corps head quarters : the 
chief of the staff of a brigade, to division head quarters : 
the Adjutant of a regiment, to brigade head quarters : the 
First Sergeants of companies, to regimental head quarters 

282 



THE END. 



